A Chronological History of the Development of Our Techno-Slavery

A Chronological History of the

Psychopathic Elite’s Development of

Techno-Slavery

__________________ (Version IV) Anthony Forwood

LAST UPDATE: July 18, 2014 A NEW OVERVIEW FOR READERS: What follows below is a chronology of historical events that tie together the evidence of a long-term secret agenda being carried out by a psychopathic ruling elite to implement total human enslavement on a global scale. This chronology encompasses several notable areas of their operation: - The psychopathic elite operate through various powerful secret societies, government agencies, and private organizations, so I have attempted to include information on the more significant of these groups whenever possible. - Since mind-control programming techniques and technologies are a major aspect of this agenda, I have attempted to pay close attention to the developmental history of all relevant techniques and technologies. - Because the UFO enigma arose parallel to the start of the US government’s secret mind-control programs (MKULTRA) and appears to have been used in the capacity of psychological operations (psyops) to cover up many of those programs, I have included a number of significant UFO events that reflect the developmental stage of mind-control techniques and technologies at the times involved.

- Many cults and New Age groups have been used for these mind-control programs or have grown out of them, so I’ve included information on these as well, whenever possible. These cults and New Age groups are seemingly autonomous entities that come and go, but they are essentially under the control of more powerful secret societies and are there to fulfill certain aspects of the elite’s agenda. - The many cases of domestic terrorism that have been occurring more and more frequently over the years suggest that the perpetrators are possibly mind-controlled and that these incidents are all part of this Orwellian agenda, so I have also included relevant information on these events whenever possible. These include serial killings, mass shootings, assassinations, and other possible false flag events. - A deeper aspect of the mind-control involves sex-slavery, pedophilia, and other satanic activity that takes place to serve the corrupted pleasures of the psychopathic elite, and so I’ve also included whatever significant events I’ve come across that reveal this aspect of the mind-control and the deeper secret agenda. These six areas reflect certain distinct stages in the development and application of the elite’s Orwellian agenda, and they can be better understood for what they are and how they have systematically led from one to the next – as compared to the separate and unrelated incidents that they’re more commonly believed to be – when considered within the progressive stages of a historical chronology, as set forth here. This work is first and foremost a personal reference for my own use in my research into these things, but I’m making it publicly available since it may be of some help to others in their own research efforts. Many entries that I hope to include in this document are still missing, others are still short on information while some are perhaps too long, and many aren’t directly significant but are included because they have historical significance to those that are. Whatever the case, few if any of these entries should be ignored in attempting to piece together and understand the progressive line of development and implementation of total mind-control within our global society. No matter, I think readers who simply skim through this document will still find many interesting and useful pieces of information, but to fully understand the deeper truth of the situation that we find ourselves in today, more than just the information presented here will be required, even though I hope that the shadows of this deeper truth will reflect through to the discerning reader. Each entry in this document has been added as the information has come to my attention, and although I have often resorted to outright plagiarism (!) and not always giving proper credit (!), this has only been out of a personal necessity to put all of the material together more quickly and keep moving forward in my research, rather than to be bogged down with rewriting the

information just so it is uniquely presented and each piece of information properly accredited. Readers should check the information presented for their own assurance of accuracy. This document is still a work in progress, and many more pieces of information that I’m aware of (and probably many that I’m currently not) still need to be included, and will be in future versions (new versions of this document are published about every six to twelve months). If you see something that’s missing that you feel is worthy of being included, and you can point me to a good written source for information about it, please feel free to contact me at [email protected] and let me know. Further details or corrections for entries that are already included are also very welcome. A Note on the UFO Enigma, Satanism, and Mind-Control Technologies This document began when, after almost twenty years of personal research, I came to the conclusion that the UFO phenomenon has been far more myth than fact, as far as extraterrestrial visitation goes. This isn’t to say that I don’t believe in the possibility of alien visitation to our planet. On the contrary, I started out with an open mind and accepted at face value that UFO and alien experiences were real as described, but in my long and persistent search for the truth behind the stories of UFOs and alien encounters, I’ve come across a great deal of evidence to show that the presentation we the public have been given regarding this matter has been nothing more than a carefully orchestrated deception, and there is very little substantive evidence that exists that would convince me that what many people believe about this subject is real as they describe it, that can’t be better explained by psychological techniques used to manage public perceptions and/or through the use of mind-control technologies that already existed or were being developed and experimented with at the time of their experiences. In fact, I’ve come to a point in my research where I’m able to explain any of the more extraordinary aspects of the subject of UFOs and the events surrounding them in these more down-to-earth terms that involve known mind-control techniques and technologies. To put it in the simplest terms, the UFO phenomenon has been nothing more than a cover for secret government mind-control experiments and the application of mind-control techniques and technologies. Of course, this is too simple an answer, particularly for the deceived, and deserves a better explanation. The best way I know how to provide one is to look at the chronology of events to show how the stories of people’s UFO-related experiences over the years match very closely with the developmental stages of mind-control technologies. Although these same technologies were sometimes used to cover up black projects involved in developing secret military aircraft technologies, this was when these mind-control technologies were still in their infancy, and their success in that capacity has led to their

applications being quickly expanded to many other areas where they would be more beneficial to the elite’s New World agenda. Such a conclusion as that which I have reached regarding a false UFO enigma covering for mind-control experimentation could only have come this long after the beginning of this massive psychological charade, by reviewing it all over again and looking at the many revelations that have come to light long after certain events have occurred. In considering these events and the later revelations, it will be found that the UFO phenomenon and the development of mind-control technologies are inextricably tied together as part of a much larger psychological warfare program, with the apparent UFO phenomenon having been used to cover up the secret mind-control experimentation programs known collectively as MKULTRA. What came out of these programs has since been put to use in various ways to manipulate and control more and more members of society without their knowing, and have been largely directed towards non-mainstream thinkers and anyone else who is not likely to willingly or easily conform to the elite’s New World agenda. Since the official closing of the MKULTRA programs, the UFO phenomenon as a cover story for mind-control programming has since metamorphosed into various other equally extraordinary belief systems that have also been used as covers for mind-control. A large subset of the continuing post-MKULTRA mind-control programs have incorporated satanism into their methodologies, including the use of satanic ritual abuse to induce trauma-based alter personalities, involving the victims in satanic activities that are so outrageous that they wouldn’t likely be believed, and using the ‘products’ of the programs to terrorize the public with a growing number of mass murderers, serial killers, and ‘lone nut’ shooters. Of course, these satanically-inclined killers had to have sprung from somewhere, and it happens that a number of satanic cults were in operation in the same area that most of the earliest and most gruesome cases suddenly sprang up. Timeline of Events 325 AD – The first Council of Nicea. Christianity becomes orthodox when Emperor Constantine and the church councils create creeds and canons at the Council of Nicea. With this human-made church law, the followers of Christianity will no longer abide by the teachings of Jesus, but will instead follow the dictates of the Church. 1070 – The Knights of St. John are established. 1118 – The founding of the Order of the Knights Templar by Jacques DeMolay. This secret order exists under the guise that its members are the protectors of pilgrims traveling to and from the Holy Land, but this is only used as a cover to acquire wealth and power for themselves. Within the first twenty-one years of their formation, they will gain so much power that they

will only be answerable to the Church. They will also become the strongest military force in the world. Their early secret activities will include excavating Solomon’s Temple in Jerusalem, where they will apparently find ‘scrolls of knowledge’, and these will give them certain power over the Church, presumably because this knowledge could expose certain lies that the Church has been promulgating as the truth. Through their schemes, they will come to own thousands of castles and other properties across Europe, and great hordes of wealth in silver and gold. Eventually, however, they will become too powerful, and the Church will decide to eliminate them. Although many of the Templars will be rounded up, tortured into making confessions, and burned at the stake, many others will escape with much of their amassed wealth, as well as their secrets, and will go on to form other secret societies. One of these will be the Knights of Christ. Although not known for certain, it’s said that the Templars worshipped the devil, who they called Baphomet, and engaged in certain outrageously immoral acts, including sodomy, as part of their secret initiations and rituals. 1307 – The Order of the Knights Templar is forced to dissolve when its Grand Master, Jacques DeMolay, is arrested and imprisoned in Paris along with 60 of his knights, followed soon after by the rounding up of the remaining members in France. All of the wealth and possessions of the Order will be confiscated, although it will be rumored that a small group of knights successfully escaped with a large horde. Most of those who are arrested will be forced to confess to the worst offenses imaginable before being burned alive at the stake. The same will occur in England during the reign of Edward II, where the confiscated properties will be granted to the Knights Hospitallers. 1317 – The Order of the Knights Templar is reformed in Portugal under the name Knights of Christ. 1407 – According to Rosicrucian texts that will surface in the 1600s, this is the year that the Order of the Rose Croix is first founded. It is a sect of hermetical philosophers, including alchemists, astrologers, and spiritists, who were first becoming noticed in Germany early in the previous century. Bound by solemn oaths of secrecy, they claim to possess secret knowledge, particularly pertaining to the Philosopher’s Stone, all of which, according to them, they received by tradition from the ancient Egyptians, Chaldeans, Magi, and Gymnosophists. The original purpose of the Order appears to have been to bring learned minds together for the sake of sharing and preserving their knowledge and using it to improve the state of mankind. The Order of the Rose Croix will later become more commonly known as the Rosicrucian Order, and its main function will always be the study of occult knowledge for the purpose of bringing all of mankind to its fullest spiritual development, based on Hermetic science. Only initiates who have already attained a certain level of spiritual development will be accepted into the Order.

(See online book, Occult Theocracy, by Lady Queenborough Edith Starr Miller) 1454 – The invention of the printing press by Johannes Gutenberg in Germany. This invention will revolutionize communication and book production, leading to the spread of knowledge. It will also quickly become a medium for the mass dissemination of propaganda. The early printing industry will be controlled by only a few printing houses, and the high cost of publishing will restrict this medium to those who can afford it. 1492 – Christopher Columbus sales from Spain to the Americas under the flag of the Knights Templar. 1534 (August 15) – Ignatius Loyola gathers together a small group of carefully chosen men and lays out a plan to establish what will become the Society of Jesus (better known as the Jesuits), with the intention to convert the infidels of the world into followers of Christ. By 1539, Ignatius and his group approach the Pope and make an offer to act as a body of light infantry at his personal beck and call. They state that they are prepared to take a special vow of obedience only to him, accurately calculating that this will lead to him giving his blessings. The Order is officially established in 1540, composed of a small body of senior members and a larger body of junior members, and headed by Ignatius. It is governed in secret, and its activities are to be kept secret by its members except with the approval of their superiors. Each member is demanded strict obedience and total servitude to the Order, or face being thrown into the Order’s private prisons where they face being tortured for their transgressions. Junior members live in strictly policed barracks and are not allowed any free time or privacy, while senior members live in luxury and ease. Rather than operating under the principles of love and compassion, they operate through craftiness and guile. Ignatius creates an intricate spy system within the Order to keep watch over all its members constantly and with extreme scrutiny. In every house and college, and among every class of the Order, ‘syndici’ are appointed to watch and send in secret reports to Superiors. Each month members are also required to write down all the faults they notice in any other members and give the report to the head of their house. If they note any serious faults in the head of their house, they are required to inform the head of the Order. The Jesuits will make use of every source of information they can, being very discrete but also very cunning. As its founding head, Ignatius will deliberately cultivate the favor of the rich and powerful, as well as securing special concessions and favors from friendly Popes, and the Order will secretly involve itself in manipulating political affairs for its own benefit. Ignatius will also induce the Pope to give the Order special protection and make it independent of bishops, as well as giving it special privilege over other Orders. This will cause them to exalt themselves above other religious Orders.

Ignatius will write a secret manuscript known as The Spiritual Exercises, which gives directions for a series of exercises that involve meditation, prayer, fasting, sensory imagery, etc. These exercises cause enough physical, mental, and emotional exhaustion to induce hypnotic trance states and are essentially methods of mind-control programming. The result, when successfully applied, is a deep devotion to the Order. Ignatius Loyola will die in 1556, resulting in strife within the Order, with the new leader, Lainez, being accused by other senior members of usurping the leadership. This strife will also extend to the Pope, who will attempt to make changes to gain their obedience to the Church, but he will conveniently die before he is able. By this time, the Order will have grown to a membership of 3,500 divided into 18 provinces and 150 institutions. The wealth of the Order will already be tremendous by this time, and this growth in both wealth and numbers will steadily increase. By 1773 it will have 22,589 members, and the number of colleges, residences, and mission-stations in its possession will be about 1,500. They will have established many schools of higher education and produced thousands of literary works on a large variety of topics, and will have become very popular in the countries that they operate in. (See online book, The Jesuit Enigma, by E. Boyd Barrett) 1573 – Under Queen Elizabeth I, Sir Francis Walsingham sets up the first organized foreign espionage service to operate from England, incorporating a network of undercover agents he already had working throughout Europe and extending as far east as Turkey and Russia. Dr. John Dee, the Queen’s personal astrologer and magician, is recruited as an agent. 1618 – In his book Themis Aurea, written in 1616 and 1617 and printed in 1618, Michael Maier, Grand Master of the Rosicrucian Order (Order of the Rose Croix), refers to a resolution passed at a meeting in 1617 in which it was formally agreed that the Brotherhood must maintain the strictest secrecy for a hundred years. During this period, members of the Order will be referred to as ‘The Invisibles’. The resolution had also decreed that, in the year 1717 (the same year that Freemasonry will be established), the fraternity would be transformed into an association that could carry on more or less open propaganda. At about this same time, Robert Fludd is greatly helped by Francis Bacon in founding the Rose Croix in England. (See online book. Occult Theocracy, by Lady Queenborough Edith Starr Miller) 1660 – The Royal Society of London for the Promotion of Natural Knowledge is founded. Most or all of its founders are said to be Freemasons, although this secret society will not be officially established in England until 1717. The Royal Society will maintain an immense influence on the development of science by establishing control over the acceptance or rejection of scientific

papers, and will play a major part in directing and controlling the entire scientific establishment of the western world. 1717 (June 24) – The English Grand Lodge of Freemasonry is founded by members of the English Order of the Rose Croix (Rosicrucians). It works only the first three degrees, Apprentice, Fellow-Craft, and Master Mason, and constitutes the nursery for the selection of initiates for the higher degrees worked by other Lodges, such as the Ancient and Accepted Scottish Rites and the Grand Orient. The Grand Lodge will therefore only teach the exoteric doctrines (Blue Masonry), reserving the esoteric teachings for other Lodges. In 1813 it will add a fourth degree, that of Holy Royal Arch. After the English Lodge’s founding, men of religious persuasions other than Christianity will begin to be accepted into Masonry. On initiation, each member is given an alias that they will be known by within the Lodge. The secret oath taken by initiates supercedes all other oaths that they have or might ever take, thereby making their first allegiance to the Order and their fellow Masons. This oath continues even if they decide to leave Freemasonry, in order to assure that whatever secrets they might hold regarding the inner workings of Masonry are never divulged. All Masonry is founded on the principle of helping fellow members over helping non-members. Because of this, after the English Grand Lodge is established, it will become almost necessary for any person in London to become a Mason in order to succeed in business. To secure the inner workings of Freemasonry against the higher morals of its members, once in the higher degrees, a member who is found to be intractable can continue to the highest visible point of initiation along the track prepared by those who mean him to know nothing. All is beautiful, all is noble, he sees only the best, and forever advertises the goodness of Freemasonry. Though in this capacity he may do nothing else, he becomes an important factor in recruiting. Under the guise of philanthropy, humanitarianism, democratic ideals, and the promise of material advancement, this Order will attract untold numbers of unsuspecting men. The sifting takes place from the time of their initiation. For those who are deemed useless to the further secret aims of Masonry and therefore unworthy of climbing from the Master's chair in Grand Lodge to The Royal Arch degree, English Masonry will always remain what it was represented to be when they became candidates for initiation. They will be useful carriers of the legend that English Masonry believes in God and philanthropy. But, like Charity, English Grand Lodge covers a multitude of sins.... Above all, it covers Gnosticism under all its aspects; it is in fact its screen. (See online book. Occult Theocracy, by Lady Queenborough Edith Starr Miller) 1731 – Benjamin Franklin, a Quaker, becomes a Freemason at the Lodge of St. John in Philadelphia. He will reach the rank of Grand Master at this lodge,

and by 1749 will be elected Grand Master of the Province. While in France in the 1770s, as a diplomat for the American colonies, Franklin will also be made Grand Master of the Nine Sisters Lodge in Paris. The first major printing house to be established in the USA will be owned by Benjamin Franklin, who will maintain a monopoly on this industry throughout his lifetime. 1746 – The formation of the Hellfire Club, run by Sir Francis Dashwood. During the time of the club's operation, its members are believed to be holding notorious, orgiastic and satanic meetings at Medmenham Abbey beside the Thames, and later at West Wycombe Caves. The club motto is “Fay ce que vouldras” (Do what thou wilt), which will later be adopted by the satanist Aleister Crowley. Benjamin Franklin, a leading member, will frequently attend meetings. 1757 – The British East India Company is formed by a group of London merchants from the ruling class who are acting on behalf of the Queen. It is essentially a front company for British royalty. Until its final dissolution in 1858, it will engage in plundering the resources and population of the Indian continent. It will also be responsible for introducing illegal opium into China, and will generate massive income as it comes to rule large swathes of India, exercising military power and assuming administrative functions on behalf of the British crown. 1761 – At about this time, the Ancient and Accepted Scottish Rites of Freemasonry are established in America. This branch of Freemasonry originally had 32 degrees, but has now added a 33 rd degree. 1766 – Franz Anton Mesmer publishes a paper titled De Planetarum lnfluxa, in which he describes his findings on the curing effects of magnets on the human physiognomy. Mesmer will be the first to conjecture that psychological trauma might be related to, or be the cause of, physical illness. 1775 – The invention of the steam engine initiates the industrial revolution. This capability to harness motive power will lead to the rapid development of both transportation and industry, which in turn will create a number of business monopolies that will become new systems of control. Foremost among these monopolies in these early days will be the transportation and oil industries, both of which will be necessary for the manufacturing and distribution of an ever-growing plethora of products that will be made available to an ever-broadening consumer market. This will result in greater wealth and power being concentrated among a relatively small group of people. The initiators who will make all of this possible will be the bankers who control the flow of money. Leading this banking cartel will be the unfathomably wealthy Rothschild dynasty of Europe. Among the industrial magnates that will emerge from this revolution will be the Harrimans, Fords (automobiles), Rockefellers (oil and banking), Carnegies, Mellons, etc.

1776 – At about this time, Franz Anton Mesmer discovers the phenomenon of ‘animal magnetism’ or ‘mesmerism’, later known as hypnotism. He is able to affect cures for many ailments with his discovery and with the aid of a device he calls a ‘baquet’, which employs electrical charges and magnets to affect changes in his patients. 1776 (May 1) - Adam Weishaupt, ex-Jesuit priest, Freemason, and professor of Catholic Church Canon Law at the University of Ingolstodt in Bavaria, founds the Order of the Illuminati in the Strict Observance Lodge of Freemasonry of Munich, Germany. Amschel Mayer Rothschild, a Jew, is actually responsible for the creation of this secret society, and has Weishaupt acting on his instructions. The Illuminati are devout Luciferians and follow satanic principles. The Order will come to consist of the cream of European society, and writers, publishers, and educators are first priority for initiation. The objectives of this powerful organization are: 1) The destruction of Christianity and of all Monarchical governments; 2) The destructions of nations as such in favor of universal internationalism; 3) The discouragement of patriotic and loyal effort branded as narrowminded prejudice, incompatible with the tenets of goodwill to all men and the cry of ‘Universal Brotherhood’; 4) The abolition of family ties and of marriage by means of systematic corruption; and 5) The suppression of the rights of inheritance and property. This elite group’s ultimate long-range agenda will be to create a single world government system (NWO) that puts all power into its hands. It will begin to do this by either creating or infiltrating every possible organ of influence and control in society, including governments, businesses, religions, etc. The Illuminati will become the most powerful secret society on earth, connecting with virtually every other secret society of significance through memberships in their upper ranks. Weishaupt writes: “The great strength of our Order lies in its concealment, let it never appear, in any place in its own name, but always covered by another name, and another occupation. None is fitter than the three lower degrees of Freemasonry; the public is accustomed to it, expects little from it, and therefore takes little notice of it.” In her book, World Revolution, Nesta Webster will describe their modus operandi this way: "The art of Illuminism lay in enlisting dupes as well as adepts, and by encouraging the dreams of honest visionaries or the schemes of fanatics, by flattering the vanity of ambitious egotists, by working on unbalanced brains, or by playing on such passions as greed and power, to make men of totally divergent aims serve the secret purpose of the sect."

As the Order begins to spread throughout Germany, money will be contributed from such leading Jewish families as the Oppenheimers, Wertheimers, Schusters, Speyers, Sterns, and of course, the Rothschilds. From Bavaria, the Order will spread rapidly. They will soon have over 300 members from all walks of life, including students, merchants, doctors, lawyers, judges, professors, civil officers, bankers, and even church ministers. (See online book, Illuminati: The Cult that Hijacked the World, by Henry Makow, PhD) 1784 - The Marques of Pursegur in France, a student of Anton Mesmer, is able to mesmerize a sick young man named Victor Race and cause him to fall into a strange sleep state, during which Pursegur can communicate with him. Victor is extremely suggestible and shows a dramatic change in personality. He is able to speak articulately, diagnose his own sickness, and even read the thoughts of the hypnotist. When he is awakened, Victor has no memory of what went on during the sleep state. This is the first documented case of multiple personalities and telepathy occurring during a hypnotic trance. Pursegur will discover that Victor is not unique in this capacity, and some individuals would easily fall into a trance state when animal magnetism was applied to them. Although appearing to be asleep, they were still conscious, and like Victor, could reply to questions and convey information. In this induced trance state, the patient was very suggestible, taking for reality any fantasy that the magnetizer might depict. Upon awakening from the trance, the patient would remember nothing that had taken place while asleep. Pursegur will discover that many people in this state can apparently diagnose their own illnesses and those of others, and even prescribe effective remedies for the conditions they perceive. He will also notice that although magnetized subjects had no memory in the waking state for occurrences in the state of magnetic sleep, they did retain a continuous memory from sleep state to sleep state. From this time on, many other researchers will note these same supernormal phenomena arising in hypnotized subjects again and again, and they will become the most controversial aspects discussed in the literature on mesmerism and hypnotism for many years. The power of mesmerism (hypnosis) is being revealed for its potential to unlock supernormal abilities dwelling in everyone, but its power has still been barely realized at this point. Although hypnotism will come to be used experimentally in medical treatments for a time, its ability to affect the subjective mind far more easily than it can the physical body will lead it to become more popular among spiritualists, who will explore its ability to unleash the mysterious powers of the subconscious mind.

1784 - The French government orders two separate commissions to investigate Franz Anton Mesmer's claims regarding ‘animal magnetism’. The first is conducted by members of the Royal Academy of Sciences and the Faculty of Medicine, and includes some of the country’s most eminent scientists. It is chaired by Benjamin Franklin (US ambassador to France). Franklin comes to the conclusion that it isn’t Mesmer’s baquet that is responsible for the cures attributed to it, but rather it is due to an induced trance state and the heightened suggestibility that it creates in a person. The second commission is composed of physicians of the Royal Society of Medicine. Both investigations are carried out in the face of Mesmer’s objections and without his cooperation. The second commission also files reports that are unfavorable to animal magnetism, although one member writes a dissenting opinion recommending further investigation. In spite of these conclusions, many physicians who have had positive results with Mesmer’s methods will voice their criticisms of the commissions, and many patients who had been cured will give positive testimonies to Mesmer’s methods. Mesmerism will soon become very popular among the highest levels of society throughout the world. When it reaches America, it will also become popular among the middleclass, mostly within spiritualist circles and as a form of stage entertainment. This will have a huge effect on the spiritualist movement by the turn of the twentieth century, where hypnotic trance will become commonly used by psychic mediums to help them communicate with what they believe are spirits. 1786 – Club Breton, later renamed the Jacobin Club, is founded in Paris by the Bishop of Autun (Talleyrand), Mirabeau, and the Duc d'Orléans, Grand Master of the Grand Orient Lodge of France (Freemasonry). The Jacobins will be intricately involved in starting the French Revolution. 1791 - Luigi Galvani makes the legs of a frog move by conducting electricity through wires, from its nerves to its muscles. This discovery will lead to the full realization that the nervous system is electrical in nature and can be influenced by electrical charge. 1797 (January 28) – James Tilly Matthews, the first recorded claimant of mind-control targeting (also the first documented case of ‘paranoid schizophrenia’), is admitted into London’s Bethlem (Bedlam) Hospital, the infamous insane asylum, where he will spend the remainder of his life. Matthews had not been incarcerated on medical grounds, but on the orders of Lord Liverpool, the Home Office minister, whom Matthews had incidentally accused of being involved in a plot against him. Matthews was an English spy who had been posing as a tea merchant in France, where he was able to mix with the highest circles as he tried to negotiate a peace treaty between that country and his own. He had been thrown in jail by the French in 1793 and held for three years, and it was while there that he believes an electromagnetic device had been implanted in

his head by a group of undercover Jacobin revolutionaries, and that he was being controlled by them through an ‘influencing machine’. Matthews claimed that this group was able to do such things as implant thoughts in his head, inhibit his speech, and alter his reasoning abilities, among other things. He claimed that this machine sent out invisible magnetic rays that affected the magnetic device he believed had been implanted in his head. He even drew up diagrams of this machine (which he called an ‘air loom’), which showed multiple levers that were used to produce modulations of the magnetic waves that were emitted. The fact that this case dates to over two hundred years ago makes his claims sound eerily familiar, yet out of their time. Electromagnetic radiation had not yet been discovered, nor had the full electrochemical nature of the human nervous system. The fact that Matthews described these waves as being modulated is even more remarkable, considering that this is exactly the case – electromagnetic waves require specific patterning to effect specific responses in a person targeted with modern-day electronic mind-control technologies. Matthews claimed that this gang, who he was able to describe very well, would materialize in his dreams in order to gather information to use in assailing him the next day. Matthews believed that there were other groups with similar machines that were being used against various politicians and public figures, including the then Prime Minister of England, William Pitt. Beyond Britain, these machines were supposedly being used in France, Prussia, and elsewhere. These groups were believed by Matthews to be lurking everywhere, using what was believed to be a magnetic vapor to put the unsuspecting person under the control of their machine. This sounds similar to modern-day remote-influencing, which is a proven psychic science that is an extension of remote-viewing (clairvoyance), and may have been within the repertoire of this Jacobin group that Matthews claimed was targeting him with their mysterious machines. Matthews was an intelligent man, and although eccentric, was proven by two separate doctors to be quite sane. It was while in prison in France that Matthews believes he was first ensnared by this Jacobin group, through a person by the name of Mr. Chavanay. When Matthews returned to England he tried to warn the Prime Minister about this group and their activities, who he said were preparing to use these machines to overthrow the government. In December of 1796 he had interrupted a debate in the House of Commons to accuse Lord Liverpool of treason, which resulted in getting himself incarcerated at Bethlem. Much of what we know about Matthews’ claims comes from a booklet titled Illustrations of Madness, which was written by Dr. John Haslam, the resident apothecary at Bethlem Hospital. This booklet was written not just to detail the delusions of a purportedly mad man, but also to prove to Matthews’ family and others who believed him sane that he was indeed mad. Haslam shows definite signs of possible complicity in any real conspiracy that may have been afoot, helping to silence a man who knew too much about a secret

Masonic group with a lot of power. It is quite likely that Haslam may have embellished some of his descriptions of Matthews’ more outrageous claims, even though Matthews supposedly read the booklet before publishing and had given it his approval. In examining the story of James Matthews, it’s hard to believe that such technology could have existed in his time, especially for those who are unaware of similar technologies existing even today. However, for those who are familiar with today’s mind-control technologies, there is a strong sense of realism to what Matthews claimed. Could it be possible that Matthews was a victim of very early attempts to control the minds of men through remote electrical means? Interestingly, during this same time, Franz Anton Mesmer (a Freemason) had been making a scene with his notions of ‘animal magnetism’ – a precursor to the discovery of hypnosis – and the effects of magnetic energy on the human body and brain were being seriously studied among certain scientific groups, and many accusations were being made that it was being used to influence both politicians and the public at large. Benjamin Franklin (another Freemason), the discoverer of electricity, was the US ambassador to France at the time, and was asked by the French government to look into the activities of Mesmer and his claims of miraculous cures with electricity. Being brother Masons, Franklin and Mesmer hit it off quite well, and Franklin filed a lengthy report favorable to Mesmer. Another brother Mason who frequently visited these two men in Paris happened to be Adam Weishaupt, the founder of the Illuminati. It should be noted that Mesmer was the godfather of Amadeus Mozart. In fact, he raised Mozart, a genius musician who behaved as if he were suffering from MPD/DID. It is very possible that Mesmer had experimented on Mozart as a child in order to enhance his musical abilities, since it’s known that victims of trauma-based mind control, apart from acquiring alter personalities, often develop exceptional mental skills as well, and hypnosis is also able to similarly enhance a person’s normal abilities when properly applied. That a group of men with ambitions to power might have stumbled upon the means to remotely influence a person or inflict discomfort or even harm is not as farfetched as it might seem. Consider the fact that science was wide open to almost any possibility at that time, and so much was begging to be invented or discovered. The popular literature of the times says a lot for this: Frankenstein, Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde, etc. This is where many people’s minds were focused. The darker side of science was already lurking in certain minds when it was still in its infancy. Even if the influencing machine that Matthews described was nothing more than an imaginary concept, the possibility that it was entirely of Matthews’ own making seems far from likely. He was involved in political espionage, or was at least consorting with people

who were involved in it, and he may have picked up the idea from parties who were actually attempting to devise such machines, if they hadn’t already. In any case, it seems that the conceptual reality of such mindcontrol technologies was already fomenting that long ago in the minds of certain politically motivated groups with Masonic ties. The Jacobins, who had thrown Matthews in jail in France where he believed he first came under the control of this machine, were a group that had been founded by prominent Freemasons. It was the time of the French Revolution and much political turmoil was going on, which Matthews seems to have gotten caught up in. Secret societies were very alive and working on their various agendas, their members often having ties with religious, political, and mystical groups through which they could operate or otherwise use to influence others to do their bidding. Perhaps Matthews wasn’t so delusional and this machine actually existed, or perhaps he picked up his ideas about it from secret society members who even back then were at least conceiving of such technologies, even if they didn’t yet have them. Perhaps they were using hypnotism on Matthews, and had convinced him that such a machine and its sinister gang of operators was involved in making him experience things that were actually being induced through nothing more than hypnotic suggestion. Whatever the case, the story of James Tilly Matthews is interesting for its parallels with modern-day equivalents, where we have people coming forward with claims that they’re being targeted with very similar mind-control technologies. 1801 – The Supreme Council is established within the Masonic Order, with it’s global headquarters in Charleston. This marks the beginning of Universal Freemasonry, which places all Masonic Lodges throughout the world under one central controlling body. 1813 – The English Grand Lodge of Freemasonry adds a fourth degree, that of Holy Royal Arch. 1820 – At about this time, fifteen-year-old Joseph Smith allegedly begins having visions, in one of which the angel Moroni appears to him three times and tells him that the Bible of the Western Continent, the supplement to the New Testament, is buried in a certain spot near Manchester. Four years later, after due disciplinary probation, Smith will claim to have been delivered into his charge by an angel of the Lord a stone box, in which was a volume, 6 inches thick, made of thin gold plates 8 inches by 7, and fastened together by three gold rings. The plates will be covered with small writing in the ‘reformed Egyptian’ tongue, and will be accompanied by a pair of supernatural spectacles, consisting of two crystals set in a silver bow, which are called ‘Urim and Thummim’. With the aid of these spectacles, the mystic characters can be read. Smith’s story will be given the semblance of legitimacy by three other men – Oliver Cowdery, Martin Harris, and David Whitmer – who will each gave sworn statements as to the truth of Smith’s claims. These translated writings will be published as the Book of Mormon in

1830, the same year that Mormonism is established. Years later, all three of these men will denounce the story as false after they leave the Mormon Church. The real source of this book was a preacher named Solomon Spalding, who wrote it in 1812 as a historical romance, and the manuscript came into Smith’s hands through another man named Sidney Rigdon, who had copied it. (See online book. Occult Theocracy, by Lady Queenborough Edith Starr Miller) 1825 – The Royal Academy of Medicine of France appoints a commission to investigate the subject of animal magnetism. The commission is composed of some of the ablest scientists of the Academy, and it prosecutes its investigation until 1831, when it makes its report. Amongst other things it will announce that it has demonstrated the fact that some mesmeric subjects possessed clairvoyant power; that such subjects could, with their eyes closed, distinguish objects, tell the color and number of cards, and read lines of a book opened at a chance page. (See online book, The Law of Psychic Phenomena, by Thompson Jay Hudson) 1826 – William Morgan, a Mason of the highest degree, after having announced his intention of assisting in the work of exposing Freemasonry, is kidnapped by his brother Masons under pretended forms and warrants of law, removed from the State of New York to the borders of Canada, near the falls of Niagara, where he is barbarously murdered. This event marks the beginning of an anti-Masonic movement in America. Several persons will be punished for the abduction of Morgan, but the murderers will be sheltered by Masonic Lodges and rescued from justice. (See online book. Occult Theocracy, by Lady Queenborough Edith Starr Miller) 1829 – Justinus Kerner, a physician and poet, publishes Seeress of Prevorst, in which he describes his treatment of a woman named Friederike Hauffe that started in 1826. Kerner had decided to use animal magnetism on her, and the woman proved to be a good subject and easily became somnambulistic. In her trance states, she had visions, premonitions, and clairvoyant experiences. Kerner believed in the genuineness of these phenomena, recording them with great care in this account. (See online file, Esalen CTR: Animal Magnetism, Early Hypnotism, and Psychical Research, 1766-1925) 1830 – Joseph Smith founds Mormonism. Smith, who is a Freemason, establishes a new Masonic degree soon after, claiming that an angel of the Lord had brought him the lost keywords of several degrees, enabling him to progress further than the highest Masons. The charter of the Mormon lodge

is taken away by the Grand Lodge soon after. The Mormon dogma is universality, materialism and pantheism. It blends Judaism and Christianity, aiming at a progressive universal religion while seeking to unite in itself all faiths and the cults of every people on earth. The Mormon state is a theocratic community at the head of which is a grand priest-president assisted by two others and a traveling council of twelve. Its mysteries are those of spiritism and the séance room. (See online book. Occult Theocracy, by Lady Queenborough Edith Starr Miller) 1832 – The Order of Skull and Bones is founded at Yale University by William Huntington Russell and Alphonso Taft. This secret fraternal brotherhood is created after Russell returns from a trip to Germany, and it is reportedly a branch of a Masonic/Illuminati group in Bavaria. The Order is oriented towards the post-graduate outside world and recruits strictly from among the ‘richest and finest’ of Yale’s upcoming graduates. Members are elevated to key positions in government and industry, often leading to positions in the executive branch. The Order will become a stepping-stone to such groups as the Council on Foreign Relations, the Trilateral Commission, and the Bilderbergers. Through their symbolism and practices, it can be fairly claimed that the Order of Skull and Bones is a satanic group. Initiation involves making a pledge of secrecy that probably involves some sort of blackmail insurance, where the initiate must put himself in a compromising position (such as engaging in an illegal or immoral act) that can be used to destroy his career and credibility should he step out of line. Members of the Order must take an oath that absolves them from any allegiance to any nation, king, government, or constitution, which includes the negating of any subsequent oath that they may be required to take. They swear allegiance only to the Order and its goal of a New World Order. 1834 – Freemason Albert Pike is appointed to direct the American arm of the Order of the Illuminati. 1835 – Around this time, animal magnetism begins making significant inroads in the United States. Lectures by Charles Poyen St. Sauveur on animal magnetism excite the imagination of the country and lead to the emergence of magnetic practitioners of a peculiarly American type. Itinerant magnetizers wander the countryside with professional somnambulists (easily hypnotizable subjects) at their sides, giving medical clairvoyant readings. The visionary Andrew Jackson Davis begins his career as a somnambulist and will eventually become an author of great popularity, using the trance state to dictate his spiritual treatises. 1839 – Prussian scientist Heinrich Wilhelm Dove discovers that by playing different frequencies in each ear, the difference between those frequencies is heard inside the head – what is known as a binaural beat.

1841 (November) – After witnessing several public experiments in mesmerism, Dr. James Braid came to the realization that mesmerism wasn’t caused by any direct action of the mesmerist on the subject, as Anton Mesmer had believed, since a trance state could be induced in a person by merely having them stare at an object. After experimenting further, Braid concluded that the effects of mesmerism were due to a physiological condition of the nerves. (See file, Esalen CTR: Animal Magnetism, Early Hypnotism, and Psychical Research, 1766-1925) 1842 – James Braid coins the term ‘hypnotism’ to replace ‘animal magnetism’, intending to do away with the idea of a physical agent such as ‘magnetic fluid’ passing between magnetizer and subject to produce the phenomena of somnambulism. He also emphasizes the role of suggestion both in producing the hypnotic state and in bringing about the healing effects associated with it. He recognizes the post-hypnotic responses to these suggestions as well. Eventually Braid’s view will become the dominant one and his terminology the accepted nomenclature. Hypnotism will become widely accepted among the medical community in France and Germany, and more slowly taken up in England. (See file, Esalen CTR: Animal Magnetism, Early Hypnotism, and Psychical Research, 1766-1925) 1843 – The Independent Order of B’nai B’rith (Jewish Masonry) is established. Like most secret societies, it covers its political activities under the cloak of ‘benevolence and philanthropy’. From its inception, its main contact will be with Germany and its chief aim the establishment of the supremacy of the German Jews in all world affairs through the channel of ‘Internationalism’. 1848 – The earliest recorded case of modern spiritism in the USA takes place at the home of the Fox family, and in particular with the two Fox sisters Margaret and Kate, in Hydesville, NY. Strange phenomena in the form of noises and moved objects first begin to occur in the home around February, and increase in intensity over the next several months until the family is no longer able to sleep at night. It was nine-year-old Kate who first noticed that the noises would respond to her own noises and gestures. Further exploration by the family revealed that the noises had intelligence behind them, since they would respond accurately to questions posed to them. After moving the two girls out of the house, it was discovered that the phenomena followed them. 1848 – The Ancient and Accepted Scottish Rite of Freemasonry is established in England. The Templar body resigns control over the Rose Croix and Kadosh, which had been incorporated into the Ancient and Accepted Rite as the 18th and 30th degrees.

(See online book. Occult Theocracy, by Lady Queenborough Edith Starr Miller) 1853 – Around this time, spiritualism spreads to England and Europe. Spiritualist churches are established; spiritualist alliances are formed; and spiritualist books and newspapers come into print. There is such a proliferation of apparently paranormal spiritualistic phenomena that seriousminded people voice the need for a careful scientific investigation into these phenomena. (See file, Esalen CTR: Animal Magnetism, Early Hypnotism, and Psychical Research, 1766-1925) 1858 – Madame Helena Petrovna Blavatsky begins to make a name for herself in Russia as a spiritualist. 1859 – John D. Rockefeller starts the Standard Oil Company, which will quickly grow into a monopoly through his shrewd and often underhanded manner of doing business. His method is to attack the competition and force them out of business or otherwise gain control of them, often planning years ahead, and often acting through illegal and even violent means. He will very frequently employ others to act as his agents or spies within other companies, using these people in whatever way he can to retain the upper hand in business. His industrial espionage system will be by far the most elaborate, sophisticated, and successful that had ever been established. He communicates in code, so that any spies within his own ranks will have a difficult time knowing what he is planning or how he is operating. Very often, the companies that he will be seen to be publicly battling will actually be owned by him, so that he creates an image that makes him look far more innocent than he really is. Many of his tactics will be incorporated into the methods used by a number of US and foreign government agencies (CIA, NSA, FBI, BATF, etc.) and private organizations that will come to be involved in establishing a New World Order. (See online book, The Rockefeller File, by Gary Allen) 1864 – James Clerk Maxwell publishes his epic material on electromagnetic waves. 1865 – Newly elected President Abraham Lincoln is assassinated in a movie theatre by John Wilkes Booth. Immediately after the hit, Booth is whisked away by members of a secret society known as Knights of the Golden Circle. Booth has connections to elite bankers. 1866 – The Societas Rosicruciana in Anglia is founded in England by Frater Robert Wentworth Little. The basic rule of this society states that only Master Masons of good standing and repute should be admitted to membership.

Foreign branches will be established in Canada and Scotland in 1877, the USA in 1880, and Germany in 1902. 1872 – At about this time, a political-occult ideology called ‘Synarchy’ is formulated in France by a man named Joseph Alexander Saint-Yves d'Alveydre. This is a period in which many new political ideas are taking hold. Like many, Saint-Yves is alarmed by the rise of Anarchy, and he develops Synarchy specifically to counter it. Whereas Anarchists believe that the state should have no authority over the life and behavior of an individual, Synarchy takes quite the opposite view, where the more control the state has over the individual the better. Essentially, Synarchy advocates government by secret society or, in its own terms, by an elite of enlightened initiates who rule from behind the scenes. It therefore doesn't matter which political party holds power in a state or even what political system that state has. Synarchists would step in and take control of the key state institutions. Saint-Yves identifies three key pillars of society that, once under the control of his elite, would allow them to rule without the population even being aware of their existence. These are the political and social institutions, the economic institutions and the religious institutions. Although Synarchy can therefore rule in any kind of state, for obvious reasons it will find itself more at home among totalitarian regimes. It will therefore attract a greater following from the right. Synarchy is totally opposed to ideas of democracy and social equality, since it believes that some people, i.e. Synarchists, are natural leaders. However, Synarchy as devised by Saint-Yves is not a purely political movement. Saint-Yves is active in the esoteric world of 19 th century Europe, and is a friend of key figures such as Victor Hugo and Lord Bulwer-Lytton. He incorporates specific mystical and occult ideas into his system that originate from these occultists. For instance, Saint-Yves believes in the existence of spiritually superior beings that can be contacted telepathically, and his elite will be made up of people who are in communication with them. He himself claims that he is in touch with these beings, and that they actually gave him the principles of Synarchy. He borrows his ideas from both eastern and western esotericism, and makes his unknown superiors into spiritually advanced beings that live in a remote part of Tibet. He introduces the concept of ‘Agartha’, the mysterious underworld realm peopled by these superior beings and hidden somewhere in Tibet. Saint-Yves's doctrines also include ideas about the evolution and history of the human race that will become popular among esoteric and New Age circles. Also central to his reconstruction of history is that Atlantis was an advanced, global civilization. Saint-Yves also promotes the idea of root races – a succession of dominant races that are each allocated a period of supremacy, but each destined to be supplanted by the next, superior race. The current dominant race, according to Saint-Yves, is the white Aryans. All of these ideas will become incorporated into subsequent occult systems, mostly through Madam Blavatsky and her Theosophical Society, where they will be further embellished and promoted.

1873 – At about this time, Madame Helena Petrovna Blavatsky arrives in America and quickly becomes prominent in spiritualist circles there. 1874 – William Crookes publishes Researches in the Phenomena of Spiritualism, which contains an account of his experiments to assess the existence of a ‘psychic force’. Using many different types of apparatus, he eventually confirmed unequivocally the existence of a force that could move objects and apply pressure at a distance from the apparent source of that force. In his paper he gives a detailed account of the construction of the apparatus used and other physical circumstances of the experiments. This paper will make a powerful impression on the minds of intellectuals of the day and will do much to create a climate receptive to the establishment of the Society for Psychical Research in 1882. (See file, Esalen CTR: Animal Magnetism, Early Hypnotism, and Psychical Research, 1766-1925) 1875 (October 20) – Madame Helena Petrovna Blavatsky, along with a man named Henry Steel Olcott, founds the Theosophical Society, an occult group based on Hinduism and Buddhism that professes to “expound the esoteric tradition of Buddhism and aimed at forming a universal brotherhood of man, studying and making known the ancient religions, philosophies and sciences, and investigating the laws of nature and developing the divine powers latent in man.” Blavatsky will allegedly engage in fraud and charlatanry whenever necessary to fool her followers into thinking that she is in contact with a group of ‘Ascended Masters’ who secretly rule the world. Much of her written work will be exposed as being plagiarized from earlier occult works. The Theosophical Society will grow to become a worldwide movement with many thousands of followers, and will represent a driving force of esoteric insight, laying the foundation for the modern-day New Age movement. Blavatsky’s works will also come to be embraced by Freemasonry. 1876 – The first formal research into parapsychology is started by Henry Sidgwick at Trinity College, Cambridge University. 1877 – Madame H. P. Blavatsky publishes Isis Unveiled, her first voluminous work that is purported to have been channeled from advanced spiritual teachers from a higher plane who were said to be members of ‘The Great White Brotherhood’. 1882 – The Society for Psychical Research is established in Britain, with founding members including Professor W. F. Barrett, Henry Sidgwick, Edmund Gurney, and Frederick William Henry Myers. It will engage in the scientific study of psychic phenomena and mediumship. 1883 – Francis Galton, an English psychologist and half-cousin of Charles Darwin (whose work inspired him), proposes the principle of eugenics, which states that by encouraging better human stock to breed and discouraging the

reproduction of less desirable stock, the human race would be improved. This idea will develop into Social Darwinism. 1886 – Albert Pike, Grand Master of the Supreme Council of Freemasonry in Charleston, establishes the secret Palladian Rite, a hidden satanic order operating from within the highest degree of Freemasonry. It is little known about, since the number of its members is strictly limited and the deepest secrecy surrounds all its deliberations. The existence of this rite will be kept strictly secret and no mention of it will ever be made in the assemblies of the Masonic Lodges and Inner Shrines of other rites, even when the meeting is composed exclusively of members of this Rite. The secret of this new institution will only be divulged with the greatest caution to a chosen few belonging to the ordinary high grades. Members will be selected exclusively from among the 33rd degree of ordinary Masonry, where they have been long tested for their trustworthiness, and only those who are deeply interested in occultism will be considered. The Palladian Rite is essentially involved in Luciferianism, and it controls all other Masonic Orders. (See online book. Occult Theocracy, by Lady Queenborough Edith Starr Miller) 1887 – Heinrich Hertz announces his discovery of electromagnetic waves. 1888 – Madame H. P. Blavatsky publishes The Secret Doctrine, a voluminous work that was channeled and purported to be derived from advanced spiritual teachers from a higher plane. 1888 – The Hermetic Order of the Golden Dawn is founded by William Wynn Westcott and MacGregor Mathers. Westcott is a Theosophist and closely allied with its leader, Madame Blavatsky. It is in the Golden Dawn that Aleister Crowley will first attain his occult celebrity status. 1889 – Oil tycoon John D. Rockefeller, inspired by Andrew Carnegie’s essay, The Gospel of Wealth, makes the first installment of what will amount to $35 million in donations, issued over a period of two decades, to fund the University of Chicago. (See online book, The Rockefeller File, by Gary Allen) 1889 – After Sigmund Freud witnesses a demonstration of hypnosis conducted by Hippolyte Bernheim, in which his hypnotic patient is able to recall not what actually occurred during a hypnotic trance, but rather the hallucinatory pseudo-memories that Dr. Bernheim had suggested. Freud is deeply impressed and becomes his pupil. He draws a lasting lesson from this experiment, realizing that the mind could know something - yet not know what it knew, and that the unconscious stores information at differing levels. This demonstration was also evidence that hypnosis could be used to create a cover memory.

1889 – Jules Liégeois, a researcher in France, publishes a paper that describes his experiments with hypnotic suggestion. He has discovered that fifteen to twenty percent of his subjects could be placed in a somnambulistic state, in which they were extremely susceptible to hypnotic and posthypnotic suggestion. While his subjects were somnambulistic, Liégeois was able to create all sorts of hallucinations and induce various degrees of amnesia. He also experimented with suggestion in the waking state, obtaining striking results. Liégeois carried out other experiments with hypnotic suggestion, discovering that he was able to get subjects to carry out suggestions at a distance in space (by using the telephone) and at a distance in time (finding that suggestions could be executed long after they were given). His experimentation with criminal suggestions were successful in inducing hypnotized individuals to commit what they believed were criminal acts and discovered that, when awakened, they could experience complete amnesia for those actions. He concluded that it is possible for one person, through hypnotic suggestion, to induce another to commit criminal acts that are contrary to the conscience of the hypnotized person. (See file, Esalen CTR: Animal Magnetism, Early Hypnotism, and Psychical Research, 1766-1925) 1890 – William James publishes The Hidden Self in Scribner’s Magazine, in which he discusses the existence of the subconscious, which is just beginning to be recognized by scientists. He emphasizes the importance of discoveries of a second stream of consciousness that can be tapped in certain conditions such as the state of hypnotism, and sees in this secondary or, as he calls it, ‘submerged consciousness’ a key to understanding such diverse phenomena as possession and multiple personality. He calls the coexistence of a secondary self or selves with the primary self a ‘splitting of the mind’, and urges further investigation to determine more about the relationship between hypnotic trance and these subconscious states. (See file, Esalen CTR: Animal Magnetism, Early Hypnotism, and Psychical Research, 1766-1925) 1890 – John D. Rockefeller’s Standard Oil is refining 90% of all crude oil in the USA. 1891 – Cecil Rhodes founds The Round Table, an organization of elite bankers bent on world hegemony. 1894 – A number of books from this period refer to what appears to be a portable wireless telephone in the possession of the heads of the Masonic Order, at a time when wireless was still unknown. It is called the ‘Arcula Mystica’ or ‘Mystic Box’, of which there are reportedly only seven in existence – at the Masonic headquarters in Charleston, Borne, Berlin, Washington, Monte Video, Naples and Calcutta. It is described as having a trumpet-

shaped mouthpiece and a bell-shaped hearing piece attached by a cord to the main body, similar to early telephones. Seven mounted golden statuettes designate each of the directories, which are manipulated in various ways to call any one of the other Masonic headquarters. The existence of these devices will never be verified, and will be written off as a fabrication to give an exaggerated sense of power and mystique to the Supreme Council of the Masonic Order. (See online book. Occult Theocracy, by Lady Queenborough Edith Starr Miller) 1895 – Karl Kellner, Franz Hartmann, and Theodore Reuss, who all have close ties to German intelligence entities, establish the Ordo Templi Orientis (OTO) in Germany, a secret society that claims to be in a direct line of descent from the Knights Templar. Hartmann is a Theosophist and a close associate of the Madame Blavatsky, and has ties to the Rosicrucians. Kellner and Reuss are both high-ranking Freemasons, and Reuss is also a highranking Rosicrucian. Reuss is closely tied to William Wynn Westcott, who cofounded the Hermetic Order of the Golden Dawn and currently heads the Societas Rosicruciana in Anglia. Other prominent persons connected with this organization at its start are MacGregor Mathers and Aleister Crowley. The OTO teaches Hermetic Science or Occult Knowledge, the Pure and Holy Magick of Light, the Secrets of Mystic attainment, Yoga of all forms, Gnana Yoga, Raja Yoga, Bhakta Yoga and Hatha Yoga, and all other branches of the secret Wisdom of the Ancients. (See online book. Occult Theocracy, by Lady Queenborough Edith Starr Miller) 1898 – The Michelson-Morley experiment is conducted, supposedly disproving once and for all the notion that there is an underlying etheric medium that permeates the universe. However, this experiment will never be replicated to verify the conclusions drawn. Proving the existence of an ether would have upset the currently developing scientific model of the universe. 1898 – Aleister Crowley joins the Hermetic Order of the Golden Dawn. 1899 – At about this time, Nikola Tesla conducts experiments to test the effects of ELF and VLF electromagnetic waves on humans. 1904 – The first chair in eugenics and working society in eugenics are instituted at University College, London. 1904 (April) – While in Cairo, Aleister Crowley transcribes The Book of the Law while allegedly receiving it telepathically from a spirit that calls itself Aiwass. Aiwass claims to be “a messenger from the forces ruling this Earth at present”, and is supposed to possess fantastic knowledge and powers. This

book will become Crowley's Bible. The book will also be very important to Church of Scientology founder L. Ron Hubbard throughout his life. 1905 – The Society for Racial Hygiene is established in Germany, Future Nazi eugenics researcher Dr. Ernst Rudin is a co-founder with Dr. Alfred Ploetz. 1906 – Ivan Petrovich Pavlov discovers that responses can be conditioned when he teaches a dog to salivate at the sound of a bell. 1907 – Dr. John Harvey Kellogg travels to St. Petersburg, Russia to observe the experiments of the Russian psychologist, Ivan Petrovich Pavlov. This same year, he is expelled from the Seventh Day Adventist Church. He had anticipated the probability of an eventual break from the church seventeen years earlier and had been preparing for the possibility for the previous twelve. (See online file, John Harvey Kellogg MD - Urantia Book) 1907 – The Galton Laboratory of National Eugenics is established in England. 1907 – Annie Besant becomes president of the Theosophical Society. This marks the beginning of the modern New Age Movement and a search for a ‘new Messiah’. Along with 33rd degree Mason C. W. Leadbeater, Annie Besant will promote a young adept named Jiddu Krishnamurti as this messiah. 1907 – Aleister Crowley founds Astrum Argentinure, an occult secret society. He begins to call himself the ‘Great Beast’, in reference to the Antichrist described in the New Testament. 1908 – The Eugenics Education Society (renamed the Eugenics Society in the 1920's) is founded in England. 1908 – The Connecticut Society for Mental Hygiene, the starting point of the Mental Hygiene movement as an organized body, is founded. Its aims are the improved treatment for the insane, and the safeguarding of the public's mental health. By 1930, twenty-four countries will have Mental Hygiene Associations. Routinely these associations will have as their medical specialists psychiatrists who espouse eugenic medicine. The legislation of various countries will start to orient themselves to eugenic principles and their parliaments will begin to enact many new laws of a purely eugenic nature. Although these laws will vary in form and execution, they will all be aimed at the same objective - the mentally deficient and the mentally ill. Laws of a general nature will provide for the establishment of institutions and colonies, enabling the mentally deficient or mentally ill to be segregated from the rest of the population. Although the original stated purpose of the mental hygiene movement is improved care of the mentally ill, the first laws passed on an international basis at the instigation of this movement are laws to sterilize the mentally ill in order to prevent them from reproducing.

(See online book, The Men Behind Hitler, by Bernhard Schreiber) 1909 – Max Heindel founds the Rosicrucian Fellowship in order to herald in the Aquarian Age and promote the teachings of Rosicrucianism to the western world. The Rosicrucian philosophy is centered on the idea that humans are reincarnating souls who have the potential to evolve into gods, and that there are etheric or spiritual levels of existence. Rosicrucianism is the pursuit of mystical or occult knowledge that will help to achieve that end. The Rosicrucian Fellowship endeavors to prepare the world in general, and occultists and mystics in particular, “for the awakening of the latent powers in man, so that all may be guided safely through the inherent dangers involved and be as well fitted as possible to use these new faculties.” In the latter part of 1911, the Fellowship will acquire a scenic piece of property in Oceanside, California, ninety miles from Los Angeles, where they will establish their headquarters. (See online book, The Rosicrucian Mysteries, by Max Heindel) 1910 – The Eugenics Record Office is established at Cold Spring Harbor, New York, receiving major funding from the Harriman, Carnegie, and Rockefeller dynasties. This organization is involved in tracking genetic traits among the population and determining pedigree families. Simply put, the goal is to categorize every individual in the population according to recognized traits, based on natural inheritance. It will use the research results of the Galton Laboratory of National Eugenics to propose practical applications. Some of those ‘practical applications’ will include sterilization programs that target non-white races, the poor, and those who are otherwise deemed ‘genetically deficient’. In the years ahead, eugenics will be carried over to Nazi Germany (through the same founding dynastic families) to become the impetus behind Hitler’s drive to create a master race through his macabre human experimentation programs using concentration camp prisoners. The Rockefeller Foundation will go on to finance the Kaiser Wilhelm Institutes in Germany, where the early work of racial scientists Joseph Mengele and Ernst Rudin will be carried out prior to the start of the Second World War. 1911 – Seventh-day Adventist minister, psychiatrist, and debunker of spiritualism, Dr. William S. Sadler, begins observing a certain unnamed person (identified many years later as Wilfred Custer Kellogg, a member of the Kellogg dynasty) who can go into a deep trance that he can’t be awakened from, and is completely unaware of what takes place while he channels allegedly extra-planetary entities. Sadler will continue these observations for over a decade, coming to the conclusion that they are authentic. Sadler is married to Leona Kellogg, and got his start in life working for her brother, Dr. John Harvey Kellogg. The Kellogg family has close connections to the Order of Skull and Bones. Sadler also held an executive position in the governmental intelligence organization that later became the FBI.

(See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1911 – John D. Rockefeller’s Standard Oil monopoly is ordered by the US government to be broken up. In response, Rockefeller simply creates several new foundations and gives his company stock to them, thus retaining ownership and control. (See online book, The Rockefeller File, by Gary Allen) 1912 – According to a book by Greg Hallett, Hitler was a British Agent, Adolph Hitler spends February to November of this year being brainwashed and trained at the British Military Psy-Op War School at Tavistock in Devon and Ireland to be a double agent for the Illuminati. The purpose is to create an ‘enemy’ who would foment conflict in order to further the Illuminati plans for world domination. Hitler’s grandfather is none other than Nathan Meyer Rothschild. His grandmother, Maria Schickelgruber, worked as a maid in the Rothschild’s Vienna mansion when his father was conceived during a satanic ritual rape. (See online book, Illuminati: The Cult That Hijacked the World, by Henry Makow) 1912 – Aleister Crowley joins the Ordo Templi Orientis (OTO), a satanic secret society whose British branch is led by a man named Theodore Reuss, who is a German spy. Crowley will soon take over the leadership of the OTO in Britain and bring it to prominence as the largest and most powerful Satanic order in existence. The OTO will attract the interest of a number of intelligence agencies, including the CIA and MI6. Crowley will eventually introduce the practice of male homosexual sex magick into the OTO as one of the highest degrees of the Order. 1913 – Passage of the Federal Reserve Act places all of the USA’s finances into the hands of private bankers, giving them the ability to print money they do not have, lend it out, and collect taxes on the loans. The Federal Reserve is headed by Paul Warburg. His brother, Max Warburg, is chief of German Intelligence at this time. Both men are directors of Germany’s IG Farben industrial conglomerate. The Warburg’s will be involved with funding Hitler in the years ahead. 1913 (May 14) – John D. Rockefeller Sr. founds the tax-exempt Rockefeller Foundation as a philanthropic organization whose claimed mission is to “promote the well-being of mankind throughout the world.” However, the true purpose of this foundation will be to hide the Rockefeller family’s immense and growing wealth and power, becoming probably the most influential organization in the world. In the first decade of its existence, it will focus its attention on the sciences, public health, and medical education.

During its first year, the foundation sets up the International Health Commission, which launches it into international public health activities, promoting the need for public health and environmental sanitation. It also begins a 20-year support program of the Bureau of Social Hygiene, whose mission is research and education on birth control, maternal health and sex education. This may seem like a good thing on the surface, but it is a move that is intended to put the Rockefellers in a position that will better serve their interests – in particular, global depopulation. The Rockefeller Foundation will also be heavily involved in molding public opinion through education, media, and religion. Although the Rockefeller empire is most notable at this time for their pursuits in industry, they are also very big players in banking and finance (through Chase Manhattan Bank). Part of their strategy is to make loans to industry giants, but always with the stipulation that they have a voice in the decisionmaking machinery of that company, often through the placement of one of their own people on the company’s board of directors, thus creating interlocking directorates. This will lead them into having control of most of the western world’s business and economy. For the next two generations, the great wealth passed down by John D. will be fractionated and made more complex by creating increasing layers of trusts and closely held companies, where no public reports are required. The Rockefellers have invented a scheme whereby the more money they appear to give away, the richer and more powerful they become. With the help of captive politicians, guided by the Rockefeller’s highly skilled family lawyers, legislation is written and passed which protects the Rockefellers and others of the elite super-rich from the repressive taxation they have foisted on the rest of the population. The key to this scheme is giving up ownership but retaining control. For example, most people don't believe they really own something unless they retain title to it in their own name. The Rockefellers know this is a big mistake. Often it is better to have your assets owned by a trust or a foundation – which you control – than to have them in your own name. The Rockefellers will create hundreds, possibly even thousands, of trusts and foundations, so that their assets can be moved, merged, and manipulated so that the neither the public nor the US Treasury Department will ever have any way of knowing just how much money is where. These specially created trusts can not only eliminate probate, cut inheritance taxes, and reduce income taxes; unlike corporations, they can achieve almost total privacy. Theoretically, trustees can, within the privacy of their directors' meetings, create more and more trusts ad infinitum. With a little effort, taxes disappear. With a little more effort, even the value of the holdings can be completely hidden. Such trusts will allow the Rockefellers to legally deny the ownership of any part of their wealth by putting it in the hands of private trustees whenever necessary, through a shell game played by moving their assets around on paper. (See online book, The Rockefeller File, by Gary Allen)

1914 – The Rockefeller Foundation begins a program of international fellowships to train scholars at the world's leading universities at the postdoctoral level – a fundamental commitment to the education of future leaders, but also a means to select, mold, employ, and maintain control over them throughout their lives and careers. (See online file, The Rockefeller Foundation, at wikipedia) 1914 – The Royal Institute for International Affairs is established in London as a front group for Cecil Rhodes’ Round Table. The Council on Foreign Relations is set up as a sister group in New York. 1917 – The start of the Bolshevik Revolution in Russia, financed largely by Illuminati bankers (the Rothschild’s Kuhn Loeb & Co.), will lead to a depraved police state in which millions of people will be stripped of their property and exterminated in their homes and on the streets, or otherwise starved and worked to death in the Gulag prisons in Siberia. Up to 20 million will die under the hand of the mostly Jewish Cheka secret police. The Cheka will publish the names of 1.7 million people they execute in 1918 – 1919 alone, including 300,000 priests. About the same number will be executed between January 1921 and April 1922. This will be a secret depopulation program equal or greater in scope to the later Nazi holocaust, only this time it is mostly Jews targeting non-Jews. The first to be targeted are bureaucrats, gendarmes, and high-ranking officers, but this quickly expands to include scientists, doctors, engineers, priests, monks, writers, and any citizen whose property is valued at 10,000 rubles or more. The Jewish bankers will take ownership of Russian industry. Christian churches are closed and their property seized while Jewish synagogues go untouched. (See online book, Illuminati: The Cult that Hijacked the World, by Henry Makow, PhD) 1918 – The Rockefeller family shifts their focus of philanthropy into the social sciences, stimulating the founding of university research centers and creating the Social Science Research Council. (See online file, The Rockefeller Foundation, at wikipedia) 1918 (July) – The founding of the Thule Society by Rudolf von Sebottendorff. The Thule Society is an Aryan-Theosophical group that practices black magic and whose member’s believe they are in communication with higher beings, known as the ‘Secret Chiefs of the Third Order’. They base their philosophies on Madam Blavatsky’s The Secret Doctrine. 1918 – After being gassed while fighting on the front lines in World War One, Adolph Hitler is taken to a hospital in Bavaria. A Dr. Edmund Forster, cited as

“the father of modern hypnosis” is brought in from Berlin University to treat Hitler for what is thought to be hysterical blindness. This symptom is psychosomatic in nature, implying that Hitler would be a good hypnotic subject. At about this same time, Hitler dreams that he will be prominent in politics and will rise up to control Germany. (See online file, Mind Control, World Control, by Jim Keith) 1919 (January 5) – The German Worker’s Party is founded, and soon attracts Adolph Hitler as a member, acting as a spy for the German Army. This political organization is a creation of the Thule Society, and will soon be renamed the National Socialist (Nazi) Party. Dietrich Eckart, a member of the Thule Society, will recognize the oratory talents of young Adolph Hitler and will help to mold him into the future leader of Germany. Eckart will also later help to transfer funds from Henry Ford to Hitler and his Nazi Party. Other Thule members at this time include Rudolf Hess, Alfred Rosenberg, and Hans Frank, all of whom will become Nazi leaders and play key roles in the Third Reich. Max Warburg, brother of US Federal Reserve founder Paul Warburg, is chief of German Intelligence. The Nazi choice of the swastika symbol is influenced by the Thule Society. 1919 – Aleister Crowley produces a depiction of LAM, an entity that he purportedly conjured during a magickal ritual. The head of LAM is large, smooth and hairless, tapering to a pointed chin. The mouth is no more than a slit, and the eyes extend towards the sides of the face. There is no suggestion of clothing beyond what appears to be a cloak buttoned at the neck, nor does the entity have any ears. In short, LAM resembles what will become recognized in later years as the typical grey alien of UFO lore. Crowley’s drawing will not be discovered until after his death in 1947. 1920 – Adolph Hitler becomes leader of the German Worker’s Party, and changes its name to the National Socialist German Worker’s Party, more commonly known as the Nazi Party. 1920 – With the passing of the Eighteenth Amendment of the US Constitution, the Anti-Saloon League succeeds in outlawing the use of all wines, spirits and liquors. With Prohibition in force, crime rates in the USA will rise dramatically over the next ten years and organized criminal syndicates will gain a strong foothold as they take advantage of the enormous revenues to be made from the manufacture, distribution, and sale of illicit alcohol. 1920 – The first commercial radio broadcast. 1920 – The earliest precursor to the EEG machine is used to read brainwaves from the scalp.

1920 – Alice A. Bailey, who is a leading disciple of the Theosophist Society and married to 33rd degree Freemason Foster Bailey, founds the Lucifer Publishing Company to publish her writings. This name will change to Lucis Trust in 1922. Lucis Trust will promulgate the work of an ‘Ascended Master’ who is working through Bailey. The Lucis Trust Publishing Company and their many fronts will carry out the work of a Luciferian ‘master plan’ for the establishment of a permanent ‘Age of Aquarius’ and ‘New World Religion’. Through a spirit that calls itself Djwhal Khul, Bailey will write 24 books that promote a world government she refers to as the ‘New World Order’. Lucis Trust will become a powerful institution that will work on both political and occult fronts to achieve its goal. It will enjoy ‘Consultative Status’ with the United Nations and have a close working relationship with that organization, including a seat at their weekly sessions, and more importantly, influence with powerful business and political leaders throughout the world. Through its founding of World Goodwill, Lucis Trust will be aggressively involved in promoting a globalist ideology. In her book Externalization of the Hierarchy, a section called Steps Towards the New World Order outlines the process for preparing humanity for this New World Order. 1921 – The Tavistock Institute of Human Relations is established at Oxford University in London by the Royal Institute for International Affairs for the purpose of studying the breaking point of humans. It will later be funded by the Rockefeller Foundation. 1921 – Adolph Hitler goes to Berlin to give a speech to the ultraconservative National Club, and establishes his first contacts with industrialists and business circles. Over the following years these will increase to an ever-widening circle of supporters. (See online book, The Men Behind Hitler, by Bernhard Schreiber) 1921 – At sixteen years old, T. Townsend Brown discovers an electrogravitic effect caused by high-voltage charges. This will later become known as the Biefield-Brown effect. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1922 - The Rockefellers found the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR). This organization will have a huge influence on the world’s political and economic affairs, as well as the media, and will effectively give control of them to the Rockefellers. The ultimate goal of the CFR is the submergence of US sovereignty and national independence into an all-powerful one-world government. (See online file, The Rockefeller Foundation, at wikipedia) 1922 – Alice Bailey founds the Arcane School. By 1954, it will boast having 20,000 graduates.

(See file, Alice Bailey & Master DK Djwhal Khul A Satanic Communion, by Terry Melanson) 1922 – Freemasonry is outlawed in Italy. 1923 – Dr. William S. Sadler starts a small group for Sunday philosophical and religious discussions, and they soon turn their interest to the strange communications that Sadler has been receiving through his unnamed channeler when he mentions the case at one of their meetings and reads samples at their request. Soon after this, a channeled communication is received stating that this group would be allowed to devise questions and that answers would be given by the entities. The group compiles 4,000 questions that they wish to ask the channeled spirits. Several weeks later, the medium delivers the group 472 pages of text containing the answers to all of their questions. According to the medium’s wife, the pages had been written in a single evening. The group, consisting of a number of his close friends (later known as the Forum), begins examining these channeled communications. Only an inner core of five members of the group is ever allowed to witness the channelings, and the identity of the channeler is kept anonymous in order to prevent undesirable future veneration or reverence for him. (See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1923 – According to the book, Goebbels: The Man Next to Hitler, by Rudolf Semmler, Hitler is involved with spiritualistic circles and taking part in séances, and is hearing voices commanding him to save Germany. He is consulting with and is greatly moved by a fortune teller who tells him that he will come to power in 1933. 1923 – The abortive Munich Putsch, staged by Hitler, makes his name known beyond the borders of Germany for the first time, and earns him a short term in Landsberg prison. Here, with the assistance of Rudolf Hess, he writes Mein Kampf. This book is an excellent illustration of the degree of his absorption of Social Darwinism, eugenics and racial ideas. Within it can be found the familiar arguments behind them: the merciless struggle of all life forms; the victory of the strong over the weak; the ruthless disregard for the rights of others; the Jewish menace; the advocacy of techniques for breeding of superior citizens, and so on. (See online book, The Men Behind Hitler, by Bernhard Schreiber) 1925 – At about this time, Wilhelm Reich discovers orgone energy. This organic-based energy is found to impart a magnetic charge to nearby iron or steel implements, and a static charge to nearby insulators, such as rubber gloves. Photographic film stored in nearby metal cabinets spontaneously

fogs. Reich notes that whatever this energy is, it is rapidly attracted to metals, but just as rapidly reflected away, or dissipated into the surrounding air. Organic materials, however, are seen to absorb this radiation and hold onto it. It is also noted that the air in rooms containing special cultures that emitted the energy felt ‘heavy’ or charged. When observed at night, in full darkness, the air visibly scintillates and glows with this pulsing energy. Reich begins building devices that accumulate this energy, in order to experiment with it further. He will discover that orgone energy has a significant impact on psychological states of mind as well as on weather conditions. 1925 (March 25) – Scottish inventor John Logie Baird gives the first public demonstration of televised silhouette images in motion, at Selfridge's Department Store in London. This is a precursor to the television. 1925 – The Rockefeller Foundation makes an initial grant of $2.5 million to the Keiser Wilhelm Institute for Psychiatry in Munich, Germany. This institute is conducting pioneering research into eugenics (racial purity) under the direction of future Nazi scientists Ernst Rudin and Josef Mengele. 1926 (January 26) – At his laboratory in London, John Logie Baird gives the world's first demonstration of a working television system to members of the Royal Institution and a newspaper reporter. 1927 – Joseph Banks Rhine begins his investigations into parapsychology at Duke University. One of his sponsors will be James McDonnell, founder of the McDonnell-Douglas aircraft company. 1928 (July 2) – The first regularly scheduled television service in the United States begins. The Federal Radio Commission authorizes C. F. Jenkins to broadcast from an experimental station in Wheaton, Maryland, a suburb of Washington, D.C. For at least the first eighteen months, 48-line silhouette images from motion picture film are broadcast. 1928 (October) – The Jewish World Agency is created. 1928 – With Mussolini’s fascist government suppressing Freemasonry in Italy, the terrorist Mafia organization is crumbling and many of its members begin seeking refuge in America. They settle in Chicago, where, through their affiliation with the Unione Sicilione (later known as the Italo-American Union), they maneuver themselves into a position which enables them to cooperate with the vice and liquor purveyors of the city on the one side and the political party machines on the other. After seizing control of the Chicago Coal Teamsters', Chauffeurs' and Helpers' Union, local No. 704, their gangster-style racketeering will enter into a new phase of economic terrorization as their operations spread to other American cities like Detroit, Cleveland, Philadelphia, and New York.

(See online book. Occult Theocracy, by Lady Queenborough Edith Starr Miller) 1929 – T. Townsend Brown writes a paper titled How I Control Gravitation, in which he describes an invention he calls the ‘Gravitor’, which uses electrogravitation to provide a 1% weight gain or loss, depending on the direction of the force. He proposes that by placing an evenly spaced array of these devices along the perimeter of a disc-shaped craft and selectively charging them, the craft could be moved in any direction. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1929 – Spiritualist debunker Dr. William S. Sadler publishes The Mind at Mischief: Tricks of the Subconscious Mind, in which he explains the fraudulent methods of mediums and how self-deception leads to psychic claims. In the appendix, he recounts the story of an investigation into the psychic realm that he conducted that he was unable to debunk. Since 1911, as he relates it, he had been observing a medium who was apparently communicating with extra-planetary personalities. Sadler states in his book that the information imparted through this source is consistent in both its philosophy and with scientific facts, and is essentially Christian in context. (See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1929 – Inventor Philo Farnsworth demonstrates the first television system with no mechanical parts. He transmits the first live human images with his system. 1929 (March) – RCA begins daily experimental television broadcasts in New York City over station W2XBS, the predecessor of WNBC. The 60-line transmissions consist of pictures, signs, and views of persons and objects. Experimental broadcasts will continue to 1931. 1930 (April 23) – The International Bank is founded at Basil. It is commissioned to enroll the central banks of nine nations in its membership. The bank is to exist for fifty years, paying no taxes during that time and its assets and deposits being immune from seizure, confiscation, and censorship, in peace or war. It will also be subject to no restriction or prohibition of any kind on its imports and exports of gold or currency. The bank will owe allegiance to no single government. It will keep no currency reserve. It will owe no allegiance to anyone and can do as it likes, to make what profits it can, with unrestricted powers. In addition to its extraordinary powers, it has control of the ‘Machinery of Reparations’ which contains the means by which the wherewithal to liquidate Reparations can be squeezed out of the receivers at a profit to the payers.

(See online book. Occult Theocracy, by Lady Queenborough Edith Starr Miller) 1930 (September) – T. Townsend Brown joins the Navy, and is immediately put to work at the Naval Research Laboratory (NRL) in Washington, DC., where he continues his experiments in antigravitics. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1930 – US Army and Navy both begin research into radar technology. 1930 – The First International Congress for Mental Hygiene is held in Washington, DC. Ernst Rudin is among the German delegates, and pushes for an intensified integration of eugenics and mental hygiene. 1931 – Aldous Huxley writes Brave New World, a futuristic vision of a totalitarian society in which the government chemically coerced the population into loving its servitude. 1931 (July 21) – CBS's New York City station W2XAB begins broadcasting their first regular seven-days-a-week television schedule. 1931 (August) - At the Berlin Radio Show, Manfred von Ardenne gives a public demonstration of a television system using a CRT for both transmission and reception. (This reveals that CRT televisions can be designed and used as visual surveillance devices.) 1931 – Thomas Townsend Brown’s research into dielectrics becomes classified information. 1932 – World Goodwill is founded, receiving financial support through Lucis Trust. It will work directly with the ‘world federalists’, and is part of Theosophist Alice Bailey’s work to ‘Externalize the Hierarchy’ of ‘Illumined Minds’, and usher in the ‘Age of Maitreya’ (the Anti-Christ). 1933 – The British-led eugenics movement meets at the American Museum of Natural History in New York City, and designates German Dr. Ernst Rudin as the president of the worldwide Eugenics Federation. The eugenics movement at the time calls for the killing or sterilization of people whose heredity make them a public burden. A few months later, the Nazi regime appoints Rudin to head Germany’s Racial Hygiene Society. 1933 (January) – Adolph Hitler comes to power in Germany. 1933 (March) – Hitler establishes his first concentration camp for political prisoners at Dachau.

1933 (April) – The German government announces plans to immediately conduct a national census. The project is particularly important as a mechanism for the identification of Jews, Gypsies, and other ethnic groups deemed undesirable by the Nazi regime. America’s IBM Corporation will provide design and tabulation services, using its computers to handle the census information that is collected and entered on punch cards. Without this, the speed and efficiency with which the Nazis will be able to systematically root out and exterminate the Jews and other undesirables wouldn’t be possible. 1933 (July 14) – The Law for the Prevention of Hereditary Disease in Posterity (better known as the ‘Sterilization Law’) is passed in Germany. The chief architect of this law is Ernst Rudin, Professor of Psychiatry at the Munich University, Director of the Kaiser-Wilhelm Institute for Genealogy and Demography, and of the Research Institute for Psychiatry. This law will allow a doctor, legal guardian, or prison administrator to force anyone in their care to be sterilized. By November, it will be decided that “habitual offenders against public morals” are to be castrated. (See online book, The Men Behind Hitler, by Bernhard Schreiber) 1933 (July 16) – The German Union for Mental Health changes its name to the German institute for Mental Health and Racial Hygiene, and puts Ernst Rudin in charge. This organization is heavily subsidized by the Rockefeller Foundation. 1933 – After discovering that he can put his subjects into a hypnotic sleep by merely thinking the command to do so (telepathically), the Soviet researcher Leonid Vasiliev begins investigating the effects of electromagnetic shielding (using lead and mercury) on the induction of hypnosis, and discovers that it has no effect on blocking telepathy, even from several miles distance. These experiments appear to indicate that telepathy is not electromagnetic in nature. 1934 – The Scottish Rite of Freemasonry joins the Rockefellers in sponsoring psychiatric genetics, under the rubric of research into dementia praecox (schizophrenia). 1934 - A Rockefeller progress report from the Eugenics Record Office reveals that the idea of breeding a superior race through genetics is being seriously considered. 1934 – The first commercially made electronic television sets with cathode ray tubes are manufactured by Telefunken in Germany. 1935 – At about this time, the last channeled communications are received by Dr. Sadler through his unnamed medium. The channeled spirits ask Sadler to publish the material. The Urantia material is compiled into 2,097 pages of

text, and consists of 196 apocryphal revelations communicated by various spirit beings. Sadler has spent over a decade debunking and refuting spiritualism. It is apparent from this that the unnamed medium that Sadler had investigated from 1911 to 1929 was the source of the Urantia material. (See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1935 - Psychologist Hadley Cantril and Gordon Allport coauthor The Psychology of Radio, in which they write, “Radio is an altogether novel medium of communication, preeminent as a means of social control and epochal in its influence upon the mental horizons of men.” Cantril will become a principal contributor to the knowledge and information that will help propel Rockefeller-controlled enterprises in the postwar era. Throughout this period, Cantril will provide the Rockefellers with important information and new techniques in public opinion measurement and management. He will receive a $67,000 grant for a two-year charter of the ‘Princeton Radio Project’ at Princeton University. While there, Cantril will develop studies assessing radio’s effects on audiences, particularly with regard to Orson Welles’ radio presentation of War of the Worlds, which will reportedly cause mass terror due to its realistic presentation and effects. Cantril will also become a founding editor of the Rockefeller Foundation-funded Public Opinion Quarterly, an organ closely associated with US government’s psychological warfare endeavors following World War II. (See online file, Early Psychological Warfare Research and the Rockefeller Foundation, by Prof. James F. Tracy) 1935 – Dr. Alexis Carrel, a French-American Nobel Prize winner who has been on the staff of the Rockefeller Institute since its inception, publishes Man the Unknown, in which he suggests the removal of the mentally ill and the criminal by small euthanasia institutions which were to be equipped with suitable gases. (See online book, The Men Behind Hitler, by Bernhard Schreiber) 1935 – The Nuremberg Laws are passed in Germany, and anti-Jewish legislation commences. Initially these laws are concerned with compulsory retirement of ‘non-Aryan’ government employees, attempts to define ‘nonAryan’, and sending questionnaires to civil servants to gather details on their racial background. Already preceded by an assortment of citizenship laws that began in 1933, the two new laws are sharply to the point. The first, the ‘Reich Law of Citizenship’, will divide the German nation into classes of citizens, those who are merely subjects of the State and those who possess full citizenship including political rights. Based on racial and ideological grounds, this law, with one stroke, places all Jews into the category of second-class citizens. The second law, ‘For the Protection of German Blood and German Honor’ (or the ‘Blood Protection Law’) is intended to ensure the

racial purity of the nation for all time. Fundamentally it makes criminal any sexual intercourse between these new classes of citizens, but it is aimed specifically at the Jews. Apart from that, this law will also serve as a basis for further isolation of the socially undesirable in the following years. The aim of racial hygiene in Germany is intended to create a fictitious Aryan race. In accordance with this, all ‘non-Aryan’ elements were to be rooted out. Apart from having a wrong combination of chromosomes, it also seems to be a ‘non-Aryan’ trait to have or to be of a different opinion. Consequently, all minorities fall into this category, and liquidation, with the exception of the Jews who are declared scapegoats, will start with the smallest groups and work up from there. Because of this, the larger minorities are left with the belief that it will never affect them. If the Nazis were to start from the other end, everyone would know that it is intended to be everyone's neck and they could unite themselves against this program while the Nazis are still not yet firmly established. (See online book, The Men Behind Hitler, by Bernhard Schreiber) 1935 (December 12) – Heinrich Himmler founds the Lebensborn project. This involves taking children of preferred genetic stock and raising them as part of the new Aryan ‘super race’. 1936 – The incorporation of the Ford Foundation creates a tax haven for the ultra-wealthy Ford family dynasty. 1936 – The Office of Population Research is established at Princeton University, carrying on eugenics research and training. 1936 – John Whiteside (Jack) Parsons, a self-taught chemist, enters CalTech at age 21 with a desire to build space rockets. A special project is initiated that will eventually attract enough interest from the Army Air Corps that they take over its sponsorship. (See online book, Jack Parsons and the Curious Origins of the American Space Program, by The Magician) 1936 – In Hungary, a man named Stephen Pribil demonstrates an ‘invisibility system’, which utilizes special heterodyned light beams to render objects transparent and even invisible. Under the beams produced by his special lamps, opaque objects gradually become transparent. The effect can be controlled, optical transparencies sustained at specific ‘intensities’. Radio cabinets, exposed to his lamps, fade from view. Astounded witnesses are able to see through the cabinets, while the interiors stand out with amazing clarity. Metal parts, tubes, and chassis can be seen darkly shining through the wooden enclosures. (See online book, Lost Science, by Gerry Vassilatos)

1938 – L. Ron Hubbard, future founder of the Church of Scientology, begins writing and publishing science-fiction stories in popular pulp magazines. Up until now, he has been writing adventure stories, promoting himself in these and elsewhere as a nuclear physicist, engineer, explorer, medical doctor, etc., and boasting numerous extraordinary achievements that are entirely fabricated and intended to give him an appearance of greatness and authority. (See online book, Jack Parsons and the Curious Origins of the American Space Program, by The Magician) 1938 – At about this time, Harvard psychologist B.F. Skinner has fine-tuned the art of human control into what he termed ‘operant conditioning’, becoming a guru to generations of mind shapers that followed. His simple notion was that the reinforcement of a repeated negative stimulus (punishment) or positive stimulus (reward) formed the basis for learned behavior. Skinner is a member of US Army intelligence. (See online file, Mind Control, World Control, by Jim Keith) 1938 – Dr. Albert Hofmann first synthesizes LSD at Sandoz Laboratories in Basel, Switzerland while investigating the chemical and pharmacological properties of ergot, a rye fungus rich in medicinal alkaloids. Preliminary studies on laboratory animals did not prove significant, so the compound was shelved. It will be five years before Hoffman studies it again, at which point he will accidentally dose himself by absorbing it through his skin and learn of its intoxicating properties. Further experimentation on himself led him to conclude that this new drug could be an important tool for studying how the mind works. During this time, Sandoz is under the control of the Warburg family, and Allen Dulles is serving a post in Switzerland. 1938 – The American Society of Euthanasia is established. 1938 – The A=440Hz tuning standard (the standard for tuning musical instruments) is established. This standard is specifically chosen for its negative effect on the listener. Other frequencies might have been chosen that are superior for sound quality (such as A=444Hz, which is already widely in use at this time, or A=432Hz, which is mathematically consistent with universal design, and recognized as being spiritually uplifting), but these are passed over. A year later, the British will adopt the same standards. Joseph Goebbels, the Nazi propaganda minister, will be employed by the Rockefellers and Rothschilds to persuade the British to adopt it. The A=440Hz frequency stimulates ego tendencies and left-brain functioning while inhibiting intuition and creativity. 1938 (October 30) – Orson Welles’ War of the Worlds radio presentation results in reports of mass panic, as many listeners mistake this fictional

drama as a real alien invasion of the planet. Over the next several months afterwards, interviews with War of the Worlds listeners will be collected and subsequently analyzed in Hadley Cantril’s 1940 Rockefeller-funded study, The Invasion From Mars: A Study in the Psychology of Panic. 1939 (September) – RCA signs a ten-year contract with Philo Farnsworth to commercially manufacture television systems based on his patent. 1939 (September) – Germany invades Poland, causing the start of World War II. Later in the same month, executives from Rockefeller-owned Standard Oil fly to the Netherlands on a British Royal Air Force bomber to meet with (Germany’s) IG Farben executives. As the largest shareholder in IG Farben stock, Rockefeller’s Standard Oil pledges to keep their merger with IG Farben going, even if the United States enters the war. These Standard Oil funds will help to pay for the SS guards at Auschwitz as they work prisoners to death in IG Farben’s factories, as well as funding the barbaric research of Auschwitz’s number one doctor, Josef Mengele. Chase Manhattan Bank, also controlled by the Rockefellers, is also funding the Nazis at this time, and starts closing its Jewish accounts even before Hitler orders them to do so. Through the Rockefeller’s signature methods of taking over or merging with their competitors, Chase Manhattan will become the largest bank in the USA in the years ahead. 1939 – Rocket scientist Jack Parsons takes an interest in occultism and joins the Agape Lodge, the Los Angeles branch of Aleister Crowley’s Ordo Templi Orientis (OTO). He will quickly rise to prominence within the Order, and within a few years will be regularly corresponding with its leader, Aleister Crowley. (See online book, Jack Parsons and the Curious Origins of the American Space Program, by The Magician) 1940 – German inventor Viktor Schauberger applies for a patent at the Reich Patent Office for a device that could be put to use either as an energy generator or as a power plant for aircraft or submarines. It operates on centripetal force that draws air or liquid inward to create a force that is nine times greater than conventional turbines. Shortly after this, he writes to a cousin and tells him that he has invented an aircraft that makes no noise. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1940 – At about this time, the Rockefeller Foundation funds the establishment of the Office of Public Opinion Research (OPOR) at Princeton University. A primary objective of OPOR is to systematically examine how public opinion is forged, and learn what the motivating factors are behind mass public sentiment toward certain ends.

(See online file, Early “Psychological Warfare” Research and the Rockefeller Foundation, by Prof. James F. Tracy) 1940 – T. Townsend Brown is appointed to head the minesweeping research and development at the Navy Bureau of Ships. While here, he works on methods of ‘degaussing’ ships (canceling their magnetic fields). This will tie in with the claims made years later about the Philadelphia Experiment, which supposedly takes place in 1943. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1941 (March) – The German Gestapo becomes interested in the work of Viktor Schauberger. By May, he will be ordered by them to keep his work secret. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1941 (July) – L. Ron Hubbard enters the US Naval Reserve as a Lieutenant, using various letters of recommendation in which he has fabricated an apparently bogus past. He enrolls in Intelligence Officer training in New York, but is kicked out after his first assignment. He is reported to have taken positions of authority without obtaining official sanction and attempted to perform duties that he had no qualifications for. Eventually he goes to antisubmarine warfare school in Miami, and gets appointed Commanding Officer of a submarine tracker, the USS PC-815. Within five hours of setting sail out of Portland, Oregon, he is claiming to have detected enemy subs, and exhausts his supply of depth charges trying to knock them out. A second incident where he and his crew are firing weapons in Mexican waters leads to him being transferred to other duties where he can be supervised. He will end his military service at the end of World War II in the hospital for ‘epigastric distress’ and a long list of other minor aches and pains. (See online book, Jack Parsons & the Curious Origins of the American Space Program, by The Magician) 1941 (July) – The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) allows television stations to broadcast advertisements, but requires public service programming commitments as a requirement for a station to have a license. They set up the first licensing standards for television broadcasting. The first licenses are granted to NBC and CBS in New York. 1942 – There are about 5,000 television sets in operation in the USA at this time, but the production of new TVs, radios, and other broadcasting equipment for civilian purposes will be suspended from April 1942 to August 1945, during the war years. 1942 – T. Townsend Brown is made head of the Atlantic Fleet Radar Materiel School and Gyrocompass School in Norfolk, Virginia.

(See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1942 – With the help of British Intelligence, the Office of Strategic Services (OSS) is created by the US government, which includes a psychological warfare division that will be involved with propaganda and disinformation operations that target both foreign and domestic populations. 1942 – Jack Parsons leaves CalTech and starts a company called Aerojet, continuing his research into solid rocket fuels. He is also spending time building up the membership of the Agape Lodge of the OTO in Los Angeles. (See online book, Jack Parsons & the Curious Origins of the American Space Program, by The Magician) 1943 – The Rockefellers help finance the Allen Memorial Institute at McGill University in Canada, where the infamous Dr. Ewen Cameron will perform his macabre mind-control experiments on human victims. These experiments will be conducted under the auspices of the Canadian military, the Rockefeller Foundation, and the CIA. Cameron’s work will be based on the idea that behavior patterns in adults can be erased by a physiologic process (electroshock, drugs, sleep deprivation, psychic driving, etc.) that attacks neural patterns. He is interested in whether adults can be made patternless and returned to a state of neurological and psychological infancy for a short period before new patterns of behavior are introduced. 1943 – Josef Mengele concentration camp.

is

made

medical

commandant

of

Auschwitz

1943 – Prominent psychologist/hypnotist George Estabrooks publishes his book, Hypnotism, in which he outlines the utility of hypnotism for mindcontrol purposes. Estabrooks will become deeply involved in the CIA’s MKULTRA program in the years ahead. In his book, he claims that once a person's core personality has been split, it is then possible to control one or more of the alter personalities, without the conscious awareness of the primary personality. This process, according to Estabrooks, would allow the intelligence community to create ‘super spies’ – unwitting 'agents' who are willing to follow any orders unquestioningly. These agents could also make ideal couriers, since they could be fed sensitive information while in a hypnotic state and thereafter have no conscious awareness that they were transporting important information. He only vaguely alludes to the necessity of extreme trauma to create MPD in a person. He states that young children make the best subjects. 1943 – The rumored Philadelphia Experiment (Project Rainbow) takes place at the Philadelphia Naval shipyard (July and October). The original intent of this experiment is to make a battleship invisible to radar, with the possibility of making it optically invisible as well.

According to William Moore and Charles Berlitz, who will present this story to the public in book form in 1979 (The Philadelphia Experiment: Project Invisibility), the experiment not only succeeds in causing the battleship USS Eldridge to become completely invisible, but teleports it to its sister berth in Norfolk, Virginia. Strange things allegedly occur to the crew on board the ship during the experiment as well, causing some of the men to end up embedded in the metal of the ship, while others fade in and out of sight or disappear completely, and still others who appear to be on fire. Many of the survivors go completely insane from the experience. The story will be written about first by such people as Dr. Reilly H. Crabb, Vincent Gaddis, Brad Steiger, and Gray Barker, and will later come to the attention of Berlitz while he is investigating the mysteries of the Bermuda Triangle. Moore will have already been investigating the Philadelphia Experiment in the 1970s when he and Berlitz meet and begin collaborating on their book. It should be noted that Moore will publicly confess years later to having been wittingly used by Air Force Intelligence to disseminate government disinformation related to UFOs. Also, according to an article that appeared years later in the Seattle Times/Post Intelligencer, at the beginning of World War II, Charles Berlitz had been taken out of the Air Force to work in counter-intelligence. The article indicates that Berlitz' connections with intelligence agencies didn’t end with World War II, but that “He resumed his intelligence work, though not overseas, during the Korean and Vietnam wars.” Two people will play important parts in the initial unfolding of this incredible story. The first of these is an astrophysicist and private researcher named Morris K. Jessup, and the second is a rather mysterious man named Carlos Miguel Allende, who will claim to have been a first-hand witness to the experiment. Jessup will publish a book in 1955 called The Case for the UFOs, in which he offers his opinions about UFOs and their source of motive power. He will go on to give lectures and make appeals to the public for the government to begin research in this area, and this will get the attention of Allende, who will write him a number of letters in which he will warn against this idea. Allende will cryptically mention a certain Naval experiment that he had witnessed, in which a ship had been turned invisible and teleported to another location before returning to its berth minutes later. Allende will claim in his letters to Jessup that Einstein had actually completed his Unified Field Theory between 1925 and 1927, but had withdrawn it again out of fear of what might be done with it. Allende will go on to say that at the time, any possible uses of this theory that could be immediately applied were considered by the military, and one result of this was that they were able to make an entire ship and its crew turn invisible. According to Gerry Vassilatos in his book, Lost Science, just prior to the time that the Philadelphia Experiment was initiated, Naval researchers had been experiencing strange phenomena that were somehow related to the

extremely high amperage discharges from the special arc welders being used to build ships with armor plated hulls. A special process had been designed that allowed them to weld the extremely thick plating, and the intense electrical discharges of the welder was causing a strange ‘optical blackout’ effect. Some of the workers were also experiencing what appeared to be neurological effects, including hallucinations and even madness. Military officials saw this strange effect as a potential weapon. Other strange phenomena were occurring as well. After powering up the special capacitor that was used in the arc welding machinery, the intense discharge would routinely rock the entire site. When workers commenced their duties (having previously cleared out of the area prior to the power up), they would discover that the tools they had left lying there had disappeared. This was investigated further, and high-speed cameras were set up to film the effect. At first, they had thought they were being disintegrated by the intense blast of the discharge, but the cameras revealed that this was not the case at all. The objects simply vanished without any trace. T. Townsend Brown was one of the scientists brought in to investigate this phenomenon, which was similar to the electrogravitic effects he had been studying. The military started a classified research program to look into these effects (Project Rainbow), which led up to the events of the alleged Philadelphia Experiment. The names of T. Townsend Brown, Albert Einstein, John von Neumann, and Nikola Tesla have been attached to these experiments. This might very possibly have been true in the case of Brown, and the story’s more outrageous aspects may have been intended to discredit Brown and his antigravity work in order to throw off investigations into these matters. Brown never refused the truth of these experiments. He remained almost completely silent on the story, but is said to have confided to his friend Josh Reynolds sometime before his death in 1985 that the story was “greatly inflated”. The more extraordinary elements of this story will be used to support later claims (mostly made by UFO proponents) regarding an interdimensional and/or time-travel aspect to UFO phenomena. The purported symptoms suffered by the crew that was on board the USS Eldridge during the experiment suggest partial truth, in that some of their symptoms match the known effects of electromagnetic fields on the human brain. Irrespective of the more extraordinary claims regarding these experiments, the use of electromagnetic fields to generate radar invisibility is a technique used by the military today. 1943 (December) – T. Townsend Brown suffers a nervous breakdown and is discharged from the Navy. Could this have been due to exposure to intense

electromagnetic Experiment?

fields,

such

as

those

used

during

the

Philadelphia

(See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1944 – The Germans develop an electrical apparatus that produces an intense electromagnetic field that will interfere with the operation of an engine from a distance. They also develop a method of radar invisibility by producing an oscillating current that corresponds to the radar frequency to effectively cancel it out. These effects will be seen to occur quite regularly in many UFO sightings in the years ahead. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1944 – Glowing orbs, later named ‘foo-fighters’, are first sighted by bomber pilots while flying over Germany. These are small, apparently remotecontrolled objects that show the same general maneuverability as will be witnessed in UFO sightings in later years. Undetectable by radar, they are able to get within a few hundred feet of fighter jets and lock onto them for a few minutes. Sightings of these foo-fighters in German skies will continue sporadically throughout the war, suggesting that they are some sort of German experimental craft in early operational development. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1944 – T. Townsend Brown begins working as a radar consultant at Lockheed’s Vega division in Burbank, California. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1944 (April) – At 59 years of age, Viktor Schauberger is called up for active duty in the German Army and ordered to handpick a team to work with him in developing his invention – an unusual energy device that he had been working on before the war. He apparently achieves success with it just before the German’s surrender. One report from a team member will state that on the first attempt to run the saucer-like power plant, it rose to the ceiling trailing a blue-green and then silver glow. Only a few days after this test, an American group will show up and seize everything, putting Schauberger under protective custody. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1944 (November) – Long before the end of World War II, a Technical Industrial Intelligence Committee is set up by the US Joint Chiefs of Staff to begin identifying and locating any German developments that could serve to improve the postwar American economy. This committee is interested in military, industrial, electronic, and medical advancements. A subcommittee comprising 380 specially trained people represent 17 US companies. Because

of this early preparation, the Americans will acquire the greater portion of the spoils of war. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1944 – Betty Andreasson’s first purported alien abduction at age seven. This is the earliest known abduction case on record. Her future husband Bob Luca apparently has a separate encounter this year as well, at the age of five. Both cases are recalled through hypnotic regression many years later. In the case of Betty, she will remember years later through hypnotic regression that she is alone in her playhouse when a small luminous ball flies in and buzzes around her head. In the next moment she falls backwards and is feeling sleepy, and she feels something in her head and then hears a number of voices all talking together. They say she is “coming along fine” and would be ready in about five years. The beings tell her that they also visit many other people, and that what they are doing is for the good of mankind. She will have another (hypnotically recalled) abduction incident in five years. In the case of Bob, he is at the edge of a wooded area when he is approached by a disc-shaped object with a transparent dome on top. Two grey-skinned beings with large heads communicate to him via telepathy from inside the object while he sits paralyzed, saying that they are preparing him and others for something that will be good for mankind in the future. Bob is programmed by these beings to forget whatever else occurs during this incident. He will have another encounter in 1967 (again, separate from Betty’s 1967 encounter). (See book, The Watchers, by Raymond E. Fowler) 1944 – William Thetford graduates from DePauw University. He takes a job as an administrator for the Manhattan Project, supervising certain buildings and performing radiation decontamination. After the bombs are dropped on Hiroshima and Nagasaki, he quits and enrolls in a course being given by Dr. Carl Rogers on ‘Client-Centered Psychotherapy’. He soon becomes Rogers’ teaching assistant, and then his research assistant. 1944 – Aleister Crowley appoints Jack Parsons as head of the Agape Lodge of the OTO in California. This same year, Parsons founds the Jet Propulsion Laboratory. (See online book, Jack Parsons & the Curious Origins of the American Space Program, by The Magician) 1945 – As the Allies are plundering Germany at the end of the war, they discover that the Nazis had constructed a large number of underground facilities where most of their advanced technologies were being developed. These facilities are each from five to twenty-six kilometers in length. These

German underground facilities were also located in Austria, France, Italy, Hungary, and Czechoslovakia. Approximately 143 of them had been put into production just months before the war’s end, and another 107 were in planning or preparation. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1945 – T. Townsend Brown moves to Hawaii after the war and continues his work on antigravity research and is a consultant at the Pearl Harbor Navy Yard. He demonstrates his gravitators and tethered flying discs to Adm. Arthur W. Radford, Commander in Chief of the US Pacific Fleet. After the demonstration and an apparently disinterested response by the Navy, he goes home to find that his room has been broken into and his notebooks are missing. The Navy returns them to him several days later. It is at this point that the US military seems to have stolen Brown’s research work and started secretly developing it, if they hadn’t already been. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1945 - Jack Parsons, now Lodge Master of the Agape Lodge of the Ordo Templi Orientis, meets L. Ron Hubbard. Parsons is impressed by Hubbard and writes Crowley to tell him about the man and his desire to establish a ‘New Aeon’. This is something that Parsons and Crowley are apparently interested in as well. Parsons lets Hubbard live with him for the next few years. (See online book, Jack Parsons & the Curious Origins of the American Space Program, by The Magician) 1945 (September 24) – A directive written by a senior USAAF field officer to General McDonald, Air Force intelligence chief at Wright Field in Ohio, states that: 1. It is considered that the following have been thoroughly investigated and have proven to have no basis of fact. a. Remote Interference with Aircraft Investigations have been completed on this subject and it is considered that there is no means presently known which was in development or use by the German Air Force which could interfere with the engines of aircraft in flight. All information available through interrogations, equipment and documents has been thoroughly investigated and this subject may be closed with negative result. b. Balls of Fire As far as can be determined from extensive interrogations, investigation of documents, and field trips, there is no basis of fact in the reports made by aircrews concerning balls of fire other than that phenomena similar to balls of fire may have been produced by jet aircraft or missiles. This subject may be considered closed with negative results. A. R. Sullivan, Jr., Lt. Colonel, Sig. C.

A document in the Air Force archives shows that the Americans actually did find evidence that the Germans were developing both of these types of technologies. The results of any investigations into these technologies were therefore likely to have been quite positive, and this directive was a piece of disinformation meant to put a lid on the matter and deter further investigation. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1945 (October) – With the end of World War II, the OSS is dismantled. 1945 – With the end of World War II, Project Paperclip begins bringing thousands of Nazi scientists and engineers into the US, continuing until as late as 1990. This will include rocket scientists Werner Von Braun and Arthur Rudolph, flying saucer designer Richard Miethe, physician Hubertus Strughold, physicist Werner Heisenberg, mind-control expert Joseph Mengele, and head of Germen intelligence, Reinhard Gehlen, among others. A large number of them will be psychologists, psychiatrists, and physicians. These scientists and doctors will be put to work for US military and intelligence agencies, usually within major front companies. Although US President Harry Truman expressly excluded anyone found “to have been a member of the Nazi Party, and more than a nominal participant in its activities, or an active supporter of Nazi militarism,” this exclusion would have rendered ineligible most of the leading scientists that had been identified for recruitment, and so it was ignored, and false employment and political biographies were created for them while their Nazi Party memberships and régime affiliations were expunged from the public record. Within a two year period, an estimated 1,800 technicians and scientists, along with 3,700 family-members will be brought into the USA. Scientists are assigned to such places as Fort Strong, Massachusetts; Fort Bliss, Texas; White Sands Proving Grounds, New Mexico; Wright Field; Lockheed; Martin Marietta; North American Aviation; and other aviation companies. Reinhard Gehlen is able to bring many of his SS over and implant them into the ranks of the CIA. He also brings with him a massive amount of intelligence information that he had microfilmed just before his surrender. Apart from Project Paperclip, the CIA arrange for a private intelligence facility in West Germany to be established, and name it the Gehlen Organization. This is used by Gehlen to establish ‘rat lines’ to get Nazi war criminals out of Europe to avoid prosecution. Gehlen is able to help more than 5,000 Nazis escape Germany and relocate around the world, particularly in South and Central America. Mass murderers like Klaus Barbie will help governments set up death squads in Chile, Argentina, El Salvador, and elsewhere. A large number of the Project Paperclip Nazis are hard-core Satanists and will continue their practices unabated on American soil, helping to spread satanic ideologies and practices until they become deeply rooted within the military, intelligence agencies such as the NSA and CIA, NASA, law enforcement

agencies such as the FBI and BATF, local and state police forces, the court system, the Federal Reserve and Wall Street, the education system, hospitals and mental institutions, the AHA, APA, AMA, and ADA, the FDA, science and research foundations, postal services, the communications industry, transportation such as airlines, trains, road/highway services, religion, the entertainment industry, including movie production, TV, music industry and casinos, mainstream media, major corporations, utilities such as gas, electric, and oil, etc. These Paperclip Nazis aren’t the source of Satanism in America, however. They are brought into the US by the same Satanists who had helped Hitler rise to power and funded him in the war effort. Allen Dulles was instrumental in this. 1945 – At the end of World War II, General Reinhard Gehlen, the head of the Nazi SS and Hitler’s Chief of Intelligence against Russia, arrives in Washington DC to meet extensively with President Truman, General William ‘Wild Bill’ Donovan, Director of the Office of Strategic Services (OSS) and Allen Dulles, who will later become the head of the future CIA. The objective of their brain-storming sessions is to reorganize the American intelligence operation, transforming it into a highly-efficient covert organization. The culmination of their efforts will produce the Central Intelligence Group in 1946, which will be renamed the Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) in 1947. 1945 – The Rockefellers influence the establishment of the United Nations. 1946 – Jack Parsons and L. Ron Hubbard perform a series of Enochian sex magick rituals in an attempt to conceive a ‘moon child’ – a supernatural offspring with messianic potential. These rituals will become known as the ‘Babalon Working’. The rituals draw largely from the writings of occultist Aleister Crowley. During the rituals, Hubbard reportedly channels an entity that is mentioned in Crowley’s The Book of the Law. Parsons writes to Crowley to inform him of this. The Babalon Working will later be claimed by certain sources to have created an interdimensional doorway in our spacetime matrix, allowing non-earthly beings to enter our part of the universe. This claim will be used by some to explain the many strange UFO-related activities that will begin soon after Parsons’ and Hubbard’s experiment. Soon after the ritual, Parsons and Hubbard will have a failed business partnership that will result in a falling out between them when Hubbard attempts to make off with all of Parsons’ money. (See online book, Jack Parsons & the Curious Origins of the American Space Program, by The Magician) 1946 – The Office of Naval Research (ONR) is formed. 1946 – The RAND Corporation is established by the US Army Air Force as Project RAND. It is a government think-tank involved in developing

technologies for the military. Over the years, it will be funded through government contracts, university collaborators, and ‘private donors’. RAND's primary agency clients will include the CIA and DARPA (Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency). RAND was conceived by Donald Douglas, CEO of Douglas Aircraft, along with two military officer luminaries. These officers carry with them significant ‘UFO histories’. These officers are Major General Curtis LeMay (the US Air Force's Chief of Development) and General Hap Arnold (considered the ‘father’ of the modern US Air Force). This organization will be secretly involved in studying the UFO phenomenon. (See online article, Deep Secrets of a UFO Think Tank Exposed!, by Anthony Bragalia) 1946 – Development of the ENIAC computer by the US Army, which is the first general purpose computer in existence. 1946 – The first x-ray evidence of electronic implants in humans is made at the Karolinska Hospital in Stockholm, Sweden. 1946 – 0.5% of homes in the USA have television sets. 1947 – Andrija Puharich graduates from medical school at Northwestern University. During his years there, he has developed what he calls the Theory of Nerve Conduction, in which he proposed that the neurons radiate and receive waves of energy (which he calculated to be in the ultra-shortwave bands below infrared and above the radar spectrum), and therefore act as a certain type of radio receiver-transmitter for the transference of thoughts from one person to another. His theory is well received by leading scientists, including Jose Delgado, who will become notoriously famous as an MKULTRA scientist for conducting experiments in electronic stimulation of the brain using implants. 1947 (June 21) – Maury Island UFO sighting in Washington State. This case starts with the claim of a sighting of six UFOs by a man named Harold A, Dahl, his son Charles, and two other crewmen on board a boat in Puget Sound. According to Dahl’s story, metal debris had fallen off one of the UFOs, killing Dahl’s dog and burning the arm of his son. Some of the debris was retrieved and Dahl claimed to have taken photographs of the UFOs. Dahl reported the sighting to his employer, Fred Lee Crisman, who is supposedly the harbor patrolman at Tacoma, Washington. The next day, on June 22nd, Dahl is visited by a mysterious ‘man in a dark suit’ driving a new black Buick (the first MIB incident on record), who warns Dahl that if he loves his family he shouldn’t talk about what he had seen. The man seems to already know all about the events of the previous day.

Crisman investigates Dahl’s claims for himself on that second day, and finds a great deal more of the debris where Dahl said the sighting had occurred. Crisman also claims to have seen another UFO at that time. Soon after this, in July, Crisman writes a letter to Raymond Palmer, editor of Amazing Stories magazine, about the incident. In turn, Palmer writes to Kenneth Arnold, who had his own UFO sighting three days after the Maury Island incident (see next entry), and asks Arnold to investigate the incident for him, paying him $200 for his troubles. Arnold is assisted in the investigation by a friend, United Airlines Captain E. J. Smith. On July 29th, Arnold arrives in Tacoma to interview Dahl. Upon arriving, he seeks out a hotel to stay at, and finds that an unknown person had already booked a room for him at the Winthrop Hotel. When he contacts Dahl that day, the latter is reluctant to talk to him, saying that he had been having a run of bad luck – he nearly lost both his job and his son, and his wife had suddenly become sick. He attributed these problems to the threat by the mysterious MIB. However, when Arnold tells him who he is, Dahl relents and agrees to talk to him. On July 30th, Dahl is interviewed by Arnold. He claims that the photos he took had strange spots on them, but the photos are never produced as evidence. Dahl had apparently sent some of the debris to Palmer, and Palmer claims that it was stolen out of his office, but not before he had some of it analyzed. Palmer claims that the results of the analysis show that it is neither slag nor natural rock. Dahl had described an extremely light, white foil-like metal (similar to what was found at the Roswell crash), but nothing like what he described is to be found among any of the debris that had been retrieved. The investigation will eventually reveal that Dahl and Crisman weren’t actually harbor patrolmen, but just salvagers. During Arnold’s investigation, a reporter from United Press receives calls from an unknown person who informs the reporter of everything that is discussed between Arnold, Smith, Dahl, and Crisman in Arnold’s hotel room, which the reporter repeated back to Arnold. Arnold concludes that the room has been bugged, but a search of the room turns up nothing. On July 31st, two Army Air Corps Officers, First Lieutenant Frank M. Brown from Hamilton AFB, California, and Captain William L. Davidson, are sent at Arnold’s request to investigate the UFO report. Again, the United Press are already aware of the officer’s involvement, and call Arnold to ask him why they are meeting with him. The only people Arnold has told about them are Smith, Dahl, and Crisman. The two officers meet with Arnold and Crisman (Dahl doesn’t show up), and retrieves a box of the debris from Crisman before heading to Hamilton AFB from McChord AFB on a B-25. Apparently, Brown, Davidson, and Arnold all feel that this incident is a hoax, and Brown and Davidson inform a Major George Sanders at McChord AFB of this opinion before leaving with the debris in their plane on August 1st. Sanders also

states that he thinks it is a hoax, but for some reason is nevertheless determined that all pieces of the debris in their possession are gathered up. The officer’s plane subsequently crashes, killing both men, while three others on the plane are able to bail out safely. The mystery caller to United Press also knows the names of these two officers in spite of the fact that their names were never released, and the caller even claims that the plane had been shot down. The crash makes local and national news, in which it is mentioned that the plane was carrying ‘saucer parts’. It is later concluded that the caller who reported it was none other than Crisman. At some point (according to author Kevin Randle), Dahl and Crisman both apparently admit that the debris had been nothing more than slag from a local smelter, and that the whole story was made up. However, much later in the January 1950 issue of Fate magazine (another magazine edited by Raymond Palmer), Crisman claims in a letter to the editor that the Maury Island incident was not a hoax. By August 2nd, Dahl and Crisman have both disappeared and are nowhere to be found. On his way home after the investigation, on August 3rd, Arnold crashes his plane due to a faulty fuel valve, but is unhurt. Whether the plane was tampered with or not is unknown. It is later discovered that Crisman had written to Amazing Stories magazine a year earlier (June 1946), warning about publishing other stories that Palmer had been featuring in his magazine about underworld creatures (known as the ‘Shaver Mystery’), claiming that it was all true. He tells Palmer that he had come across these creatures and a futuristic laser weapon in Asia while serving in an aviation unit called the Second Air Commando. Crisman’s knowledge of this military unit revealed that he probably had ties to the military, whether or not he was actually in that unit. He also claimed to have served in the OSS (the precursor to the CIA). Years later, CIA documents will reveal that he had indeed served in the OSS as a liaison officer to the British Royal Air Force during WWII, and was later transferred to the (yet to be formed) CIA, where he acted as an ‘extended agent’, specializing in ‘disruption activities’. On August 18th, 1947, a recommendation issued by Lt. Colonel Donald Springer, the Army Air Corps intelligence officer at Hamilton AFB, states that “in view of the reported statements made by Mr. Crisman that consideration be given to revoke his Air Reserve commission and flying status as an undesirable and unreliable officer”. Crisman will eventually turn up again in the 1960s during New Orleans’ district attorney Jim Garrison’s investigation of Clay Shaw in relation to the Kennedy assassination, and will be identified as one of the three hobos who were picked up in the railroad yard soon after the shooting. Crisman and

Shaw apparently know each other well, since he is the first person Shaw will call when he is arrested. He is also well known to Michael Riconosciuto, a witness who will testify before the House Judiciary Committee investigating the Inslaw Affair. In Crisman’s obituary after his death on December 10th, 1975, it will be stated that he had received the Distinguished Service Cross, although no proof of this will be found. Why he would have received it can only be guessed at. The details that have emerged regarding this incident show that Fred Crisman was the central figure in a purposeful UFO hoax, and was most likely attempting to create the appearance that the matter was highly sensitive and even dangerous. He seems to have been working in the background during the investigation to give the incident wide publicity and create an air of mystery by anonymously tipping off the United Press reporters (and sending an agent to threaten Dahl into silence), as well as by causing the plane crashes in order to dispose of the false evidence and the doubtful investigators, even going so far as to cause their deaths. The result seems to have been to get the story out to the public (via United Press) while eliminating all possibility of proving it was a hoax. Dahl may have been caught up as a witting accomplice in the hoax at Crisman’s urging until he was threatened by the mysterious MIB, at which point he did his best to extricate himself from the matter, given the circumstances of his initial involvement as the main witness. The request by Raymond Palmer (a person of dubious character with probable ties to intelligence agencies) for Arnold to investigate the incident soon after Arnold’s own UFO sighting may have been designed to give the story even greater publicity, since Arnold was already in the public spotlight at the time, and was a trusted individual. (See A Different Perspective: The Maury Island UFO Crash, by Kevin Randle; Maury Island Incident, at wikipedia; Fred Crisman, at wikipedia) 1947 (June 24) – Kenneth Arnold makes the first public report of a UFO sighting. Just three days after the Maury Island incident occurs but before it is reported to anyone, Kenneth Arnold makes headline news when he reports spotting nine UFOs over Mt. Rainier in Washington State while helping to search for a crashed airplane in the area. In his description to reporters, he is the first to use the term ‘flying saucer’. 1947 (July 4) – Less than two weeks after the very first reported UFO sighting by Kenneth Arnold, the rumored UFO crash in Roswell, New Mexico occurs. 1947 (July 8-9) – Newspaper reports are made of Roswell crash and a subsequent cover-up begins. 1947 (September) – The Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) is formed. It takes up where the OSS had left off in 1945. Rear Admiral Roscoe H. Hillenkoetter is appointed as the first Director. Project Paperclip Nazis who

worked for Reinhard Gehlen’s Germen intelligence services are given positions in this new agency. 1947 (September) – The purported secret group known as MJ-12 is created. Its purpose is to investigate UFOs. 1947 (September 23) – A memo written by Lieutenant General Nathan Twining, head of US Army Air Force’s Air Materiel Command, to Brigadier George Schulgen, a senior USAAF staff officer in Washington, with the subject heading “AMC Opinion Concerning ‘Flying Discs’”, states in part: “There are objects probably approximating the shape of a disc, of such appreciable size as to appear to be as large as man-made aircraft… The reported operating characteristics such as extreme rates of climb, maneuverability (particularly in roll), and action which must be considered evasive when sighted. […] It is possible, within the present U.S. knowledge – provided extensive detailed development is undertaken – to construct a piloted aircraft which has the general description of the object above which would be capable of an approximate range of 7,000 miles at subsonic speeds.” It is entirely possible that these objects are experimental craft that originate from a military branch other than the Army, and that Twining is not aware of the fact. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1947 (December 1) – The day of Aleister Crowley’s death. When L. Ron Hubbard hears of the death, he decides to adopt Crowley’s self-appointed title of ‘the Great Beast 666’. Hubbard begins making plans to establish his extremely cultish Church of Scientology, basing it on a philosophy and mental-health (mind-control) system he has been working on that he calls ‘Dianetics’. Although he will claim that this work originates entirely from himself, it will largely reflect the earlier work of Alfred Korzybski, published as far back as 1935. (See online file, Hollywood, Satanism, Scientology and Suicide) 1947 – What will become one of the most successful Tavistock offshoot organizations, the National Training Laboratories (NTL), is founded (later renamed the NTL Institute for Applied Behavioral Sciences). Located in Bethel, Maine, the mission of the NTL is to give ‘group dynamics’ sessions to American leaders. During group sessions, dissonance or stress is introduced to destroy the individual's previous beliefs, and then a new, group-oriented personality is coaxed forth. This will become the primary technical method used by a myriad of Tavistock-influenced ‘sensitivity’ groups like Alanon and Esalen. In the years to come, the majority of America's corporate leaders will be processed in NTL’s programs, as will be members of various segments of the government, including the Navy, the Department of Education, and the State Department.

(See online file, Mind Control, World Control, by Jim Keith) 1947 – The secret UKUSA Agreement is signed between the US and Britain, and soon after adding Canada, Australia, and New Zealand, creating a worldwide listening network for electronic communications. Norway, Denmark, Germany, and Turkey would eventually join as third-party participants. Each of the five main countries involved are responsible for overseeing surveillance of different parts of the globe. The agreement requires that before anyone is admitted to knowledge of the network operations, they must first undertake a lifelong commitment to secrecy. Every individual working for this network must be ‘indoctrinated’ and, often ‘re-indoctrinated’ each time they are admitted to knowledge of a specific project. They are privy to information on a strictly need-to-know basis, and the need for total secrecy about their work is constant. All information passing through this network is compartmentalized and relies on specially assigned code words for access. This secret network is the root of the later ECHELON global surveillance system. It is the first global Wide Area Network (WAN), connecting signals intelligence (SIGINT) and processing stations. It won’t be until the mid-1990s that the Internet will become larger than this secret network. It will incorporate the NSA’s internal email system, which will remain completely separate from regular Internet email systems, providing complete security of communications within this highly secretive organization. (See online file, Inside Echelon, by Duncan Campbell) 1947 – The Office of Naval Intelligence (ONI) starts Project CHATTER, which delves into the Nazi secret mind control experiments. The project is involved in extracting information from subjects against their will without inflicting harm or pain. 1947 – The Air Force’s Project SIGN is initiated, with the purpose of studying UFOs in relation to their performance and purpose. 1947 – British scientist Dennis Gabor develops the theory of holography while working to improve the resolution of an electron microscope. 1948 – L. Ron Hubbard is invited to attend a meeting of the Los Angeles Fantasy and Science Fiction Society. He agrees to go, and attends several of their meetings, using them as an opportunity to further boast about his exaggerated achievements and abilities. One characteristic that he does actually possess is the ability to hypnotize people, and he gives a demonstration, causing one person to think he was holding a pair of miniature kangaroos in his hand, another thinking the floor was getting hotter and hotter, another who would immediately fall asleep whenever Hubbard scratched his nose, etc. Others who witness his hypnotic abilities will state that he could put some people into a hypnotic trance in seconds.

This period will also mark a change in Hubbard’s interests from sciencefiction to philosophy, as he begins to introduce his ideas about mental health, which he will call ‘Dianetics’. In the next year, Hubbard will convince John W. Campbell, the editor of Astounding Science Fiction magazine, of the merits of his technique in using hypnosis to cure mental aberrations and psychosomatic illnesses. Campbell will become the first committed disciple of Dianetics. Through Campbell, Hubbard is also able to convince a medical doctor by the name of Dr. Joseph Winter of the merits of his techniques, and the three men will continue to develop and refine them further, bringing in several other interested parties over time. They will be known during this time as the ‘Bay Head Circle’. (See book, Bare-Faced Messiah, by Russell Miller) 1948 – Louis Jolyin West graduates from the University of Minnesota School of Medicine. He is already enlisted in the US Army, stationed in their Specialized Training Program. He will be in charge of the US government’s secret mind-control research programs (MKULTRA) in the years ahead. 1948 – The US Navy allegedly begins Project Penguin, headed by a man named Rexford Daniels, who previously studied the effects of electromagnetic waves on human beings. The purpose of this alleged project is to test individuals who have psychic abilities. Andrija Puharich will later claim to have been involved in this project. The US Navy will later deny the existence of this project. (See online file, Ratting Out Puharich, by Terry L. Milner) 1948 – Project SIGN is renamed Project GRUDGE. 1948 – According to James Casbolt, Project ANVIL is started in Britain. This is said to be a genetic bloodline study to locate gifted children for use in espionage operations. In the 1950s the name will be changed to Project Oaktree. 1948 – Behavioral psychologist B. F. Skinner writes Walden Two, a novel about life in a utopian community created on his principles of social engineering, in which 1,000 individuals are allowed to live the most meaningful and fulfilling life possible. In this utopian community there is no democracy and everything is run by behavioral engineers. 1948 – According to federal files, the CIA’s Operation Octopus is in full swing at this time. This is a surveillance program that can turn any television set with tubes into a broadcast transmitter. Agents of Octopus can pick up audio and visual images with the equipment as far as 25 miles away.

1948 - The Swedish children’s hospital, Sachsska Barnsjukhuset, starts an experimental project that involves implanting electrodes in the brains of newborn babies. The same type of projects are going on in other countries, including the US, Britain, and New Zealand. 1948 (December 20) – Andrija Puharich receives a medical discharge from the US Army. He decides to visit his father and stepmother in Chicago before going to New York and Boston to meet other scientists to discuss his theories on nerve conduction. While stopping in Camden, Maine, to visit a friend named Zlatko Balokovic and his wife Joyce, he is introduced to the idea that there are beings with superhuman abilities who can live outside of space and time as we know it, and can enter our physical world whenever they choose to, appearing as living people. It is suggested to him that Jesus Christ was one of these beings. This idea leads Puharich to begin taking a serious interest in psychic phenomena. The Balokovics, who are quite wealthy, offer him a place to live at their guesthouse, where he is able to begin his research into nerve-conduction. He will be given the use of a neighbor’s barn for his laboratory. The Balokovic’s will begin to stir up interest in Puharich among their rich and influential friends, leading to the creation of a small fund for his research. He will use these funds to build his own electronic equipment as well as a Faraday cage to house it all. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1949 – Three year old Uri Geller is allegedly visited by a UFO, after which (four years later) he begins to develop strong psychic abilities. He will not see another UFO until he meets Andrija Puharich in 1971, when he will begin to see them repeatedly throughout their association. (See book, Uri: A Journal of the Mystery of Uri Geller, by Andrija Puharich) 1949 – Andrija Puharich founds the Round Table Foundation of Electrobiology, which, although it is originally interested in researching neurophysiology, will soon become involved in exploring psychic phenomena, particularly channeling. His most prominent psychic mediums during this period will be Eileen Garrett and Peter Hurkos. Two other psychics that Puharich will use in his research are Bobby Horne (who will almost be led to suicide by the experience), and Phyllis Schlemmer (who will continue to channel ‘entities’ for the next twenty years and gain wide recognition). Puharich’s group will attract some very wealthy backers, including former US vice-president Henry A. Wallace (a Theosophist and 33 rd degree Mason, and the person responsible for the Illuminati symbolism on the US one dollar bill), Ruth Forbes Young (of the Forbes dynasty) and her husband, Arthur M. Young (inventor of the Bell helicopter), Alice Bouverie (heiress to the Astor dynasty), and Sir John Whitmore (multimillionaire and former race car driver). Eileen Garrett also introduces Puharich to the great electronics inventor, John Hayes Hammond, Jr., who thereafter becomes his close friend

and mentor. Puharich will also have many connections to other wealthy and influential people. During this same period, Puharich is also developing electronic hearing-aid devices for the deaf. These devices (one of them involving an electronic tooth implant) will allow a person to hear a radio-transmitted audio signal intercranially. These devices could conceivably be used to transmit voices directly into the head of a medium, making them think they were hearing spirits. The Round Table Foundation is secretly receiving funds from the Pentagon. It will only come to light many decades later that Puharich is in the employ of the CIA during this time and is working directly under Dr. Sidney Gottlieb, who will soon be heading the secret government mind-control programs when MKULTRA is officially established in 1953. 1949 - Mrs. Janine Jones of New Zealand is electronically implanted immediately after her birth at LoverHutt Hospital. The psychosurgery is performed via stereotaxic methods by drilling into her skull. She is adopted into another family. Both her natural and adopted parents have military backgrounds. Her birth father is (at this time) a prominent politician and Chief Justice of Western Samoa. X-rays will later reveal that she has implants in the cavities near the cochlea’s of both ears and one in the frontal lobe directly adjacent to the nasal passages. 1949 – Betty Andreasson has her second (hypnotically recalled) alien abduction experience. She recalls being out in the woods when she is confronted by a small being. Scared, she starts throwing stones at it, but they appear to stop in mid-air and drop harmlessly to the ground. A small marble-sized object emerges from the being’s suit and flies over to attach itself to her forehead. She immediately feels sleepy and falls backwards. Like the first encounter five years earlier, she hears voices in her head that are discussing her. They state that she will be ready in another year, and that they are preparing things for her. (See book, The Watchers, by Raymond E. Fowler) 1949 – George Orwell, a political futurologist, publishes his futuristic novel, 1984, which depicts life in a futuristic totalitarian society. The parallels to how we are living today as we enter the twenty-first century is more than just remarkable – the book is like a premonition of what is to come. In this novel, the citizenry is constantly watched by the government through technology; knowledge is slowly reduced through the elimination of ideas and replaced with propagandist slogans and news bites; the government is untouchable and always right; mediocrity in life is encouraged; every word and action is a measure of a person’s conformity; invisible (and sometimes nonexistent) enemies are constantly posing threats to the state; etc. The

ideology of the government in this book is best expressed by the slogan: “WAR IS PEACE - FREEDOM IS SLAVERY - IGNORANCE IS STRENGTH”. 1949 (November) – Eustace Mullins, a researcher in Washington DC, is invited to meet the famous American poet Ezra Pound who is confined at St. Elizabeth’s Mental Hospital as a ‘political prisoner’, having been charged with treason for Radio Rome broadcasts that questioned America's war motives. Pound commissions Mullins to examine the power of the U.S. banking establishment. Mullins spends every morning for the next two years in the Library of Congress and meets with Pound every afternoon. The resulting manuscript, The Secrets of the Federal Reserve, will prove to be too hot for any American publisher to handle. Nineteen publishers will reject it. When it finally appears in Germany in 1955, the US military will confiscate all 10,000 copies and burn them. (See online book, Illuminati: The Cult That Hijacked the World, by Henry Makow, PhD) 1949 (December) – Donald Keyhoe publishes an article titled Flying Saucers Are Real in True magazine. 1950 – Professor Giuseppe Belluzzo, a former industry minister in Mussolini’s cabinet, claims to have worked on disc-shaped ‘flying bombs’ that were passed on to the Germans and developed further. He states that they are being developed by the Russians. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1950 – Rudolf Schriever, a German scientist, tells the West German media about a flying machine he was working on for the Nazis during World War II that would have changed the war’s outcome had it been fully developed. This had stemmed from Schriever’s work at the Heinkel Aircraft Company in 1940. The craft, classed as the V3 and nicknamed the ‘Flying Top’, was able to take off and land vertically. By 1942 a prototype had been test-flown and received top secret funding from the German’s State Air Ministry. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1950 (March) – Senator Joseph McCarthy initiates a series of investigations into potential communist subversion of the CIA. Allen Dulles will request that President Eisenhower step in and demand that he discontinue issuing subpoenas against the Agency. Under Dulles' orders, the CIA will break into McCarthy's Senate office as well as intentionally feed him disinformation to discredit him, in order to stop his investigation of communist infiltrators in the CIA. Many of these infiltrators are Nazis that have been brought over from Germany under Project Paperclip and given positions in the CIA with Dulles’ knowledge and assistance.

1950 (April 14) – A research paper by RAND entitled The Exploitation of Superstitions for Purposes of Psychological Warfare is published for the US Air Force. Although the paper doesn’t explicitly mention UFOs, it is obvious that at the time of publication, the UFO phenomenon was already being used in psychological operations, capitalizing on modern-day superstitions. The paper notes that during times of great uncertainty, such as in wartime, superstitious activities increase substantially. It points out that although the less educated members of a population are more likely to be superstitious, the more intelligent members (including military and government officials) often engage in superstitious beliefs as well. More significantly, it suggests that superstitions can be exploited with fairly simple props and illusionary effects. The author states: “It seems likely that superstitions flourish in an atmosphere of tension and insecurity and that when daily experiences fail to provide reassurance and freedom from anxiety, when in fact factors making for anxiety and insecurity are multiplied as they are in time of war, an atmosphere exists which is conducive to the acceptance of superstitions.” 1950 (April 20) – The CIA initiates Project BLUEBIRD, which is involved in researching methods of human behavioral control with an emphasis on using drugs to achieve these ends. The goals consist of “controlling an individual to the point where he will do our bidding against his will and even against such fundamental laws of nature as self-preservation.” 1950 – Betty Andreasson’s only consciously recalled memory of an alien abduction occurs in this year, when she is thirteen years old. She remembers seeing what looks like the moon coming closer and closer to her. She tries to run away, but is unable to move. Her next memory is of being in a room in a tranquilized state. Further investigation of the incident years later will reveal that she was taken aboard the craft and taken to another place, where she “entered the world of Light to see the One”. She apparently interprets this as God (she becomes a devout Christian at sixteen years old). She sees two of herself at this point, as though having an out-of-body (OOB) experience. Her other ‘self’ appears stiff and unmoving. Whatever takes place during her visit with ‘the One’, she will be incapable of giving any details to investigators later on, but it overwhelms her with love and joy. Before being returned to where she was picked up, small beings with large heads and dark eyes implant something in her head. This object will be retrieved by these beings in 1967, extracting it from her nose. 1950 – Behavioral psychologist John Gittinger joins the CIA under the cover of the Human Ecology Fund. Gittinger will develop his Personality Assessment System (PAS), which he had already been working on for several years, basing it on scores from the Wechsler Adult Intelligence Scale (WAIS). With his PAS, both personality traits and predictable behaviors under specific given situations can be accurately determined. The PAS will come to be used extensively both for identifying individuals who are the best subjects for the various mind-control programs in MKULTRA, as well as for selecting and

handling CIA operatives and agents, and of course, for determining how to compromise a person and take advantage of them. Gittinger will go on to develop an extensive database that will allow all phases of human behavior to be charted and individuals categorized, based on the comparison of accumulated test scores. Such categories are able to be determined for those who are good role-players, who are easy to hypnotize and who aren’t, who will be most loyal and who might become traitors, who have sexual deviancies, what a person’s greatest fears are, what motivates them, how they can best be influenced to act a certain way, etc. Almost anything is able to be determined about an individual’s personality with this system. Top CIA officials are so impressed with this system that they begin to use it in most agent-connected activities. The prime objectives for using this system are control, exploitation, or neutralization. Eventually, Gittinger’s database of test scores will become large enough that individuals who haven’t even taken the Wechsler tests can still be accurately assessed by studying their behavior in various circumstances and looking for specific patterns that correspond to the PAS. (See online book, The Search for the Manchurian Candidate, by John Marks) 1950 – In April, the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation is established in Elizabeth, New Jersey. A month later, L. Ron Hubbard publishes Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health, first introduced in Astounding Science Fiction magazine, and immediately after published in book form by Hermitage House. It becomes an instant hit, staying at the top of the Los Angeles Times bestseller list for several months. After only two months of the book’s publication, there are already five hundred Dianetics groups in operation across the USA. With his new-found publishing success, Hubbard relies on his charm and the false image he has been creating for himself as an exceptionally gifted individual with expertise in various fields of knowledge, using these to legitimize himself and endear his followers. Dianetics will quickly evolve into Scientology, with the hidden intent of enslaving followers through mindcontrol techniques while at least pretending to turn them into super-humans through a series of ‘auditing’ sessions. Scientology will eventually grow into a $300 million a year corporation with branches throughout the world. Like any typical secret society, Scientology is composed of a series of levels that are reached through initiatory processing, after which they are given access to a new layer of ‘secret knowledge’ and the purported benefits that go with it. Also like with many secret societies, Hubbard will base this secret knowledge on an invented cosmological history that spans aeons of time and involves reincarnation and past-life histories. He teaches that ‘hypnotically implanted goals’ have been deliberately and maliciously installed into a person's subconscious mind throughout their many incarnations. (This concept of implants reflects the influence of Crowley’s ideas on Hubbard). Dianetics and Scientology are promoted as a method of uncovering and

eliminating these aberrations through its system of ‘auditing’. The techniques used, although generally based on legitimate science, are applied in a manner that effectively replaces a person’s previous perception of themselves and their reality with one that better suits Hubbard’s intentions, and they will often lead to psychosis or worse. In the years ahead, it will be revealed through a secret internal document (referred to as OT VIII: The Confidential Student Briefing Document) that, in Hubbard’s own words, Scientology is nothing less than Satanism, and that L. Ron Hubbard considers himself to be the Antichrist. (See online book, L. Ron Hubbard: Messiah or Madman?, by Corydon Bent) 1950 – The Urantia Foundation is established in Chicago, and consists of high-ranking members of the Seventh Day Adventist sect. The foundation is centered around the channeled texts known as the Urantia Papers. Its board of directors take a pledge of secrecy not to reveal the human author or its means of transmission. Dr. William S. Sadler, a Seventh Day Adventist minister, will ultimately be responsible for publishing these texts. They will be published as The Urantia Book in 1955. 1950 – At the end of this year, Andrija Puharich moves to a 65-acre estate at Warrenton in Glen Cove, Maine, which has been purchased for his use with $35,000 provided by a Walter Cabot Paine of Boston. The house has 45 rooms and about a dozen bathrooms. Twelve co-workers move into the house with Puharich and his family, where they will live in a commune-type setting. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1951 (January 5) – Wilhelm Reich conducts his Oranur Experiment and discovers a new type of energy that he calls ‘deadly orgone’ (DOR), which is caused by the effect of nuclear radiation on orgone energy. DOR is black, lusterless, toxic, carries a high charge, and is oxygen and water-hungry. 1951 (March 27) – Andrija Puharich meets with Eileen Garrett and John Hammond Jr. in Gloucester to conduct experiments to find out whether or not telepathy exists. These experiments will continue for three months, and will incorporate a Faraday cage built by Hammond. The experiments are designed to test the hypothesis that telepathy is based on the transmission of electromagnetic waves between humans. Puharich believes that he should be able to block telepathy with appropriate shielding. Instead, he will find that placing a person in the cage will increase their psychic ability significantly. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1951 – William Thetford begins working on Project BLUEBIRD, remaining until 1953.

1951 (August) – Project BLUEBIRD is renamed Project ARTICHOKE, and is involved in searching for a ‘truth drug’ and studying interrogation techniques. ARTICHOKE is interested in the use of ‘electro-psycho-therapeutic’ techniques, as well as the creation of amnesia, hypnotic couriers, and ‘Manchurian Candidates’. The subjects of this project can also function as hypnotically controlled cameras, where they can enter a room or building, memorize materials quickly, leave the building, and be amnesic for the entire episode. The memorized material can then be retrieved by a handler using a previously implanted code or signal, without the amnesia being disturbed. 1951 (September 4) – The first national live television broadcast in the U.S. takes place, when President Harry Truman's speech at the Japanese Peace Treaty Conference in San Francisco, California is transmitted over AT&T's transcontinental cable and microwave radio relay system to broadcast stations in local markets. 1951 - The Psychological Strategy Board is signed into existence by Harry Truman. It is tasked with coordinating psychological operations at home and abroad. 1951 - Captain Alfred M. Hubbard, a high-ranking officer in the OSS during World War II, takes his first LSD trip, and immediately becomes a proponent of its transcendental effects. Through his extensive connections in business and government and at his personal expense, Hubbard is able to acquire 6,000 bottles of the compound, which he will begin to dispense freely to any friends and researchers who want it. Since the CIA has been tightly controlling the supply lines for the drug, they obviously know that Hubbard had this large supply and may have even provided it to him. 1951 – Project GRUDGE is renamed Project BLUEBOOK. Its mandate is to record and debunk UFO sightings. 1951 – Project CHATTER is initiated by the US Navy, with the goal of seeking a fast-acting ‘truth drug’. This project will be abandoned by the next year. 1951 – Andrija Puharich receives a grant for almost $100,000 – either from an undisclosed wealthy friend or from the US military – to build a solid sheet metal Faraday cage for use in psychic experiments. He will use the cage to continue testing the telepathic abilities of Eileen Garrett. The experiments will be so successful that they will attract the interest of the US Department of the Army. An American, Colonel Jack Stanley, and a French General, J.C. Sauzey will visit the Round Table to express the interest of their respective governments. As a result of this visit, Andrija will be invited to present his new data on telepathy at a meeting sponsored by the office of the Chief, Psychological Warfare, US Army at the Pentagon, Washington DC, on November 24, 1952. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans)

1952 (January 7) – A CIA document written on this date states: “If, as now appears to us as established beyond question, there is in some persons a certain amount of capacity for extrasensory perception (ESP), this fact, and consequent developments leading from it, should have significance for professional intelligence service … It now appears that we are ready to consider practical application as a research problem in itself […] The two special projects of investigation that ought to be pushed in the interest of the project under discussion are, first, the search for and development of exceptionally gifted individuals who can approximate perfect success in ESP test performances, and, second, in the statistical concentration of scattered ESP performance, so as to enable an ultimately perfect reliability and application.” (See online file, The Stargate Conundrum) 1952 – CIA Director Walter B. Smith writes to Raymond Allen, director of the Psychological Strategy Board: "I am today transmitting to the National Security Council a proposal in which it is concluded that the problems associated with unidentified flying objects appear to have implications for psychological warfare as well as for intelligence and operations. I suggest that we discuss at an early board meeting the possible offensive and defensive utilization of these phenomena for psychological warfare purposes." 1952 – Project CASTIGATE is initiated by the CIA and the US Navy, working together to test a ‘secret potion’. This project is conducted in Germany. 1952 – Project MKNAOMI is started, with the intent to develop biological weapons. 1952 – By this year, T. Townsend Brown is living back in California, and has set up the Townsend Brown Foundation in Los Angeles. He receives an unannounced visit by Major General Victor E. Bertrandias of the USAF, accompanied by a man named Lehr. Bertrandias is amazed when he witnesses a demonstration of two model flying discs. What he witnesses are the successful results of Brown’s Project Winterhaven, which is working towards drawing up blueprints for a manned electrogravitic craft capable of Mach 3 or better. In a report printed in Electrogravitics Systems, found years later in the technical library at Wright-Patterson AFB, Project Winterhaven is referred to extensively. Brown states in the report that there is a good possibility that the speed of his disc craft could eventually approach that of light, and that the motor would produce no heat, sound, or vibration. Soon after Bertrandias’ visit, after reviewing a report on Brown’s work put together by the Office of Naval Research (ONR) titled An Investigation Relative to the Townsend Brown Foundation, the Air Force Office of Special Investigations (AFOSI) decides Brown’s work would be a waste of time,

effort, and money to pursue. They downgrade it from ‘confidential’ to ‘unclassified’. This report is very possibly a disinformation ploy by the ONR to dissuade the Air Force and others from looking into Brown’s work. It is also possible that Brown’s work was rejected because the military already knew the principles behind it and were actively developing technologies based on them. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1952 – L. Ron Hubbard introduces the E-meter as part of Scientology. It is a simple galvanometer, which acts like a lie detector by measuring skin conductivity. Hubbard will incorporate the E-meter very effectively into his Scientology program to psychoanalyze members and find their weak spots in order to control them. By asking a person questions while they hold two metal rods attached to the E-meter, the measured increase in skin conductivity while being asked questions indicates areas where there is excitement or emotional stress. From his early experiments with the E-meter, Hubbard develops his concept of ‘implants’, which he defines as “a painful and forceful means of overwhelming a being with artificial purposes or false concepts in a malicious attempt to control and suppress him.” He describes various types of these implants, including ones that attach themselves between incarnations on the physical plane. (See book, Bare-Faced Messiah, by Russell Miller) 1952 –The ‘Special Projects Group’ at Avro Canada, headed by a man named John Frost, begins work on a number of highly classified projects involved in developing ‘flying saucer’ technologies. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1952 – UFO writer Albert K. Bender, head of the International Flying Saucer Bureau in Bridgeport, Connecticut, is visited by ‘Men in Black’, who warn him to remain silent about his knowledge of UFOs. Soon after, he becomes physically ill. He complies with the warning and closes down his organization, and remains silent until 1963, when he publishes his story as Flying Saucers and the Three Men. 1952 – Eileen Caddy is introduced to her future husband Peter Caddy and his current wife Sheena Govan. Through their shared interest in the occult and spirituality, they begin meeting as a small group. Peter Caddy is an RAF officer with ties to British Intelligence. 1952 (June) – Authorization to create the National Security Agency (NSA) is given in a letter written by President Harry S. Truman.

1952 (June 17) – Rocket scientist Jack Parsons is killed in a suspicious explosion at his home in Pasadena, California. Upon hearing about his death, Parsons’ mother commits suicide. 1952 (July 19) – The White House in Washington DC is buzzed by seven UFOs. 1952 (July 26) – The White House in Washington DC is buzzed by UFOs a second time. 1952 (October 24) – The National Security Agency (NSA) is established by Executive Order and without any charter. It is answerable only to the President, has no government oversight to check on its activities, and is exempt from all laws that do not specifically name this agency within their wording. Much of the work of the NSA is to monitor global communications and perform cryptanalysis, as well as to secure sensitive government computer systems. It is also involved in the design of specialized communications hardware and software, and the production of dedicated semiconductors, with a chip fabrication plant at Ft. Meade. This means that it has the ability to develop computer chips that can look identical to an ordinary computer chip, but have hidden functions built in. 1952 (November 24) – Andrija Puharich presents a paper to a secret Pentagon gathering, titled, An Evaluation of the Possible Uses of ESP in Psychological Warfare. He is reportedly redrafted into the military the very next day. 1952 (December 31) – Dr. D. G. Vinod, a psychic medium who Andrija Puharich is working with, begins receiving channeled communications from entities who introduce themselves as ‘The Nine Principles and Forces’. When Vinod wakes from his trance after about ninety minutes of channeling, he will have no recollection or knowledge of what had been said. As Puharich works with Vinod over the next month, he will come to believe that he is dealing with extraterrestrial intelligences from the future. The communications will be terminated at the end of January 1953, when Puharich’s group splits up and Vinod returns to his home in India. It will be twenty-two years before the communications with ‘The Nine’ are resumed. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1952 – By the end of this year, the USAF has 1,500 UFO reports on file. 1953 (January) – The Robertson Panel, headed by Dr. Howard Percy Robertson, director of the Pentagon's Weapons Systems Evaluations Group, is set up by the US government with the stated purpose of investigating the

growing UFO phenomenon. The real purpose, however, will be to debunk UFO reports. This panel will state: “The debunking aim would result in reduction of public interest in flying saucers, which today evokes a strong psychological reaction. This education could be accomplished by mass media such as television, motion pictures, and popular articles...Such a program should tend to reduce the current gullibility of the public and consequently their susceptibility to clever hostile propaganda.” This secret panel consists of nuclear physicists, radar and rocketry experts, Air Force personnel, and an astronomer. Although, in the decades ahead, this report will be used to support the idea that the government is covering up alien visitation, it will originally be nothing more than a whitewash to recommend that the two main UFO groups in the US at the time, the Aerial Phenomena Research Organization (APRO) and Civilian Saucer Intelligence (CSI), should be monitored because of the influence they could have on public perceptions. The panel makes the recommendation that UFO reports should be actively discouraged through a covert mass-media debunking effort. The conclusions and recommendations of this panel, known as the Robertson Report, will not be fully released to the public until 1966. 1953 (January 7) – A declassified CIA document from this date describes the creation of multiple personality in 19-year old girls: “These subjects have clearly demonstrated that they can pass from a fully awake state to a deep H [hypnotic] controlled state … by telephone, by receiving written matter, or by the use of code, signal, or words and that control of those hypnotized can be passed from one individual to another without great difficulty. It has also been shown by experimentation with these girls that they can act as unwilling couriers for information purposes.” 1953 (January 26) – John Foster Dulles is appointed US Secretary of State under Eisenhower. On this same day, his brother Allen Dulles is appointed to the position of Director of the CIA. The Dulles brothers are cousins of John D. Rockefeller. As lawyers, they had both acted in the interests of the Rockefellers prior to and during World War II when the Rockefellers were trading with the enemy, supplying funding to the Nazis. Allen Dulles had been the Swiss Director of the U.S. Office of Strategic Services (OSS) during the war. 1953 (February 26) – Andrija Puharich is recalled into military service, being sworn in as a captain in the Medical Corps at the Army Chemical Center, Edgewood, Maryland. This is the headquarters for research into chemical, radiological and bacteriological warfare. He will serve there until April 1955, living with his family at the army base. He is reportedly working directly under MKULTRA’s Dr. Sidney Gottlieb. He will later claim that he was never involved in anything related to his psychic research during his service, and will state that he suspected that the government was only interested in

interfering with his psychic research in order to slow him down. He will instead be involved in doing hearing research with a dentist named Joseph Lawrence. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1953 (April 13) – The official start of MKULTRA mind-control programs, as ordered by CIA Director Richard Helms. This is an umbrella project consisting of 149 sub-projects involving over 80 universities, research foundations, and similar institutions, and 185 private researchers. They are tasked with developing diversified methods of mind-control. These methods involve drugs, chemicals, radiation (electromagnetic and nuclear), electroshock, electronic devices, hypnosis, psychology, sociology, psychiatry, etc. Experimental subjects include volunteer students, hospital patients, and inmates, but soon expand to include anyone at all that the CIA can get their hands on (involuntary subjects), including children. Dr. Sidney Gottlieb is the director. This program starts just prior to the first reported ‘alien’ abductions. One of the main goals of these MKULTRA projects is to create mind-controlled espionage agents (both male and female, young children and adults) who are trained how to sexually please men and how to coerce them to talk about themselves, with the ultimate purpose of using these agents and their skills to elicit information from high government and agency officials and heads of academic institutions and foundations, and to covertly film them in compromising sexual acts for blackmail purposes. It is very probable that this blackmail is used to recruit them into the services of the CIA, and perhaps even using mind-control techniques on them to keep them loyal and more controllable. This blackmail techniques are also used on the MKULTRA people themselves, in order to ascertain their commitment to the program and its agenda. This will also open the door to involvement in satanic activities that will come to be more apparent among people connected to these projects in the years ahead. Of course, many of them are already involved in Satanism, coming from wealthy bloodlines that have been secretly involved for many generations. In an interview by Jon Rappaport, he explains that young children are preferred in mind-control experiments because their minds are less developed and are easier for creating a ‘blank slate’ before programming them to be however the controllers might want. Children are brought into the USA from Mexico and South America, and these particular children are considered expendable, and the more brute-force methods are used on them and what works is refined, and then the next batch of children undergo the refined techniques. The best and brightest minds are sought out for these experiments, and they program these kids so that they will later emerge in prominent positions in society, and the mind-controllers will then have long term control of society by controlling these people in power positions. (See online file, The CIA and Mind-Control For Kids, by Kris Millegan)

1953 – Margaret Singer begins working as a psychologist at the Walter Reed Army Institute of Research in Washington, DC, where she specializes in studying brainwashing techniques that were used on the returned prisoners from the Korean War. She will be deeply involved in MKULTRA programs, and this will result in her becoming a leading authority on cults in the years ahead. By the 1960s, she will be called on repeatedly to handle high-profile cases that involve cults and the deprogramming of their members, including Patty Hearst, Charles Manson and his followers, and early members of Heaven’s Gate. 1953 – George Adamski, supposed UFO contactee of ‘benevolent space brothers’, publishes his bestselling book (with co-author Desmond Leslie), Flying Saucers Have Landed, in which he describes his supposed adventures with space beings in the California desert. Adamski goes on to give lectures around the world about the subject of UFOs and aliens. Years later it will be discovered that Adamski was acting for the CIA as part of an intelligence operation, and had been traveling on a CIA-furnished passport. (See file, The Pied Pipers of the CIA, by Philip Coppens) 1953 – John Frost, who heads the ‘Special Projects Group’ at Avro Canada, goes to West Germany, and, accompanied by British and Canadian intelligence officials, meets with a German aviation engineer who claims to have worked on disc-shaped craft during the war. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1953 - The US government signs the Nuremberg Code and pledges with the international community of nations to respect basic human rights and to prohibit experimentation on captive populations without full and free consent. 1953 – At thirteen years old, Jack Sarfatti receives a series of mysterious phone calls from a metallic voice that claims to be a computer on a UFO. These calls leave him in a semi-hypnotic state and he has very little memory of what they were about. The voice tells him that he and a number of others have been selected to be involved in important work, and that they will all meet in twenty years time. About this same time, he is enrolled in a secret government program for gifted children. (See online book, Destiny Matrix, by Jack Sarfatti) 1953 – John C. Lilly reports that Dr. Antoine Ramond of Paris is able to insert electronic implants into a person without the need for surgery. 1953 – Aldous Huxley tries mescaline for the first time, and goes on to write The Doors of Perception, in which he describes his experience in minute

detail. The book will promote the consciousness-expanding qualities of hallucinogenic drugs. 1953 – A leak through the Toronto Star reveals that Avro Canada is developing a disc-shaped aircraft that can take off and land vertically and reaches speeds of 1,500 mph. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1953 – After having transferred to the U.S. Air Force Medical Corps, Louis Jolyin West is appointed Chief of Psychiatry Service at Lackland Air Force Base, San Antonio, Texas. In this position he studies US pilots and veterans after they have experienced torture and brainwashing. He will become the director the Cult Awareness Network, which is funded by the CIA to study the psychobiology of dissociation. 1953 – While at a private sanctuary in Glastonbury with Peter Caddy, Eileen Caddy begins to hear a voice that claims to be God. She will describe the voice as being just at the audible/sub-audible threshold. It instructs her to take on Sheena Govan as her spiritual teacher. Sheena soon moves away to the Isle of Mull in Scotland after divorcing Peter Caddy. (See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1953 – Discovery of the DNA double helix structure. 1953 – The Soviets begin experimenting on the biological effects of microwaves. 1953 (December 18) – L. Ron Hubbard incorporates the Church of Scientology. 1954 – Los Angeles psychiatrist Dr. Oscar Janiger begins experimenting with LSD-25. Over an eight-year period he will give it to more than 950 men and women, ranging in age from 18 to 81 and coming from all walks of life. 1954 – Dr. Timothy Leary becomes the director of clinical psychology at the Kaiser Foundation Hospital in Oakland, California, where he will work until 1959. While here, he will create a personality test that will later be used for profiling prison inmates and prospective CIA employees. Eight government grants will be paid to Leary between 1953 and 1958, most of them paid through the National Institute of Mental Health, later known to have ‘fronted’ for the CIA in the MKULTRA program. 1954 – In the summer of this year, Andrija Puharich receives a transcript from a close friend of some channeled utterances that the psychic Harry Stone had made while in a trance state. Some of it is in English and some in

Egyptian. He had spoken as though he was a ‘personality’ who had lived some 5000 years ago. What fascinates Andrija is the trance description Stone had given of a plant that could separate the consciousness from the physical body, and that such a separated consciousness could operate independently of the limitations of the body. Drawings of the plant made by Stone while in trance look like mushrooms, and the description he has given is that of the toxic fly agaric, or amanita muscaria. This leads Puharich to begin a search for amanita muscaria. By August of 1955 he will have acquired a large supply with which to begin testing its psychic effects on humans. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1955 (April) – Andrija Puharich ends his service at the Army Chemical Center in Edgewood, Maryland, and returns to Glen Cove, Maine. His Round Table Foundation, which had ceased operating during his absence, is slowly brought back to life with financial backing from an unnamed friend. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1955 (August) – Having gathered a large supply of amanita muscaria, Andrija Puharich begins testing its psychic effects on humans. He uses the psychic Harry Stone as his main test subject. He will later use the psychic Peter Hurkos as a test subject. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1955 (October 12) – The Urantia Book is published. The channeller of this material and the means of transmission are held under an oath of secrecy. It will eventually be revealed as late as 1991 that the medium is Wilfred Custer Kellogg. Wilfred Custer Kellogg is related to the Kellogg dynasty, and also happens to be Dr. William Sadler's brother-in-law. (See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1955 – The aviation trade publication Interavia reports that T. Townsend Brown has made substantial progress in antigravity or electrogravitic propulsion research. Trials are described that involve three-foot discs under a charge of 150 kV reaching speeds of several hundred mph. They are impressive enough to be highly classified. In the same year, George S. Trimble, a leading aerospace engineer working at the Glenn L. Martin Aircraft Company begins heading the Advanced Programs department and is Vice President of its ‘G-Project’, a small group involved in antigravity research based on Brown’s work. This research effort also includes several other aircraft manufacturers, including Bell Aircraft, Lear, General Electric, and Sperry-Rand. Trimble indicates in a statement

during this time that a breakthrough in antigravity could be reached in about five years. Trimble is also part of a Martin Company spin-off called the Research Institute for Advanced Studies (RIAS), which includes “world-class contributors to mathematics, physics, biology and materials science.” The focus of RIAS is on NASA’s goal of putting a man on the moon. Within two years, all talk in the aerospace industry regarding antigravity research will suddenly become nonexistent. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1955 – William Thetford starts working at the CIA-funded Society for the Study of Human Ecology at Cornell University Medical College. 1955 – Morris K. Jessup publishes The Case for the UFOs, in which he offers his opinions about UFOs and their source of motive power. He goes on to give lectures in which he makes appeals to the public to pressure the government to begin research in this area. His book will play a key role in the breaking of the story of the alleged Philadelphia Experiment. This starts soon after the book’s publication when Jessup receives a number of letters from a man named Carlos Allende, who claims to have been a first-hand witness to the experiment in 1943. Allende implores Jessup not to make appeals for government research into UFOs, and describes the bizarre results of the 1943 experiment. As early as July or August of 1955, several months before Jessup receives the first of these letters from Allende, a copy of his book is received in the mail by an officer of the Office of Naval Research (ONR) in Washington. Its pages are filled with cryptic notes that refer to UFOs and their propulsion systems as they relate to the discussion within Jessup’s book about various strange phenomena. The ONR contacts Jessup and shows him the annotations, asking if he knows who wrote them. Jessup recognizes them as Allende’s, The annotations are apparently of such interest to them that the ONR acquires Allende’s letters from Jessup and makes a limited mimeographed edition of the annotated book with copies of the letters included. They claim that they are only interested because they are considering any information at all that might help them to understand the nature of gravity. However, it is just as possible that they are concerned about security leaks and don’t want to draw attention to the fact, or it may be that Allende is acting on their behalf to set Jessup up in order to give this story some seeming validity as part of a long-range disinformation campaign to cover up the true facts surrounding Project Rainbow. Jessup receives a copy of the annotated version of his book from the ONR, and spends some time going over it and adding his own further annotations.

Around this time, Allende also contacts the Arial Phenomenon Research Organization (APRO) and talks to someone there about the Philadelphia Experiment. They take a photograph of him during the interview, which they will send to William Moore during his investigation of the Philadelphia Experiment in the years ahead. APRO will eventually receive a letter from Allende, and this will lead to Moore tracking him down. 1955 – At about this time, L. Ron Hubbard writes ‘The Brainwashing Manual’. According to the manual's foreword, the text consists of a transcribed lecture that was given to students of psycho-politics at Leningrad University around 1950 by the dreaded Beria, head of Stalin's Secret Police. Thereafter it had supposedly been used as a textbook on how to wage psychological warfare on Western democracies. This psychological assault was to be followed by an eventual takeover of the West, which would be achieved by first taking over the psychiatric and mental health organizations. The manual reflects the mind-control techniques used within the Church of Scientology and Hubbard’s ultimate goal of world domination. (See file, Coercive Persuasion and Scientology, by Lawrence Wollersheim). 1956 – Elated by his success in developing and testing prototypes of his electrogravitic flying discs, T. Townsend Brown approaches Pentagon officials, but they aren’t interested. 1956 (February) – A report is drafted, titled Electrogravitics Systems – An Examination of Electrostatic Motion, Dynamic Counterbary and Barycentric Control, containing details of an apparent Mach 3 antigravity vehicle belonging to the US Air Force. The report is prepared by a British group called the ‘Gravity Research Group, Special Weapons Study Unit’, a subdivision of Aviation Study Unit (International) Limited. This report will be discovered in the technical library at Wright-Patterson AFB in 1985. The report names T. Townsend Brown and his Winterhaven Project. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1956 (April 7) – First alleged alien encounter by contactee Elizabeth Klarer in South Africa. She claimed to have traveled to the alien’s home planet and had sexual intercourse with one, producing a baby that she left behind on their planet. 1956 – T. Townsend Brown helps to found the National Investigations Committee on Aerial Phenomena (NICAP) a UFO study group consisting of professional scientists, military men, engineers and civilians. Admiral Roscoe H. Hillenkoetter, a former Director of the CIA, will also join its board of directors. There will be at least three intelligence operatives among its leaders: Bernard Corvalho, Nicholas de Rochefort, and Colonel Joseph Ryan. These men are all trained practitioners of the modern techniques of

psychological warfare. NICAP will be instrumental in both monitoring and manipulating the beliefs of the public regarding the UFO phenomenon. 1956 – Eileen Caddy, now married to Peter Caddy, moves to the Scottish Island of Mull, where she undergoes classical brainwashing techniques. Although she hadn’t previously accepted that the voice she is hearing is actually God as it claims, she now begins to believe that it is. She is encouraged to do so by Peter Caddy. Eileen Caddy will become the primary channeler at the Findhorn Foundation in Scotland in the years ahead, and the voice will dictate 30,000 pages of material to her, becoming the basis for the foundation. (See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1956 – In order to attempt to suppress the work of Wilhelm Reich, the Pure Food and Drug Administration orders all books containing the term ‘orgone’ to be burned. 1956 – The FBI initiates their COINTELPRO program. Its purpose, as described by FBI Director J. Edgar Hoover, is “to expose, disrupt, misdirect, discredit, or otherwise neutralize activities” of those individuals and organizations whose ideas or goals he opposed. Tactics include: falsely labeling individuals as informants; infiltrating groups with persons instructed to disrupt the group; sending anonymous or forged letters designed to promote strife between groups; initiating politically motivated IRS investigations; carrying out burglaries of offices and unlawful wiretaps; and disseminating to other government agencies and to the media unlawfully obtained derogatory information on individuals and groups." 1957 – Antigravity research becomes a classified subject. 1957 – Alleged alien contact by Cynthia Appleton in Great Britain. She claims to have had intercourse with an alien and had its baby. 1957 – The Antonio Villas-Boas ‘alien’ abduction in South America. He claims to have had intercourse with a female alien. (See file, Doctoring Villas Boas and Aliens on Ice, by Philip Coppens) 1957 (August) – During the months that he is working with Andrija Puharich in psychic experiments using amanita muscaria, Peter Hurkos begins having UFO experiences. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1957 – Claudia Mullen becomes a victim of MKULTRA, where she is turned into a mind-controlled espionage agent and used for blackmailing high

government officials and heads of academic institutions and foundations. She will name John Gittinger, Sydney Gottlieb, Ewen Cameron, and Robert Heath as four of the doctors who worked on her. 1957 – The first publicized test of subliminal messages inserted into a visual presentation. James Vicary, a market researcher, inserts the words "Eat Popcorn" and "Drink Coca-Cola" into a movie shown at a theatre in order to study the phenomena. 1957 – Wilhelm Reich dies while being held at Lewisburg Federal Penitentiary for a technical violation of an injunction that was initiated by the Pure Food and Drug Administration regarding his inventions. 1957 – Victor Schauberger, 72 years old and getting on in health, is contacted by two unnamed aircraft companies and made offers for the rights to his propulsion technology. One of the companies – probably Avro Canada – offers him $3.5 million. Schauberger turns them both down. At about this same time, he is visited at his home in Austria by a man named Karl Gerchsheimer, who is acting as an intermediary for a wealthy US financier named Robert Donner. Schauberger is offered a chance to develop and implement his technology, and is persuaded to go to the USA and start working on the project. He agrees, and in the process of drawing up the initial paperwork, Schauberger makes the error of signing away the rights to all of his work. He returns to Austria and dies a few days later. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1958 – The USAF commissions a special classified study group to appraise a recently published book, titled German Secret Weapons of World War II, written by a Major Rudolf Lusar, the commanding officer of a German Army technical unit. The book, which details names, dates, and places, reveals that the Germans had been far ahead of the British and Americans in jet and rocket engines, infrared and thermal imaging, missile guidance systems, and proximity fuses. The Germans also had certain ‘wonder weapons’ that involved such things as sound waves, air vortices, compressed air jets, and intensely focused light beams. But the most interesting part of the book is a section on flying discs, where Lusar clearly states that they are of German origin, and had been under development since 1941. The scientists involved in their development were three Germans named Rudolf Schriever, Klaus Habermohl, and Richard Miethe, and an Italian named Giuseppe Belluzzo. Lusar states that at the end of the war, many of the scientists working on a disc-shaped craft designed by Miethe were captured by the Russians and sent to Siberia where their work was successfully continued. Lusar also describes another successfully operational craft design that achieved 12,400 meters in three minutes and reached a speed of 2,000 km/h. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook)

1958 – Project ORION is started by either USAF or CIA. This project is involved in studying the use of drugs, hypnosis, electronic brain invasion with radar, microwaves, and extremely low frequencies of sound for mind-control applications. 1958 – The ‘neurophone’ is developed by 14-year-old Patrick Flanagan. This devise converts sound into electrical signals that can then be heard inside a person’s head when electrodes conducting the signals are placed against their skin. (US patents #3,393,279 and #3,647,970) 1958 – Helen Schucman, who in the years ahead will begin hearing a voice in her head that claims to be Jesus, goes to work for Dr. William Thetford in the Psychology Department at Columbia University's College of Physicians and Surgeons as a clinical and research psychologist. In 1921, at the age of 12, she had had a spiritual experience while visiting Lourdes, France. Her mother has dabbled in Theosophy and Christian Science. Thetford’s parents were also involved with Christian Science while he was growing up. 1958 – The young mathematics prodigy Ted Kaczynski enrolls at Harvard University at age 16. During his time there (he will graduate in 1962), he volunteers to be one of twenty-two subjects used for a psychological experiment being conducted by a Dr. Henry A. Murray, who heads the Harvard Psychological Clinic. Murray had worked for the OSS as their chief psychologist during World War II, at which time he was developing methods of interrogation. Murray also founded the Boston Psychoanalytic Society. Like John Gittinger, his work on personality psychology will advance much of the encoding language that the CIA uses in psychological assessments. The Harvard study that Kaczynski becomes involved in is called ‘Multiform Assessments of Personality Development Among Gifted College Men’, and is being funded by the Pentagon, the CIA, and the Rockefeller Foundation, Kaczynski is a participant from 1959 to 1962. The basic premise of the research is to study how bright college students will react to aggressive and highly stressful attacks on their beliefs and values, but this is not told to the volunteers prior to taking part. Each prospective volunteer is simply asked whether they would be willing to contribute to the solution of certain psychological problems as part of an on-going program of research in the development of personality, by serving as a subject in a series of experiments or taking a number of tests through the academic year. As a test subject, Kaczynski finds himself being put through an intentionally brutalizing psychological experiment, involving extremely stressful, personal, and prolonged psychological attacks. During the experiment, subjects are connected to electrodes that monitor their physiological reactions while facing bright lights and a two-way mirror in an interrogation-like setting. Each subject is asked to write an essay detailing their personal beliefs and aspirations, as well as take a battery of psychological tests that allow the researchers to develop a psychological portrait of their personality in all its dimensions. After this, they are individually belittled, based in part on the disclosures they had made. This is filmed, and the subject’s expressions of

rage are played back to them several times during the study. Kaczynski's records from this period suggest that he was emotionally stable when the study begins. Years later, after he is arrested for the Unabomber mailbombing campaign, Kaczynski's lawyers will want to seek an insanity plea, attributing some of Kaczynski’s apparent emotional instability and dislike of mind control to his participation in this study. Kaczynski will adamantly protest such a plea. When the Unabomber goes on his mail-bombing campaign after the experiments, some of the targets will be behavioral psychologists. (See online file, Ted Kaczynski and CIA Mind Control Experiments, by David Kaczynski) 1958 – Not long after meeting with officers of the ONR, at the end of October, Morris K. Jessup visits his friend, Ivan T. Sanderson and takes him into his confidence, handing him his re-annotated copy of his book, The Case for the UFOs, and asks that he read it and then put it somewhere for safekeeping in case anything should happen to Jessup. He tells Sanderson that he has been experiencing a series of strange ‘coincidences’ that he doesn’t want to discuss, since anyone would think he was crazy for claiming what was happening to him. After this meeting, Jessup will suffer a serious car accident followed by a number of rejections from his publishers, sending him on a downhill course that will end in his tragic death in 1959. His death will be officially declared a suicide, but there will be evidence suggesting that he had been murdered. Just before his ‘suicide’, Jessup also contacts his close friend Dr. J. Manson Valentine and tells him that he has prepared a rough draft paper on the Philadelphia Experiment and wants to discuss it with him. They make arrangements to meet at Valentine’s home, but Jessup never arrives. He is found dead in his car soon after, but there are no papers found with him. 1959 – Playing different frequencies in each ear to cause binaural beats as a brainwave entrainment technique (first discovered by H. W. Dove in 1839) gains both scientific validation and widespread recognition. 1959 – MKULTRA subproject 94, which is running at this time, is involved with electronic stimulation of the brain (ESB) using implants. 1959 – Around this time, Dr. Timothy Leary becomes a lecturer at Harvard University, where he will establish a research project to study psilocybin, which is approved by Dr. Henry A. Murray, the chairman of the Department of Social Relations at Harvard. Murray had been the chief psychologist within the OSS during World War II, and is currently conducting some rather extreme psychological experiments under the auspices of MKULTRA, with Ted Kaczynski as one of his experimental subjects.

1959 (April) – The US Department of Defense reveals during hearings before Congress that it is working with Avro Canada to develop a disc-shaped aircraft, later to be known as the ‘Avrocar’. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1959 – Andrija Puharich publishes The Sacred Mushroom, relating his experiences in searching for hallucinogenic mushrooms in Central America. 1959 (December) – The first untethered test flight of the ‘Avrocar’, a jetpowered, disc-shaped aircraft being developed by Avro Canada. The test is barely successful. The project will continue for two more years before being abandoned. 1960 – Pinup model Candy Jones is recruited by the CIA as an espionage agent and turned into a hypnotized ‘Manchurian Candidate’. Her recruitment takes place in Oakland, California. It will be revealed by investigators after the publication of her story in later years that MKULTRA expert hypnotist Dr. William Jennings Bryan and Dr. William S. Kroger had been involved with Jones’ recruitment, but her main hypnotist/programmer is a man named Gilbert Jensen. Soon after this revelation is made in 1977, Bryan will turn up dead in a Las Vegas hotel room. 1960 – With a $300,000 investment from three unnamed New York businessmen, Andrija Puharich starts a company called the Intelectron Corporation, which is involved in developing electronic devices to stimulate hearing in the deaf. He is given research contracts by various arms of the US government, including the CIA, FBI, Air Force, and NASA. The Air Force is interested in the electrical stimulation of hearing (ESH), while NASA is more interested in the psychic research he had previously conducted using a Faraday cage and what is called ‘bio-information-transfer’. Due to Congressional pressure over the issue of dabbling in the paranormal, NASA will be forced to cancel its contracts. Soon after this, Puharich will be approached by people from Bell Labs. Bell is a heavy contractor for secret government projects. Supposedly, nothing comes of this and the contract is cancelled. 1960 – The invention of the laser. 1960 – At this point in time, fewer than two serial killers are reported each year in the USA. 1961 – Allen Frey, a biophysicist working for the Defense Intelligence Agency, reports using pulsed microwaves to cause intracerebral sounds. 1961 (August 8) – Henry (Andrija) Puharich and Joseph Lawrence receive a patent (US Patent #2,995,633) described as a means for converting audible signals to electrical signals and conveying them to viable nerves of the facial

system. These two men will be favorably named within the channeled communications published by Carla Rueckert, Don Elkins, and Jim McCarty in 1984 as the Ra Material or The Law of One. 1961 (September) – Andrija Puharich moves to Ossining, New York. 1961 (September 19) – The Betty and Barney Hill alien abduction. This is the first abduction case to be reported in the US. It will be publicized in the book, The Interrupted Journey, in 1966. The incident begins when the Hills are driving in an isolated part of the country at about 10:30 pm when Betty sees a bright light in the sky moving erratically and getting larger. After both of them look more closely at the object through binoculars and see that it isn’t a normal craft, they get in the car and drive on. As they drive, they watch the object as it seems to follow them, coming in and out of view in the mountainous area. It suddenly swoops down and forces them to stop the car in the middle of the highway. As it hovers silently less than 100 feet above the ground, Barney gets out of the car. He witnesses a number of humanoid figures looking out of a large window in the craft, and then one of them communicates to him and tells him to stay where he is and watch. According to Barney’s later recollections, the creatures are wearing glossy black uniforms and caps. Fearing that they are going to be captured, Barney jumps back in the car and they speed off. Soon after, they begin to hear a rhythmic beeping or buzzing sound. The car vibrates and a tingling sensation passes through them. Betty touches the metal on the passenger door expecting to feel an electric shock, but only feels the vibration. At this point in time they experience the onset of an altered state of consciousness that leaves their minds dulled. A second series of beeping or buzzing sounds eventually returns the couple to full consciousness. In the meantime, they have traveled 35 miles down the highway. They recall that they had made an unexpected turn and then encountered a roadblock and an orb in the sky during this period of altered consciousness. The Hills arrive home at dawn, and both are feeling strange. They try to reconstruct the chronology of events from the night before, but from the point that they heard the buzzing sounds their memories are vague and fragmentary. Barney vaguely recalls having said “Oh no, not again!” when he first saw the craft in the sky. On September 21, Betty contacts Pease Air Force Base to report their UFO encounter, but withholds some of the details. On September 22, Major Paul W. Henderson telephones back for a more detailed interview. Henderson will conclude that this was a misidentified sighting and forward his report to Project Bluebook. Days later, Betty will find a book on UFOs at the library, written by retired Marine Corps Major Donald E. Keyhoe, who is also the head of NICAP, a civilian UFO research group. She writes to him a few days later and relates all of the details of the incident, stating that she and Barney are considering using hypnosis to help them recall the event better. At about this same time, Betty begins to have a series of very vivid dreams for five nights

straight before they suddenly stop. On October 21, Walter N. Webb, an astronomer and NICAP member, is sent to meet with the Hills, and conducts a six-hour interview. Barney tells him that he has developed a mental block about certain parts of the event that he feels he doesn’t want to remember. After this interview, Betty begins to write down the details of her dreams. In one of them, she and Barney encounter a roadblock and then men surround their car. She loses consciousness but struggles to regain it. She realizes that she is being forced by two small men to walk in a forest at night, and she sees Barney walking behind her, although he seemed to be in a trance or sleepwalking. The men wore matching uniforms, with military-style caps. They appeared nearly human but had a grayish pallor and bluish lips. In the dreams, they are led up a ramp into a disc-shaped metallic craft, and then the two Hill’s are separated and taken to separate rooms. Betty and the men with her are then joined by another man, who she describes as having a calm and pleasant demeanor, but with a less than perfect command of the English language. She undergoes an examination, and hair, fingernail, and skin flake samples are taken. Next, she has a long needle inserted into her navel, which causes pain. A wave of the examiner’s hand dispels the pain. After the examination, she is handed a book with rows of strange symbols on it that she is told she can keep. She asks where these people are from, and is shown a large star map on the wall. Finally, in the dream, the Hill’s are escorted from the craft, but a disagreement starts about letting Betty have the book, and it is decided that it be taken back since she should forget the entire incident. The book is taken back and the Hill’s are returned to their car. On November 25, 1962, the Hills will again be interviewed at length by NICAP members. This time the interviewers are C.D. Jackson and Robert E. Hohman. The two interviewers point out that, although the drive should have only taken about four hours, the Hills did not arrive at home until seven hours after their departure. A period of missing time is realized, and so hypnosis is suggested to retrieve the memories of whatever events took place. Barney is apprehensive, but agrees. Barney is seeing a psychiatrist, and asks him about hypnosis. He is referred to a Dr. Benjamin Simon of Boston. They will undergo their first hypnosis session on January 4, 1964, and the sessions will continue until June 6, 1964. Each of the Hills will undergo separate sessions and have amnesia reinstated, so as not to allow them to influence each other’s memories. Barney will recall memories similar to those of Betty’s dreams, in which he is also given a medical examination. Betty will also recall events similar to her dreams, but with notable differences. The capture and release, onboard technology, appearance of their captors, and general sequence of events were all different to her dream memories. However, both of the Hill’s hypnotic recalls will be quite similar. It should be noted that the similarities of hypnotic recall could reflect a scripted hypnotic memory given to both, while the dreams reflect a more accurate truth. Betty will also be given a post-hypnotic suggestion to draw the star map that she had seen, which she does. In the end, Dr. Simon will conclude that Barney’s recollections were influenced by Betty’s remembered dream

experiences, but the Hills will both continue to believe that they had been abducted by the occupants of a UFO. They will not seek publicity outside of talking to friends and interested parties, but due to the extraordinary nature of their story, it will be picked up by a newspaper reporter and come to the attention of John G Fuller, who will write the book, The Interrupted Journey, depicting the Hill’s experiences. The book will show a drawing of the star map that Betty drew, and a picture of an alien with wraparound eyes that Barney drew. This will be the first public depiction of an alien with wraparound eyes. In 1968, a woman by the name of Marjorie Fish will create a threedimensional representation of Betty Hill’s star map drawing in an attempt to discover what star system it might represent. She will use the 1969 Gliese Star Catalogue as a reference, and after studying thousands of possible points of perspective, will find that the map matches most closely to the Zeta Reticuli star formation. (See files, The Pied Pipers of the CIA, by Philip Coppens; Betty and Barney Hill Abduction, at wikipedia) 1961 (November 22) - A declassified CIA document from this date: 22 November 1961 MEMORANDUM FOR THE RECORD SUBJECT: Project MKULTRA, Subproject No.94 The purpose of this subproject is to provide a continuation of activities in selected species of animals. Miniaturized stimulating electrode implants in specific brain center areas will be utilized. Initial biological work on techniques and brain locations essential to providing conditioning and control of animals has been completed. The feasibility of remote control of activities in several species of animals has been demonstrated. The present investigations are directed toward improvement of techniques and will provide a precise mapping of the useful brain centres in selected species. The ultimate objective of this research is to provide an understanding of the mechanisms involved in the directional control of animals and to provide a system suitable for (deleted word) application. The word that has been deleted is undoubtedly ‘human’. 1961 – Planning for the ARPANET communications network begins. 1962 – Helen Schucman and William Thetford co-author a paper entitled The Personality Theory of John Gittinger, which is published by the Human Ecology Fund, a CIA front. 1962 (September) – Helen Schucman co-authors a paper with David R. Saunders, which relates to Gittinger's PAS. Saunders is involved in secret personality profiling investigations for MKULTRA. At this time, they also write a paper with William Thetford on Gittinger’s PAS. One of Schucman’s

colleagues at Columbia University is a man named Herbert Spiegel, who is a recognized expert in hypnotism and brainwashing. Spiegel is teaching courses in hypnosis. He is involved with the famous case of ‘Sybil’, an MPD victim. Because ‘Sybil’ is easily hypnotizable, he uses her for demonstration purposes in his classes. (See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1962 – Andrija Puharich publishes Beyond Telepathy, in which he describes his research into psychic phenomena and offers his theories on the subject. 1962 – The first laser transmission hologram of 3-D objects. These transmission holograms produce images with clarity and realistic depth but require laser light to view the holographic image. 1962 – 90% of homes in the USA have television sets. 1963 – A 350 page manual is prepared by the CIA on the subject of RHICEDOM (Radio Hypnotic Intracerebral Control – Electronic Dissolution of Memory) technology, in which it asserts that this technology has been mastered. RHIC-EDOM can remotely induce a hypnotic state in a person, deliver suggestions, and erase all memories and awareness of both the programming and the actions to be performed. Through electromagnetic bombardment, the human brain can be overloaded so that it stops operating for as long as the bombardment continues. During that time, awareness is lost, memory is distorted, and time-orientation is destroyed. 1963 – After ten years of silence, Albert K. Bender publishes his story, Flying Saucers and the Three Men, which describes his visit by three ‘Men in Black’ (MIBs). 1963 (November 22) – John F. Kennedy is assassinated in Dallas, Texas. Lee Harvey Oswald is named as the killer. Oswald will immediately claim that he is a patsy, but before he can say any more he will be killed by Jack Ruby. Evidence will show that he couldn’t have shot the fatal bullet that killed Kennedy, and a major cover-up operation will allow the real perpetrators to forever remain a mystery. Before being killed by Ruby, Oswald will be visited by Dr. Louis Jolyin West, who is a leading mind-controller for MKULTRA. The main piece of evidence that could have led to the truth behind this assassination plot – the Zapruder film – will be suppressed by the FBI. When it is finally released years later, it will be discovered that it had been tampered with by changing the frame sequences so that the fatal shot will appear to have come from the opposite direction than it actually did. When they are put in their proper sequence, the film will show that the fatal shot came from the grassy knoll, where three hobos had been seen. These hobos

will be picked up for questioning, and a photograph of them will reveal – years too late – that one of them is Howard Hunt, a CIA operative. George Bush Sr. is in Dallas on this day, but he will later ‘forget’ this fact. In the month following the assassination, several FBI memoranda pertaining to Kennedy’s death are transmitted to a “Mr. George H. W. Bush, President of the Zapata Off-Shore Drilling Company, Houston, Texas” and to a “George Bush of the CIA”. Bush will claim not to be that George Bush. In the three years following the assassination, 18 material witnesses will perish. In the time leading up to 1979, when the last of the Kennedy investigations will end, over 100 witnesses will have died. Interestingly, most of these deaths will coincide with one of the four main investigations. 1963 – At about this time, Robert DeGrimston (real name Robert Moore) and his soon-to-be wife Mary Ann MacLean, have been receiving advanced training at the Church of Scientology in London, England. While they are in the process of applying a form of hypnotherapy used in Scientology to ‘cure’ psychoses that have purportedly been incurred in past lives, Mary Ann begins channeling an entity that begins giving Robert instructions in ancient mysteries. They decide to leave Scientology and create their own therapy group called Compulsions Analysis, which will soon after be renamed to The Process Church of the Final Judgment. They use the underlying methods applied in Scientology to create a cult that centers on Apocalyptic beliefs and uses sex and fear as control mechanisms. They will seek ties with various counterculture icons such as Mick Jagger, Marianne Faithful, Allen Ginsberg, Timothy Leary, and Abbie Hoffman. Mary Ann will prove to be the real force behind this cult, with Robert acting as a mere figurehead. She is very authoritarian and has a deep interest in Nazi ideologies. Their anarchistic philosophies will be adopted by future serial killer Charles Manson, who will become one of their earliest acolytes and set up his own offshoot. Within the larger organization of the Process Church, and at the cutting edge of the movement, smaller ‘families’ of Satanists called ‘Chingons’ will develop. To join a Chingon family, the Processan must enter a long period of satanic worship that reportedly includes blood rituals and sacrifice. Chingons formally convene twice each month (under a new moon and a full moon) under the supervision of a ‘Grand Chingon’ to summon the ancient pagan god who sponsors their particular family. The pagan god speaks to the group through one of the gathered cult members, who serve as a medium at the black mass. Robert DeGrimston is a former cavalry officer and the grandson of a British Vicar. MacLean, a one-time prostitute who was connected to the Profumo scandal, reportedly believes that she is the reincarnation of Nazi propagandist Josef Goebbels. (See online book, Programmed to Kill, by David McGowan)

1963 – The Brotherhood of Eternal Love is founded by Dr. Timothy Leary and Richard Alpert at Harvard University. This cult is very drug-oriented and will become involved in producing and supplying a variety of illicit drugs to America’s youth in the years ahead. Leary had been conducting a research project at the university to study psilocybin, which had been approved by Dr. Henry A. Murray, the same man who had conducted psychological mindcontrol experiments that Ted Kaczynski (the alleged Unabomber) had made the mistake of volunteering for when he was enrolled there as a teenager between 1958 and 1962. After being fired from his post at Harvard this same year as a result of experimenting with LSD, Leary will move onto the estate of a man named William Mellon Hitchcock (the grandson of the founder of Gulf Oil) in Millbrook, New York, where he will continue his experiments for several years before he (and his cult) moves to Laguna Beach, California, and begins spreading his message among American youth to “tune in, turn on, and drop out”. The Mellon family has extensive ties to the US intelligence community, as well as to Richard Helms, who will be Director of the CIA from 1966 to 1973. By 1969, the Brotherhood will become the largest supplier of hashish and LSD in the USA. One of Leary’s cult members will be Ronald Hadley Stark (who will join in 1969), later identified as a CIA operative who had access to unlimited public funds and numerous high-level contacts in business and government throughout the world. Stark will be instrumental in funding and setting up the Brotherhood’s international drug smuggling/manufacturing enterprises. He will also be closely associated with the founders of The Process Church, Robert and Mary Ann DeGrimston. 1964 (February) – The Beatles perform to American youth for the first time on the Ed Sullivan Show. 1964 – An increase in reports of alien beings associated with UFOs. Also, numerous reports begin to be made of MIBs who attempt to scare and threaten into silence UFO witnesses. A number of UFO researchers (mostly those later to be discovered to have ties to the CIA) are promoting the idea that these MIBs are aliens posing as humans. 1964 – MKULTRA purportedly closes down, but MKSEARCH takes over many of the more sensitive surviving projects. Studies are expanded to include telepathy, memory, and the effects of different electromagnetic frequencies on human subjects. 1964 – CIA Director Richard Helms states in a memo to the Warren Commission:

Cybernetics [or computer theory] can be used in the moulding of a child's character, the inculcation of knowledge and techniques, the amassing of experience, the establishment of social behaviour patterns all functions which can be summarised as control of the growth processes of the individual. The wording of this memo suggests that this had already been successfully achieved, and that children were used in the experiments. (See Mind Control, World Control, by Jim Keith) 1964 – Michael Aquino graduates from Santa Barbara High School in California. 1964 – In the summer of this year, beat novelist Ken Kesey (author of One Flew Over The Cuckoo’s Nest) launches a yearlong cross-country trip in a Day-Glo painted school bus filled with friends called the ‘Merry Pranksters’. They will distribute thousands of doses of LSD along the way. Kesey had been an MKULTRA test subject at Stanford University, along with beat poet Allen Ginsberg and Grateful Dead musician Bob Hunter. 1964 (August) – US warships under the command of US Navy Admiral George Stephen Morrison allegedly come under attack while patrolling Vietnam’s Tonkin Gulf. This false flag event, subsequently dubbed the Tonkin Gulf Incident, will result in the immediate passing by US Congress of the obviously pre-drafted Tonkin Gulf Resolution, which will, in turn, quickly lead to the Vietnam War. This same year, Admiral Morrison’s son Jim arrives in Los Angeles to attend UCLA. Jim, having no previous musical talent or experience, will become one of the biggest rock icons to emerge out of California’s Laurel Canyon area over the next few years. Jim happened to have attended the same Naval kindergarten at the same time as Adelaide (Gail) Sloatman, the wife of Laurel Canyon resident Frank Zappa, who by 1968 will allow his large Laurel Canyon home to be a hangout and crash pad for many up-and-coming musical talents. Zappa’s father is a chemical warfare specialist who worked at both Edgewood Arsenal and Edwards AFB, where Zappa had spent his youth. His wife Gail comes from a long line of career Naval officers, and her father spent his life working on classified nuclear weapons research for the US Navy (she will tell an interviewer that she had “heard voices all [her] life”). Jim Morrison also happened to attend the same Alexandria, Virginia high school as two other future Laurel Canyon luminaries – John Phillips and Cass Elliott of the Mamas and the Papas. Phillips is the son of a US Marine Corp Captain and spent his youth in a series of elite military prep schools in the Washington, DC area, culminating in an appointment to the prestigious US Naval Academy at Annapolis. David Crosby was another military brat who will emerge out of Laurel Canyon in the years ahead, his father having been a World War II military intelligence officer and whose family tree is deeply rooted in American politics all the way back to its founding fathers. Other rising stars

with military backgrounds who will frequent Laurel Canyon over the next few years include Gram Parsons, Joni Mitchell, Stephen Stills, Jane and Peter Fonda, etc. Jim Morrison will essentially arrive on the scene in Laurel Canyon as a fully developed rock star, complete with a backing band, stage persona, and an impressive collection of songs – enough, in fact, to fill the Doors’ first few albums – and all of this in spite of the fact that Morrison had no previous interest in music. Morrison’s music will have a peculiarly mystical and hypnotic quality to it, and he will name his band, the Doors, after Aldous Huxley’s book, The Doors of Perception, which details the psychedelic experience of mescaline. Jim’s music will reflect his very close familiarity with the mind-expanding qualities of hallucinogenic drugs. Hidden deep within Laurel Canyon is a top-secret military compound called Lookout Mountain Laboratory, which will not be publicly known about for decades. Built in 1941 as an air defense facility, it occupies two-and-a-half secluded acres of land surrounded by an electric fence. By 1947, the facility featured a fully operational and self-contained movie studio. With 100,000 square feet of floor space, it includes sound stages, screening rooms, film processing labs, editing facilities, an animation department, and climatecontrolled film vaults. It also has underground parking, a helicopter pad and a bomb shelter. Over its lifetime, the studio produced classified motion pictures for the military. Officially, the facility was run by the US Air Force and did nothing more than process footage of atomic and nuclear bomb tests. However, it was clearly equipped to do far more than just process film. There are indications that Lookout Mountain Laboratory had an advanced research and development department that was on the cutting edge of new film technologies. Such technological advances as 3-D effects were apparently first developed at the Laurel Canyon site. Hollywood luminaries like John Ford, Jimmy Stewart, Howard Hawks, Ronald Reagan, Bing Crosby, Walt Disney, and Marilyn Monroe were given clearance to work at the facility on undisclosed projects. The facility will still be in operation when Laurel Canyon becomes the originating point for a great deal of musical talent that will spring out of nowhere in the late 1960s. The facility will continue operating until at least 1969. (See online book, Inside The LC: The Strange but Mostly True Story of Laurel Canyon and the Birth of the Hippie Generation, by David McGowan) 1964 (August 27) – Fifteen-year-old Edmund Kemper, who grew up with an abusive mother, kills both of his grandparents with .22 caliber rounds to the back of their heads. He will be convicted on December 6 of this same year, being found insane and sent by the California Youth Authority to Atascadero State Hospital for the Criminally Insane, where he will remain for five years. While there, he will develop a friendship with the chief psychologist and become his assistant. He will be released in 1969, at which point he will engage in a series of gruesome murders in the Santa Cruz, California area.

Kemper’s father, Edmund Emil Kemper, Jr., is a Special Forces operative whose specialty, according to his son, is suicide missions. He had also spent two years working on the US atomic bomb testing program. (See online book, Programmed to Kill, by David McGowan) 1965 (February) – At about this time, Augustus Owsley Stanley III, while working as the sound engineer for the Grateful Dead, begins producing and freely dispensing large quantities of LSD in California. Over the next two years, he will produce and distribute over one million doses. Stanley had previously been in the US Air Force (1956 – ?), where he specialized in electronics and radar. 1965 – The Findhorn Foundation is established in Scotland, at a location adjacent to the Kingloss Royal Air Force Base. Eileen Caddy, who is hearing a voice that claims to be God, becomes their primary channeler. She is surrounded at Findhorn by people who have ties to British Intelligence. People visiting Findhorn will notice a vibrant field of energy that blankets the immediate area. (See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1965 (May 17) – Jose Delgado demonstrates his ‘stimoceiver’. With the press of a button on a remote control device, he stops a charging bull in its tracks by sending a radio signal to activate an electronic implant in the bull’s brain. 1965 (September) - Michael Hollingshead leaves Timothy Leary’s communal group in Millbrook, New York and flies back to his native London with 5,000 doses of LSD (purportedly acquired from a Czech lab in Prague), intending to enlighten his English brethren. He establishes the World Psychedelic Center on Kings Road, which attracts a number of big names, including Roman Polanski, Eric Clapton, Paul McCartney, Donovan, and the Rolling Stones. London had become a major psychedelic center by this time, and LSD was in demand. 1965 – The Pentagon starts Project PANDORA, which will focus its research on the behavioral and biological effects of low-level microwaves. 1965 – After a series of vivid dreams in which she communicates with a character that claims to be Jesus, Helen Schucman confides this to her employer, William Thetford. Soon after, she begins hearing the voice in her head while awake, and over the next seven years this voice will dictate to her what will be published as A Course In Miracles (published in 1975), which she will write down in shorthand while in a fully conscious state. This book will gain a cultic following over the years. Like Eileen Caddy at Findhorn, she describes the voice as being just at the audible/sub-audible threshold. In

spite of her own doubts about the origins of the voice, she is encouraged to believe it by her employer, William Thetford, who helps with compiling and writing the material that will become A Course in Miracles. Although unknown at this time, Thetford is working for the CIA under its MKULTRA program. 1965 – By about this time, the NSA’s ECHELON global surveillance system is able to monitor every HF (High Frequency) radio message, obtain its bearings, and locate the position of its transmitting point. (See file, Inside Echelon, by Duncan Campbell) 1965 – Rev. Jim Jones establishes the first People's Temple Church in Ukiah, California. He sets up Happy Havens Rest Home, which is guarded by dogs and surrounded by electric fences and guard towers. He draws in many people to the camp, including elderly, prisoners, people from psychiatric institutions, and 150 foster children, many of them transferred to care at Happy Havens by court order. He is soon consorting with wealthy and politically connected people. Church members, mostly poor, are forced to sign over their meager personal funds and property. A number of people who attempt to leave the church are found mysteriously murdered, and others will report extreme sexual abuses and other illegal activities, but the police just look the other way. 1965 (September) – Andrija Puharich’s Intelectron Corporation loses its main investors, but will somehow continue to stay afloat. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1965 (November 9) – At 5.28 p.m. an electrical blackout occurs all across the Northeastern part of the United States, in the greatest electric power failure in history. Press reports will state that UFOs had been seen some twenty miles from the area just before the power failure occurred. It is eventually determined that a key switch at the Sir Adam Beck plant in Queenston, Ontario was the trigger point. However, it will never be conclusively shown why it had failed, since it will work perfectly after the power failure without needing any repairs. Almost a year prior to the blackout, psychic Jean Dixon had been asked by Andrija Puharich to make a prediction concerning UFOs and the NASA space program, and a few days later she had contacted him back, saying that she had something to report. A meeting was set up on October 2, 1964 where two NASA officials were present. She gave the following statement: I see a satellite in the sky that flies from west to east, and as it comes over New York it suddenly reverses direction. As it does so all the power in Eastern United States goes out. There is no power at all. All the lights go out. Radio and TV programs go off the air. The satellite is a round ball with straight horns coming out of it.

When asked when this would happen, she could not say for sure, except that it was close. She went on to repeat the statement on national television and radio shows at least three times prior to the event (the last time forecasting that it would occur sometime in November), which would have had a huge influence on the public’s belief regarding the cause of the blackout when it finally happened. Reports of UFO sightings predictably increased after the event. 1966 (April 30) – Anton La Vey and underground filmmaker Kenneth Anger co-found the Church of Satan in San Francisco. Michael Aquino will soon become one of its leaders. Such Hollywood celebrities as Sammy Davis Jr. and Jayne Mansfield will become members. 1966 (August 1) – Charles Whitman, a former Marine, begins the day by stabbing both his mother and his wife to death, then drives around passing bad cheques and buying guns and ammo, which he packs into a footlocker with food and supplies before donning khaki overalls and driving to the University of Texas in Austin where he was enrolled. Sitting at the top of the campus’ bell tower after barricading himself in, he proceeds to randomly pick people off using a sniper rifle, killing 17 and wounding 32 before he is finally shot and killed by the police. Whitman grew up in an authoritarian home where his father was both physically and emotionally abusive. He was extremely intelligent, Due to his father’s enthusiasm for guns, he became proficient with them at an early age. After graduating from high school in 1959, Whitman enlisted in the Marines and served an 18 month tour of duty at Guantanamo Bay. After his stint, he entered college on a military scholarship. By 1961, he was showing signs of what was to come. He had mentioned to a friend how easy it would be to hold off an army from atop the university’s bell tower. After finishing college in 1963, he returned to duty and eventually got into trouble, causing him to serve some time in military prison and being demoted from colonel to private. At this point he began keeping a journal. He was honorably discharged at the end of 1964, and enrolled at the University of Texas. He began to abuse amphetamine and getting severe headaches. The night before the rampage, he wrote out a suicide note that states in part, “lately (I cannot recall when it started) I have been a victim of many unusual and irrational thoughts.” A comment in a university doctor’s medical file that Whitman previously had been seeing will state, “This massive, muscular youth seemed to be oozing with hostility [...] that something seemed to be happening to him and that he didn't seem to be himself.” Whitman also told the doctor that he had been having thoughts of going up into the tower and shooting people. Although an autopsy of Whitman’s body will reveal a brain tumor, the doctor performing the autopsy will conclude that it was in remission and played no part in Whitman’s actions. However, the Connelly Commission will decide that this evaluation is wrong and that the tumor was dormant but suddenly

became active, using the excuse that the tumor ‘may have’ been pressing against the amygdala regions of his brain, causing a fight/flight response. The commission will also recommend that the university and state aid the wounded and those affected by the events. This will include assistance with ‘mental issues’ and ‘rehabilitation’. Whitman will be buried with full military honors. The shooting helps lead to the formation of SWAT teams across the USA. (See online file, Charles Whitman, at www.wikipedia.com) 1966 – Cleve Backster, America’s top polygraph expert, performs an experiment by hooking a plant up to a lie detector and measuring its response to various types of stimuli. He discovers that a plant will respond to a person’s intentions toward it, such as pampering or abuse. 1966 – L. Ron Hubbard, founder of the Church of Scientology, purchases a small flotilla of ships, with a 342-foot ship he renames the Apollo becoming his international base of operations over the next decade. He mans his fleet with a smartly uniformed crew of several hundred carefully selected Scientologists, who will become known as the ‘Sea Org’. The Apollo is equipped with a state-of-the-art telex communications system that allows Hubbard to stay in touch with every Scientology branch around the world. Within the Sea Org, he recruits a special group of buxom young teenage girls, comprised mostly of children who have grown up in Scientology, who will act as his personal messengers and attend to Hubbard’s needs day and night. They will be given excessive powers over other members in order to carry out their duties. Over time, they will come to know the inner secrets of the organization better than anyone other than Hubbard himself. Hubbard begins occupying his time hunting for treasure in the Mediterranean, believing that he had left caches of hidden gold in various places during past lives. He also has serious intentions of finding a country he can infiltrate and take over in order to use it as a base to eventually take over the entire world with his new ‘religion’. Using knowledge he had gained in Navy Intelligence and from what he had learned from reading about Nazi spymasters, Hubbard and his followers begin to engage in their own intelligence operations, infiltrating various governments and organizations that they hope to gain control over. Hubbard increases security measures to keep outsiders knowing about Sea Org activities, and begins keeping detailed files on all sorts of people and groups, compiling information that he could use in whatever way might be necessary to protect himself and his organization from ‘enemies of Scientology’ or to further his goals. He also begins keeping files on every member of his organization, which includes detailed personal information culled from their processing sessions. Over the next decade, Hubbard will cause himself to be barred from entering various countries and wanted on criminal charges in France. He will go into hiding while stepping up efforts to counter the increasingly bad image that Scientology will receive. These

efforts will focus primarily on destroying opponents of Scientology by both legal and criminal means. (See online book, L. Ron Hubbard: Messiah or Madman?, by Corydon Bent) 1966 – The alien abduction story of Betty and Barney Hill is published in book form as The Interrupted Journey. 1967 – The CIA initiates Operation Chaos, to find a link between antiwar groups and foreign interests. Soon, the program will have indexed 300,000 names, built up 13,000 subject files, and intercepted large numbers of letters to and from American citizens. At the same time, the NSA begins targeting the telephone calls and telegrams of thousands of Americans involved in peaceful protest activities against the Vietnam War. (See online book, The Shadow Factory, by James Bamford) 1967 (January 14) – The Human Be-In in California takes place, attended by 20,000 people. 5,000 doses of a new drug called STP are distributed for free to attendees. The doses are 5-10 times stronger than recommended. 1967 (January 25) – Purported alien abduction of Betty Andreasson Luca. She is at home with her family when the lights in the house temporarily blink off. She sees a pulsing red light beam shining in through the kitchen window and everything is silent. Her father looks out the window and sees five strange beings moving towards the house. The beings appear to pass right through the door and enter the house. This is as much as Betty will consciously remember, and the rest of the experience is only recalled through hypnotic regression. The beings are described as the classic ‘greys’, with small bodies, large heads, and large almond-shaped eyes. Betty and her daughter Becky both see that the others are in a ‘suspended state’ at this time. The beings appear to be peaceful, and Betty feels protected. They say they are seeking knowledge “tried by fire”. She is apparently transported to the craft and undergoes examinations, and recalls floating up into the craft, rather than using a ladder or stairway that was there. None of the other family members were taken aboard. Apparently, Betty is the only one who sees the craft, and she gives a fairly detailed description of it during later hypnotic regression sessions. It should be noted however, that clear, detailed imagery might reflect a hypnotic suggestion at the time of the abduction (or even during the regression session) to fill in these details, thus making the imagery seem much more real to her. Betty finds that the inside of the craft is much larger than it appears from outside, and even describes riding in an elevator on board the ship. She describes changing into a white gown and then being taken to a room where she was submerged in a liquid while sitting in a chair. This could very well be a sensory-deprivation chamber, which is known to be used during mind-control programming. She later claims to have had an amnesia block placed on her in order not to remember the experience. She also claims that one of the beings locked secrets in her

mind, which would be released at the right time. None of her family seems to have been able to remember the experience afterwards, either. Betty is eventually returned to her home, where her family is still in suspended animation, being guarded by one of the beings. They are put to bed and the beings leave. Three days after this event, Betty’s eleven-year-old daughter Becky will complain to her of having dreams of strange beings in the house. Betty Andreasson will eventually begin to recover her memories of her experiences using hypnotic regression, and these will be promoted through a publicity campaign for the book The Andreasson Affair (by Raymond Fowler). She will go on to do many radio and television interviews, book signings, and lectures, bringing the subject of alien abduction into the minds of the public at large. She felt that it was her duty to do this, since people “needed to know”. She has accepted her experiences as having religious undertones, herself being a devout Christian. At the time of this encounter, she had very little knowledge about UFOs. (See online file, B J's Interview with Abductee Betty Andreasson Luca) 1967 - Robert and Mary Ann DeGrimston and other members of their Process Church descend upon San Francisco’s Haight-Ashbury district, taking lease of a property located at 407 Cole Street. They are situated close to Anton LeVey’s Church of Satan, as well as the local Chapter of the OTO. Recruiters for the Process Church sign on such members as 'Brother Ely,' a member of the Gypsy Jokers biker gang. One of the High Priests of the cult at this point is a former Israeli Mossad agent with strong links to the international intelligence community. (See online book, Programmed to Kill, by David McGowan) 1967 (March 21) – Future cult leader Charles Manson is released from Terminal Island federal prison. He takes up residence in San Francisco’s Haight-Ashbury district at 636 Cole Street, two blocks from the headquarters of the Process Church. He is required by law to report regularly to his parole officer, Dr. Roger Smith, who is heading the Amphetamine Research Project based at the Haight-Ashbury Free Medical Clinic. This clinic is a NIMH project designed to observe and supervise the first large-scale drug addiction of white teenagers, thousands of whom are the clinic's clients. Roger Smith is officially commissioned to scientifically investigate the effects that various kinds of drugs have on addicts that are being served by the clinic. The clinic’s director, Dr. David E. Smith, has collaborated in another NIMH project to study the behavior of children in communes, and is an expert on the creation of violent anti-social personalities in hippie or cult commune environments. The infamous MKULTRA mind-control doctor, Louis Jolyin West, is also living in Haight-Ashbury at this time.

Manson soon becomes involved with the Process Church, reaching the fourth level of initiation before breaking off and establishing his own group. David Berkowitz, the future Son of Sam serial killer, will also become a member of the Process Church or one of its offshoots. (See online book, Programmed to Kill, by David McGowan) 1967 (June) – Underground LSD chemist Owsley Stanley hands out 5,000 free hits of a new drug called STP at San Francisco’s Summer Solstice Festival in Golden Gate Park, resulting in a large number of bad trips. Owsley will soon employ the local chapter of the Hell’s Angels to help distribute his drugs. Methamphetamine begins appearing on the streets at this time as well, and violent crime rises as a result. 1967 (September) – Timothy Leary and his Brotherhood of Eternal Love move from their commune in Millbrook, New York, and set up in Laguna Beach, California. The Brotherhood files as a legal corporation and receives tax-exempt status as a religious organization. For the next two years, they will flourish in the drug trafficking business, smuggling large amounts of marijuana, hashish, and LSD into the USA and distributing them among America’s youth. 1967 (November 11) – The powerful hallucinogenic drug STP, at the time an experimental drug and only available to a handful of CIA distributors, is introduced onto the streets in San Francisco’s Haight-Ashbury district, causing outbreaks of toxic psychosis. 1967 – According to Alexander Saunders, who was personally mentored by Aleister Crowley as a boy and has since appointed himself as ‘King of the Witches’, during the filming of Eye of the Devil, he initiated the film's star and future Manson victim Sharon Tate into witchcraft. (See online book, Programmed to Kill, by David McGowan) 1967 – Ted Kaczynski earns a Ph.D. in mathematics at the University of Michigan and then joins the Berkeley Department of Mathematics as an instructor. 1967 – According to the CIA’s internal assessment, there are literally hundreds of college professors on more than 100 American college campuses under secret contract to the CIA. 1967 – The Phoenix Program (not to be confused with the Phoenix Project) is initiated by the CIA, with the aim of ‘neutralizing’ – through assassination, kidnapping, and torture – the civilian infrastructure that supports the Viet Cong insurgency in South Vietnam. It will be a terrifying ‘final solution’ that will violate the Geneva Conventions. Targets for assassination will include VC tax collectors, supply officers, political cadre, local military officials, and

suspected sympathizers. Faulty intelligence will often lead to the murder of innocent civilians. In 1971, William Colby, head of CIA in Vietnam at the time, will testify that the number killed was 20,857. South Vietnamese government figures will claim 40,994 dead. CIA officer Ted Shackley will manage 600 military and 40-50 CIA liaison officers who are working with South Vietnamese officers in 44 provinces. Ted Shackley and Robert Komer will play key roles in recruiting Phoenix Program personnel, who will be mostly Navy SEALs and Green Berets. Colby, Komer, and Shackley report to DCI Richard Helms and the White House. The horrors unleashed by the Phoenix Program will turn many US soldiers into psychopathic killers, who will then be returned to American soil. The Phoenix Program will also be involved in smuggling heroin back to the USA by sewing it inside the bodies of dead soldiers being returned to American soil.

1967 – Vern Grimsley, a member of the Urantia Foundation, establishes the offshoot Family of God Foundation in California. 1967 – First reported animal mutilation (‘Snippy’ the horse). These mutilations will begin to occur more and more frequently over the following years, and will come to be associated with UFOs. 1968 – With 20,000 American soldiers already killed in action and 110,000 wounded, the war in Vietnam is raging on with no end in sight. Across the country, anti-war protests and demonstrations turn into riots as the police and National Guardsmen routinely attack the crowds with tear gas, rubber bullets, and batons. In preparation for the Democratic National Convention in Chicago in August, Mayor Daley orders 12,000 police to work overtime, and

hundreds of undercover agents are deployed on ‘special assignments’. 6,000 National Guardsmen are also prepared, as well as an equal number of regular army troops with tanks and bazookas. Approximately 10,000 protesters show up for the Festival of Life on August 25, the day before the convention. As the crowd gathers, the police move in and begin arresting people. As would be expected, mayhem and riots break out and the street fighting continues for five days. On the last night of the convention, TV cameras are rolling when the National Guard, suited up in full battle dress with gas masks, clubs, and M-1 rifles, lob the first tear gas canisters into the crowd before moving in with their clubs swinging. By the time it’s all over, over a thousand people have been injured and one youth is dead. According to Army intelligence documents that will later be leaked, nearly one out of six demonstrators at the Chicago convention was an undercover operative. (See online book, Acid Dreams, by Martin A. Lee & Bruce Shlain) 1968 (March) – Seymour Hersh documents the following regarding the My Lai massacre in Vietnam, carried out as part of the Phoenix Program: “Charlie Company met no resistance; there were no Viet Cong soldiers at My Lai. Calley then ordered the slaughter of the civilians. People were rounded up into ditches and machine-gunned. They lay five feet deep in the ditches; any survivors trying to escape were immediately shot. When Calley spotted a baby crawling away from a ditch, he grabbed her, threw her back into the ditch, and opened fire. Some of the dead were mutilated by having "C Company" carved into their chests; some were disemboweled. One GI would later say, "You didn't have to look for people to kill, they were just there. I CUT THEIR THROATS, CUT OFF THEIR HANDS, CUT OUT THEIR TONGUES, SCALPED THEM. I DID IT. A LOT OF PEOPLE WERE DOING IT AND I JUST FOLLOWED. I JUST LOST ALL SENSE OF DIRECTION.” (See online file, Black Ops, Blue Blood, and My Lai – Satan’s Fake Apocalypse) 1968 (June) – Authorities in San Jose, Santa Cruz, and Los Gatos, California, begin recording the discovery of mutilated canines, skinned and drained of blood without any apparent motive. It is suspected that they are being used in satanic ritual sacrifices by local cults. 1968 (June 5) – Senator Robert F. Kennedy is assassinated. The apparent assassin is Sirhan Sirhan, but evidence will reveal that he wasn’t the actual killer. Sirhan will confess to doing it, but only because people are telling him that he did. He will have no memory of the actual event, and will eventually claim that he was mind-controlled. Sirhan had apparently been ‘treated’ by CIA hypnotist William Jennings Bryan prior to the assassination. Bryan is a programmer from the US Air Force and was Chief of Medical Survival Training, which was a covert brainwashing section. It will be reported that Sirhan is in a trance-like state both during and after the shooting. The ballistics evidence and autopsy report will be suppressed, making it

impossible to prove whether or not Sirhan was the actual killer. Sirhan was standing in front of Kennedy when Kennedy was shot, but he was shot from behind. One witness will give testimony that she heard 12 to 14 shots, but the FBI will change her testimony to state that she heard only 8 shots – the maximum number that Sirhan’s gun could hold. Four other witnesses will also report hearing more than 8 shots. Audio evidence will also show that at least 13 shots were fired. The sound of two different guns will also be distinguished, one firing more rapidly than the other. Sirhan had disappeared for three months the year before, and when he returned he had a sudden fascination with the occult. More recently, he had been working at a racing stables in Santa Ana, California, where, according to a co-worker named Thomas Bremer, he was programmed by two CIA mind-control specialists. Bremer’s brother Arthur, another mind-control victim, happens to be the man who will shoot Governor George Wallace in 1972. A large quantity of Rosicrucian and other occult literature will be found in Sirhan’s room when it is searched. Sirhan is alleged to have been acquainted with a member of the Process Church (a Scientology offshoot), and to have attended drug orgies at the home of Roman Polanski and Sharon Tate, who may also have been linked to the Process Church. Robert Kennedy had dined with Roman Polanski and Sharon Tate the night before his assassination. Only one year later, this same home will be the target of Charles Manson and his band of murderers. Manson will also be found to have links to the Process Church, as will future serial killer David Berkowitz. Years after the assassination, while under hypnosis, Sirhan will recall that he had run into a woman in a polka-dot dress who he had been smitten by and felt compelled to follow to the pantry of the Ambassador Hotel in Los Angeles where RFK was, at which point she pinched him and then spun him around to face Kennedy as he entered. Sirhan states that he thought he was at a shooting range at this point and only saw the circles of targets in front of him, and that’s when he began shooting. He also recalled seeing someone else with a gun at the time of the shooting. Sirhan will also recall being at a shooting range before the assassination, accompanied by an unknown man. While in prison, Sirhan will be visited by MKULTRA mind-control programmer, Dr. Louis Jolyin West. The name of another future serial killer, Albert DeSalvo, will be found repetitively scrawled throughout Sirhan’s diary. DeSalvo will also be ‘treated’ by William Jennings Bryan after his arrest. 1968 (June 14) – Michael Aquino, having just graduated with a BA in Political Science from the University of California Santa Barbara, joins the US Army and trains as a psychological warfare specialist. He meets Anton LaVey and begins taking an interest in his satanic philosophies. 1968 – Late in the year, the leaders Francisco for New York City, where a Cornelia Street in Greenwich Village. In members start living in a building on East

of the Process Church leave San Process Church is established on addition to the church, numerous 12th Street, while the DeGrimstons

live in Brooklyn. As in California, they recruit among the artists, poets and hordes of counterculture youth who frequent the Village. A cult spokesman will later tell United Press International that more than 200 Americans were fully converted to the ‘faith’. Process contingents will subsequently materialize in New Orleans, Dallas, Toronto, Chicago and Cambridge, Massachusetts, among other locations. After this, they begin to branch out to small towns adjacent to colleges and military bases – recruiting young adults who are away from home and in search of meaning. The growth in membership will be explosive. After the DeGrimstons leave for New York, the remaining members in California go through a lot of political infighting. Possibly due to Sirhan Sirhan’s association with their group, the Process Church goes underground and secret chapters or spin-offs are established in northern and southern California. One of these will purportedly be the ‘Four P Movement’ or ‘Four Pi’, which will be involved in blood-drinking and human and animal sacrifice. (See online book, The Ultimate Evil, by Maury Terry) 1968 – At around this time, the Children of God religious cult, founded by David Berg, is operating in California. Within the next ten years it will establish communities in 60 countries. This cult is involved in mind-control and pedophilia. Over the years, pamphlets will promote pedophilia and sex between children, as well as a photograph of a Children of God nurse engaged in oral sex with a young boy. Children of God girls will be used to lure men into having affairs with them, in order to recruit new members; this was known within the Children of God movement as ‘flirty fishing’. Joyanne Treadwell Berg, the granddaughter of the cult's founder, will allege that she was made to have sex with important government officials and had “met presidents from around the world”. If this claim is valid, it would imply that she was used as a mind-controlled sex slave to entrap high-level dignitaries. 1968 (December 20) – The first of the Zodiac murders rocks the San Francisco area when a man is shot once in the head at point blank range with a .22 and his female companion is shot multiple times with the same weapon. A detective working the case notes that the male victim had recently learned of a major drug deal that was about to go down, and he had been talking openly about who was involved in the transaction. 1968 (December) – Members of the Brotherhood of Eternal Love travel to San Francisco to secure a permanent source of supply for LSD. This LSD will become famously known as 'Orange Sunshine'. 1968 – Future serial killer John Wayne Gacy is convicted of violently raping a teenage boy and sentenced to ten years in prison. During his stay in an Iowa penitentiary, he is recruited into a satanic cult by a fellow inmate. He will be

released shortly after completing his initiation into the cult – even though he will have served only eighteen months of his sentence. 1968 – Zbigniew Brzezinski publishes his book, The Technotronic Age, in which he posits an information society whose basis of competition is replaced by ‘amusement focus’ based on “spectator spectacles (mass sports and TV) providing an opiate for increasingly purposeless masses... New forms of social control may be needed to limit the indiscriminate exercise by the individual of their new powers. The possibility of extensive chemical mind control... will call for a social definition of the common criteria of restraint as well as utilization.” He also states that it will soon be possible to continuously control citizens and maintain up-to-date files on them that will be instantaneously retrievable by authorities and will contain their most personal details about health and personal behavior. He predicts that power will be in the hands of those who control information. (See online file, Mind Control, World Control, by Jim Keith) 1968 – Northrop Grumman, a black project contractor for the US military, conducts research on the creation of “electrical forces to condition the air flowing around an aircraft at supersonic speeds”, and submits a paper on this subject to the American Institute of Aeronautics and Astronautics (AIAA). This research sounds very much like it stems from the work of T. Townsend Brown. The paper will later go missing from the records of the AIAA. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1968 – Laura Knight-Jadczyk joins Don Elkins. In later years she will found a cultic group called the Cassiopaeans. They will be involved in using a Ouija board to channel information from a group of entities that claim to be from the Cassiopaean star cluster. Don Elkins will be one of the founders of another group involved in channeling similar entities (the Ra material). 1969 – Lincoln Lawrence (a pseudonym) publishes a book, We Were Controlled, in which he claims that Lee Harvey Oswald was a hypnoprogrammed assassin and had a malfunctioning implant in his brain. He describes RHIC-EDOM technology: “Under RHIC, a 'sleeper' can be used years later with no realisation that the 'sleeper' is even being controlled! He can be made to perform acts that he will have no memories of having ever carried out...nothing he says will implicate the group or government which possessed and controlled him. […] There is already in use a small EDOM generatortransmitter which can be concealed on the body of a person. Contact with the person - a casual handshake or even just a touch - transmits a tiny electronic charge plus an ultrasonic signal tone which for a short while will disturb the time orientation of the person affected.”

1969 (March) – The Brotherhood of Eternal Love produces its first batch of ‘Orange Sunshine’ LSD in a laboratory outside of San Francisco. Just under one million hits are produced. They will become the largest suppliers of hashish and LSD in the USA, producing many millions more doses of LSD over the next four years. 1969 (June) – Carlos Allende walks into APRO headquarters and ‘confesses’ that his story about the Philadelphia Experiment was all a hoax. Actually, he only confesses that the parts of his letters that describe the bizarre aftereffects of the experiment are false. 1969 (July 4) – The second Zodiac murders occur when a couple is gunned down in their car, this time with a 9mm semi-automatic. The woman, Darlene Ferrin, who appears to be the primary target of the attack (the man survived his wounds), may have known the previous Zodiac victims. She had reportedly told her friends that she had witnessed a murder by a man who had subsequently been following her. In the weeks before her death, she had been receiving mysterious packages from a man living in Mexico who Darlene had, for unexplained reasons, married in 1966 using an assumed name and then later divorced. Her companion on the night of the murder, Michael Mageau, left his home in such a hurry that the lights and TV were left on and the front door was left open. He later told investigators that he and Darlene were followed immediately upon leaving Ferrin's house. After changing his story several times, Mageau will go into hiding. Shortly after the shootings, police will receive a call from a man claiming credit for Ferrin's murder. The call is placed from a payphone just outside the Sheriff 's station. At the end of July, the first of what will prove to be a long series of letters will arrive at area newspaper offices, with a request that the letter be published on August 1, the occult holiday known as Lammas. The series of letters are laced with codes that suggest that the writer had a background in naval intelligence, bringing the Office of Naval Intelligence (ONI) onto the case. On August 4, 1969, the killer will supply his moniker in a letter that begins: “This is the Zodiac speaking.” (See online book, Programmed to Kill, by David McGowan) 1969 (July) – Acting on a phone tip, police raid the OTO’s Solar Lodge compound near Blythe, California and find a six-year-old boy locked outdoors in a 6’ x 6’ wooden crate in the sweltering desert heat. The young boy had been chained to a steel plate for nearly two months in temperatures reaching as high as 117° F. According to an FBI report, the box also contained a can “partially filled with human waste and swarming with flies … The stench was nauseating.” Before being put in the box, the child had been burned with matches and beaten with bamboo poles by cult members. The leader of the cult, Georgina Brayton, had reportedly told cult members that “when it was convenient, she was going to give [the boy] LSD and set fire to the structure in which he was chained and give him just enough chain to get out of reach of the fire.” Killing the child had also been discussed. Eleven adult members

of the sect were charged with felony child abuse, the majority of them young white men in their early twenties. All were brought to trial and convicted. 1969 (August) – Ronald Hadley Stark approaches Timothy Leary’s Brotherhood of Eternal Love in Laguna Beach, California, with an offer to bankroll their drug trafficking activities. He is carrying with him 10 million doses of liquid LSD. He impresses them with his knowledge of drug smuggling and money laundering, as well as his connections in the world of covert politics. He also makes known his intention of facilitating the overthrow of both Western capitalism and Eastern Communism by inducing altered states of consciousness in millions of people. With Stark’s help, the Brotherhood will quickly become the largest supplier of illicit drugs in the USA. It will be discovered in later years that Stark is a long-time CIA operative with connections to the Tavistock Institute in Great Britain, where he was also responsible for supplying the majority of illicit drugs. There are indications that Stark is also intimately tied to Charles Manson as his drug supplier. 1969 (August 9-10) – A year after the satanic movie Rosemary’s Baby is released, director Roman Polanski’s beautiful young bride, the eight-monthspregnant Hollywood actress Sharon Tate, is brutally murdered along with four other people at her Cielo Drive home in the Bel Air section of Los Angeles. The words ‘Pig’ and ‘Helter Skelter’ are scrawled in blood on the walls. The next night, in the Los Feliz section of Los Angeles, wealthy supermarket president Leno La Bianca and his wife Rosemary are stabbed to death inside their home at 3301 Waverly Drive. Again, the word ‘Pig’ is scrawled in blood on the walls. The killers are members of the Family, a cult led by Charles Manson. Record producer Terry Melcher (Doris Day’s son) owns the property and had been living there until Polanski and Tate took over the lease in February. Melcher knew Manson personally and had been considering him as a recording artist. Sharon Tate’s father happens to be a Colonel in US Army Intelligence. Two of Manson’s followers who are involved in the murders, Susan Atkins and Bobby Beausoleil, are connected to Anton LeVey’s Church of Satan. LeVey is himself connected to Roman Polanski, having acted as technical consultant as well as starring in a cameo role as the devil in Rosemary’s Baby. Another Manson follower involved in the murders is Lynette ‘Squeaky’ Fromme, who is the daughter of an aerospace engineer who had been stationed at Randolph Air Force Base during WWII. Manson will later state that the victims in these murders had been involved in child pornography and deserved to die. Three days before the grisly murders, a drug dealer named Billy Doyle had been publicly whipped and sodomized at the Polanski/Tate home while a number of people watched. According to actor Dennis Hopper, “They had fallen into sadism and masochism and bestiality — and they recorded it all on videotape, too. The LA. police told me this. I know that three days before

they were killed twenty-five people were invited to that house for a mass whipping of a dealer from Sunset Strip who'd given them bad dope.” There will also be rumors that Polanski and Tate were deeply involved in satanism. Hopper will also state in interviews that sadistic movies were filmed at the house that featured some of Hollywood's biggest names. Sammy Davis, Jr., who was introduced to the Church of Satan by Manson victim Jay Sebring, will state, regarding the victims who were killed at Tate's Cielo Drive residence: “Everyone there had at one time or another been into satanism.” Roman Polanski will hire psychic Peter Hurkos in an attempt to find out who killed his wife. Manson’s parole officer, Dr. Roger Smith, who was involved in a mind-control project at the Haight-Ashbury medical clinic at the time that Manson was reporting to him, will state in an interview with Life magazine that “there are a lot of Charlies running around, believe me.” (See online file, Mind Control, World Control, by Jim Keith) 1969 (September) – The third Zodiac murders occur when a man and woman are stabbed multiple times in a San Francisco-area park. Despite the fact that it took nearly an hour for an ambulance to respond to a call as the pair lay bleeding, the man survived the attack. The assailant is described as wearing a strange hood with an attached apron that prominently displayed the trademark symbol of the Zodiac. The attacker reportedly had a gun, but chose instead to use a knife, breaking from the previous pattern and likely contributing to the survival of the male victim. Prints from a military-issue boot distributed primarily to U.S. naval bases on the west coast are found at the scene. The professed killer again calls police from a payphone near the local police station. He reportedly leaves a clear palm print on the phone, but a ‘nervous’ technician reportedly destroys it. (See online book, Programmed to Kill, by David McGowan) 1969 (October) – Andrija Puharich gives a report on his ESH research before an annual meeting of the American Academy of Ophthalmology and Otolaryngology (AAOO) in Chicago, Illinois. He had been warned that he would face severe opposition. However, he had no idea how virulent that opposition would be. As a prelude, three days before the AAOO meeting his office in New York was robbed of all the clinical records on his patients. He will eventually trace the theft to the AAOO. After he presents his paper and shows a movie film of his work, the opposition gets up and argues for the next two hours that Andrija's claims to be able to help people with hearing loss are not acceptable. He is also told that since he is “not a member of the club” of the AAOO, his evidence would not be acceptable in any case. He responds by offering them to use his equipment to test his claims for themselves, but they refuse.

(See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1969 (October 11) – The Zodiac killer strikes a fourth time when a taxi driver is shot once in the head with a 9mm handgun. The weapon used is a different 9mm than had been used previously by the Zodiac. The latest victim had picked up his fare on Mason Street and had then driven him to an address in the Presidio Heights area of the city, where he is promptly shot. Some local kids witness the murder and immediately call the police with a description of the assailant. For unexplained reasons, however, the police dispatcher broadcast a description of a black perpetrator, allowing the real shooter to evade a massive police response. Two days later, a new letter from the Zodiac will claim credit for the killing and threaten a future attack on a school bus. (See online book, Programmed to Kill, by David McGowan) 1969 (October 12) – Charles Manson is arrested on charges unrelated to the Tate/LaBianca murders, but is eventually discovered to be tied to them and is held in jail. Ultimately, 12 murders will be linked to Manson and his Family, although Manson will claim 35. In his book Helter Skelter, prosecutor Vincent Bugliosi will state that two Process members from Cambridge, Massachusetts, had visited him to dissuade him from believing that Manson was connected to the Process Church. Soon after, Manson will be visited by the same two members, after which he will stop talking about the Process Church. When author Ed Saunders publishes his book on Manson called The Family, in which he strongly suggests that Manson’s had ties to the Process Church, he will also be contacted by members of the Process Church, who will threaten legal action if he doesn’t remove all direct references to the Process Church from his book. He complies. (See online book, The Ultimate Evil, by Maury Terry) 1969 (October 29) – The military’s ARPANET goes online as a secure electronic communications network. This will eventually develop into the modern Internet. The first ARPANET link is between the University of California, Los Angeles and Stanford Research Institute. By the end of the year it will add the University of Utah and the University of California, Santa Barbara. 1969 (December 6) – A Rolling Stones concert at Altamont Speedway in California ends the hippie era on a bad note when one of the Hell’s Angels members who are acting as security stabs a black man to death in front of the entire audience and with cameras rolling. 1969 (December 17) – Project Bluebook is closed. The Air Force will state in a memorandum that “the continuation of Project Blue Book cannot be

justified either on the ground of national security or in the interest of science”, and will conclude that the project does not merit future expenditures of resources. 1969 – With William Thetford’s help, Helen Schucman begins scribing her channeled material in written form, to be used as the A Course in Miracles Workbook. 1969 – At about this time, the FBI’s Behavioral Sciences Unit (BSU) begins taking shape, but it won’t really take off until 1972, when the FBI Academy opens in Quantico, Virginia. It will initially have no operational functions and will be solely involved in teaching the principles of profiling. Over the next 25 to 30 years, the FBI will manage, despite initial resistance, to spread the use of the BSU’s profiling techniques in other professions, thoroughly co-opting the fields of law enforcement, academia, mental health, and the forensic sciences. In doing so, they will successfully mold public opinion and firmly ingrain in the mind of the average American the concept of the ‘serial killer’. Curiously, Robert Ressler, who will become the most well known profiler in the unit, had lived on the same street and was in Boy Scouts with future serial killer John Wayne Gace when they were boys. Ressler will later assist in investigating the Gace case. (See online book, Programmed to Kill, by David McGowan) 1969 – Edmund Kemper is released from jail after serving five years as a juvenile for killing his grandparents. He takes up residence at his mother’s home in Santa Cruz, California, and begins hanging out at a bar called the ‘Jury Room’, which is also a hangout for local cops, sheriffs, and prosecuting attorneys. By May 1972, Kemper will begin killing female hitchhikers and having sex with the bodies before cutting them up and disposing of the parts. 1969 - The California Board of Medical Examiners finds MKULTRA’s Dr. William Joseph Bryan guilty of unprofessional conduct for sexually molesting four women patients who submitted under hypnosis. Bryan had demonstrated a proclivity and fantasy for sexual perversion. Shortly after his sudden death in 1977 in Las Vegas, two Beverly Hills prostitutes will come forward and claim to have known him intimately, saying that they had been double team ‘servicing’ him on an average of twice a week for four years, and were usually present at the same time. According to the prostitutes, Bryan repeatedly confides that he is not only a CIA agent but involved in ‘top secret projects’. They will say that he bragged about his role of deprogramming Albert Di Salvo in the Boston Strangler case for F. Lee Bailey, and boasted that he had hypnotized Sirhan Sirhan, Robert F. Kennedy's assassin. 1969 – Michael Aquino joins the Church of Satan. Soon after, he leaves for a tour of duty in Vietnam (taking part in the infamous Phoenix Program),

returning in 1971. Not long after his return, he will be ordained a priest in the Church and start his own grotto that meets at his home. 1970 (May 4) – After the invasion of Cambodia by US forces, anti-war protestors in the USA are fired on by the National Guard at Kent State University, killing four people. This was nothing less than a blatant terrorist act inflicted on the US citizenry by its own government in order to scare them into conformity and stifle dissent. 1970 – Future Urantia Foundation trustee, NSA-trained Neal Waldrop enters the US Navy and attends Officer Candidate School. (See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1970 – Rand Corporation publishes a report entitled, A Direct Mechanism for the Direct Influence of Microwave Radiation on Neuroelectric Function, by R.J. MacGregor. He "notes that power densities of close to 1000,000mw/cm2 can produce auditory hallucinations in a field that would be averaged as low intensity and non-thermal." (See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1970 – The release of Psychic Discoveries Behind the Iron Curtain by authors Sheila Ostrander and Lynn Schroeder reveals the Russian’s advances in psychic research. This book will help to prompt the US government to take a serious interest in researching psychic phenomena for intelligence gathering purposes. 1970 – In spite of him stating at his parole hearing that he will kill again, Henry Lee Lucas is released after having served 10 years of a 20 – 40 year sentence for murdering his mother and violating the corpse. Lucas’ mother had been both physically and sexually abusive to Henry throughout his childhood, which turned him into a sadistic psychopath and sexual deviant by the time he reached his teens. During his incarceration for her murder, he spent four and a half years on a mental ward, receiving intensive drug and electroshock treatments. He will later describe having heard voices in his head during this time. Within a year of his release, he will be back in prison again for the attempted abduction of a young girl. He will serve four years before getting another early release in August of 1975, at which point he will become involved in a satanic cult called the Hand of Death. Accompanied by a man named Ottis Toole, he will begin committing an untold number of lurid child abductions and murders until his final capture in 1983. (See online book, There’s Something About Henry, by David McGowan)

1970 (September) – Colston Westbrook returns to the USA from Vietnam and the CIA’s Phoenix Program (Chaos Program). Westbrook begins work under the cover of the UC Berkeley Black Studies Department. He will soon become involved in programming Donald DeFreeze, who will become the leader of the MKULTRA created Symbionese Liberation Army (SLA). 1970 (September 14) – The first of the ‘Death Angel’ attacks occurs in Berkley, California when 21-year-old Danny Crawford is picked up hitchhiking by two black men who hold him down and slash him with a meat cleaver before dropping him off. The next attack will be on October 25, involving the mutilation/murder of an unknown white male. Two more attacks will occur on October 27 involving gunshots. Two more attacks with a gun will occur on November 10. The attacks will carry into the next year, the next one occurring on June 18, 1971. By July, the attackers will more often than not be reported as two black men wielding a machete-type weapon. The attacks will continue throughout 1971 and will never be solved. 1970 (November 19) – While Andrija Puharich is attending a conference in Rye, New York that was being convened for the purpose of exploring the energy involved in certain psychic phenomena, one of the scientists present reports on a young man in Israel who could apparently do amazing psychokinetic feats, such as splitting solid gold rings in two, and moving clock hands. This is the first time that Puharich hears about the psychic, Uri Geller. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1970 – At this point in time, an average of six serial killers are reported each year in the USA. 1971 – The Symbionese Liberation Army (SLA) is secretly created at Vacaville State Penitentiary by Colston Westbrook. Westbrook is a former CIA advisor to the South Korean Government, was trained in psychological warfare, and had participated in the CIA's infamous Phoenix program in Vietnam, training terrorist cadres and death squads. Westbrook is assisted at Vacaville by his case officer, William Herman, who is a CIA operative, counter-insurgency expert and arms dealer, and will become involved in the Iran/Contra Affair in the years ahead. Donald DeFreeze, a Vacaville inmate, is groomed by Westbrook to be the leader of the SLA. DeFreeze had worked for the Los Angeles Police Department's Public Disorder Intelligence unit between 1967 and 1969. Other SLA members will be Angela Atwood and Emily Harris, who had both received intelligence training at the College of Foreign Affairs at the University of Indiana prior to joining the Intelligence Division of the Indiana State Police. 1971 – As part of the Rockefeller’s depopulation program, they fund Planned Parenthood to establish the first large-scale abortion mill in New York City.

The center is designed to perform more than 10,000 abortions a year. It is a model for future sites that will be set up around the country. By the next year, 700,000 innocent babies will be killed in the USA by abortion. 1971 – Well-known author and researcher Otto Binder writes an article for Saga magazine's Special UFO Report titled Liquidation of the UFO Investigators, Binder had researched the deaths of ‘no less than 137 flying saucer researchers, writers, scientists, and witnesses” who had died in the previous ten years, “many under the most mysterious circumstances.” 1971 – Andrija Puharich is in Israel studying the psychic abilities of Uri Geller. After placing him under hypnosis (and very possibly leading him with suggestive questions or comments, or perhaps even unspoken thoughts sent telepathically), Geller starts channeling an entity that identifies itself as ‘Spectra’ and claims to be a conscious computer aboard a spaceship stationed far out in space. Spectra also claims to be the source of Geller’s psychic abilities, and, at least according to Puharich, causes some very strange telekinetic phenomena to occur that go way beyond Geller’s already amazing spoon-bending abilities. When asked, the entities agree that they are the same ‘Nine Principles and Forces’ that Puharich and his Round Table Foundation had been in contact with in the early 1950s, and that they are behind the UFO sightings that started in 1947. They also explain that Geller has been programmed for a special mission to Earth and that “he is the only one for the next fifty years to come”. They also claim that a global war is imminent, and this is why they are revealing themselves. They tell Puharich that he is to take care of Geller, who is to be a Messiah. They are against Puharich using Geller in his psychic research, but Puharich insists, and so they reluctantly agree. Puharich will bring Geller to the USA in 1972 to visit Stanford Research Institute and have his psychic abilities tested by a small group of interested scientists that include Hal Puthoff, Russell Targ, and Edgar Mitchell. These three men will soon start classified remote-viewing programs for the US government that will continue for twenty-three years, with funding provided by various different military/intelligence agencies of the US government. (See book, Uri: A Journal of the Mystery of Uri Geller, by Andrija Puharich) 1971 – Ted Kaczynski quits his job as a professor of mathematics and moves to Montana to live off the land. 1971 – From 1971 to 1978, William Thetford and David Saunders head CIA mind control Project MKULTRA Subproject 130: Personality Theory at Columbia University. 1972 (March 10) – During an encounter with police, Robert Naeslund is put to sleep, and wakes up hours later experiencing what he describes as a ‘radio

signal’ in his head. He has been electronically implanted. Later x-rays will show that there is a device in his nasal cavity. 1972 – The Santa Cruz area of California becomes a mecca for hippies, drug traffickers, and satanists. It also becomes the location of a large number of seemingly random murder/mutilations. Up until this time, 95 percent of murders that have occurred in the USA have been primarily situational – inspired by tense domestic incidents or the result of some kind of altercation among acquaintances. But the murders during the 1970s in Santa Cruz will defy this pattern. Many of the area's killings will be credited to two alleged serial killers, Edmund Kemper and Herb Mullin, who are apparently operating at the same time in the same city, though acting independently of each other. Kemper's bloody odyssey will reportedly include eight victims brutally butchered between May 1972 and April 1973, most of them coeds whose corpses are cannibalized and sexually violated. Mullin will be credited with dispatching thirteen victims in just four months, from October 13, 1972 through February 13, 1973. Mullin will admit to having a strong interest in the occult, choosing significant satanic dates for his murders. No fewer than six serial killers/mass murderers – Charles Manson, Stanley Baker, Edmund Kemper, Herbert Mullin, John Lindley Frazier, and the Zodiac – are spawned from the Santa Cruz/San Francisco metropolitan area in a span of just over four years, at a time when ‘serial killers’ are still a rare enough phenomenon that they haven't yet acquired the name. Neuro-Linguistic Programming is being developed commercially for mass consumption at the University of Santa Cruz by Dr. Bateson, Richard Bandler and John Grinder. (See online book, Programmed to Kill, by David McGowan) 1972 (May 7) – The first of a series of brutal murders occurs in the Santa Cruz, California area that will be attributed to Edmund Kemper. These murders will involve two female hitchhikers who are picked up and taken to an isolated rural area where they are stabbed, shot, or smothered to death. Kemper then takes the bodies back to his mother’s home to have sex with them before cutting them up and dumping the parts in ravines or burying them in fields. As he dissects them, he takes Polaroid photographs. He will commit more murders over the next year before turning himself in to police. At the same time that Kemper is murdering people in the Santa Cruz area, so is serial killer Herb Mullin, and both had been preceded three years earlier by serial murderer John Linley Frazier. 1972 (August) – Andrija Puharich brings Uri Geller to the USA. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans)

1972 (September 14) – The second in a series of murders occurs in the Santa Cruz area that will be attributed to Edmund Kemper. The victim is a fifteen-year-old female hitchhiker who Kemper takes to an isolated spot and kills before having sex with the body. He then puts the body in the trunk of his car and drives to a bar for a few drinks before continuing to his mother’s home. He takes the body into the house and places it on his bed, where he begins to dissect it. The body parts are later disposed of in various locations. 1972 (October) – A pilot project to investigate the merits of clairvoyance as a means of accurate intelligence acquisition is started at Stanford Research Institute with government funding. Astronaut Edgar Mitchell is overseeing the preliminary program and reporting directly to George Bush Sr. Hal Puthoff and Russell Targ are working directly under Mitchell. This is the precursor to Project SCANATE, a classified government program that will continue under various names (GRILL FLAME, CENTER LANE, SUNSTREAK, and STAR GATE) for over two decades. A structured methodology for clairvoyance will be developed that is termed ‘remote viewing’. These programs will incorporate the use of a Faraday cage to enhance psychic receptivity, and EEG machines to monitor brainwave patterns. Hypnosis is very likely a key element as well, since it has been repeatedly shown to heighten telepathic ability in a hypnotized subject. Andrija Puharich brings Uri Geller to SRI for psychic testing during this preliminary stage of the remote-viewing program. The results prove very successful, and will be reported in the National Enquirer. Soon after this, Time magazine, with the backing of the Department of Defense, will begin to discredit Geller and the scientists at SRI. This will lead to a public battle that will make Geller famous in the USA, while Puharich will find himself being vilified within the scientific community. Many of the people who will be involved in the remote-viewing programs at SRI (including Uri Geller, Andrija Puharich, Harold Puthoff, Russell Targ, and Jack Sarfatti) have previously had strange experiences that included communications with alleged UFO occupants, and/or had been involved in secret government ‘aptitude enhancement’ programs as children. 1972 (October 13) – The first gruesome murder that will be attributed to Herb Mullin takes place in Santa Cruz, California. By February 13, 1973, twelve more murders will take place that will be attributed to him. Mullin grew up in a military family, his father having been a highly decorated Navy captain. Before the killings, Mullin had spent a considerable amount of time in and out of various mental institutions, including one in Maui two years earlier that was run by the US Army. According to author/investigator Ed Saunders, a mind control project was in operation on the Hawaiian Islands at the time and was specifically aimed at creating ‘serial killers’. Another

serial killer, Mark David Chapman, will spend time in Hawaii in 1977, and there will be evidence that he was also involved in a mind-control program there. Mullin would frequently complain about hearing voices in his head. He will be diagnosed with MPD. He regularly told those around him that he was receiving messages, including commands to kill, that were delivered in his father's voice. He would later state: “I feel that I was under my father's control, like a robot.” Mullin was also known to tell people that his father, a Freemason, was a mass murderer responsible for countless unsolved killings up and down the California coast. His father had committed himself to a mental hospital at the end of World War II. Herb will claim to have only vague memories of the year and a half he spent in California during the killing spree. During this largely blacked-out period, he engaged in backward writing, a hypnotically conditioned skill that is frequently indicative of mind control programming. He was known to consume large quantities of hallucinogenic drugs, and he had an interest in the occult. Just prior to his arrest, Mullin will enlist in the US Marines, and the recruiter will waive his criminal record. After his arrest, Mullin will robotically chant “silence” to every question posed to him. He will later claim that, once incarcerated, he began receiving telepathic messages instructing him to kill himself, but was able to resist acting on those orders. There will be discrepancies in the evidence used to convict Mullin, suggesting that he didn’t commit all of the murders attributed to him. A gag order will be imposed on court proceedings, and a presumption of guilt will be set before the trial even gets under way, leaving the jury without a ‘not guilty’ option. Mullin’s lawyers will do nothing to defend him and will instead help to convict him unfairly. He will state in the end that he was the victim of a huge conspiracy. 1972 – The US Army publishes a study entitled Controlled Offensive Behavior: USSR, which concerns itself with targeting individuals with mindaltering techniques and “the total submission of one’s will to some outside force.” The study involves the use of pulsed microwaves. (See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1972 – Arthur M. Young founds the highly influential Institute for the Study of Consciousness at Berkeley. This organization will provide a forum for some of the most daring thinkers of the day. Young was involved with Andrija Puharich’s Round Table Foundation in the early 1950s.

1972 – The Heaven’s Gate cult is established by Marshall Applewhite and his wife Bonnie Nettles. The two founders had met in a psychiatric hospital, where Applewhite was a patient and Nettles a nurse. 1972 – The Montauk Project (Project Phoenix) allegedly starts at Camp Hero, Long island. 1972 – MKSEARCH closes down. 1972 – With William Thetford’s help, Helen Schucman channels the material for the A Course in Miracles Manual. 1973 (January 7) – Edmund Kemper strikes a third time in his ongoing murder spree in Santa Cruz, California. As with the last time, he targets a young female hitchhiker and takes her to an isolated area to kill her, then takes the corpse to his mother’s home and has sex with it before cutting it up into pieces. He buries the head in the backyard and disposes of the remainders by throwing them over a cliff. 1973 (February 5) – Edmund Kemper strikes a fourth time in his ongoing murder spree in Santa Cruz, California. This time he picks up two separate hitchhiking females and shoots them both in the car while driving. When he is at an isolated area, he transfers the bodies to the trunk of his car and beheaded them before taking one body inside his mother’s home to have sex with it. He later disposes of the body parts in various places. 1973 (March) – The Institute of Neotic Science is founded in Palo Alto, California by Apollo 14 astronaut Edgar Mitchell. It is “dedicated to research and education in the processes of human consciousness to help achieve a new understanding and expanded awareness among all people.” This organization will be heavily involved in psychic testing, partly funding tests conducted with Uri Geller at SRI. 1973 (April 21) – On Good Friday, Edmund Kemper strikes a last time when he bludgeons his mother to death, beheading her and having sex with the corpse before using her head as a dartboard. He will then call and invite his mother's friend over, and upon her arrival, will quickly deal with her in a similar manner. After this, he will quickly leave California for Colorado, where he will call friends at the Santa Cruz police department and begin confessing to a string of murders. After convincing them that he’s not a crank caller and telling them where to find him, he sits and waits for them to come and arrest him. Although he will be in possession of Polaroid pictures that depict the murders and will be able to provide many details of the crimes, thus proving his involvement, there will be indications that others were involved as well. He will give one of the most detailed, articulate, and chilling confessions of sadism, murder, mutilation, cannibalism, and necrophilia in the annals of

crime. The murders are laced with satanic symbolism, and he will testify that the killings arose from fantasies that began to build in his head during his confinement at Atascadero as a youth. Ed had told California Youth Authority officials of “evil forces within him which tried to control his behavior”. Kemper will state, “I believe […] that there are two people inside me.” He will also describe having experienced a dissociative state while going about his grisly work: “It's almost like a blacking out. You know what you're doing but you don't notice anything else around.” Ed will be judged sane and guilty of eight counts of first-degree murder. He will be sentenced to life in prison and sent to Vacaville, then later transferred to Folsom. (See online book, Programmed to Kill, by David McGowan) 1973 – In the spring of this year, Uri Geller appears on the Jack Paar TV talk show. Paar unexpectedly asks whether Geller could bend several large steel nails, held by Paar. Geller places his hands over Paar's, concentrates, then asks Paar to open his hands and inspect the nails. All of them are bent. Edgar Mitchell, co-appearing on the show, will later state how “when he opened his hand his faced turned ashen. The tip of one of the nails was bent about twenty degrees, whereas all had been perfectly straight just moments before. An awkward silence fell over the set.” Geller will make other TV appearances, and each time he does, there will be numerous reports of parents calling up the TV stations and claiming that their children were bending spoons as well. Geller is apparently triggering spontaneous telekinetic ability among the television viewers. This will become known as the ‘Geller Effect’. 1973 (October 21) – The first meeting of the Trilateral Commission, a political organization formed by David Rockefeller. Its purpose is to guide fellow internationalists in using their private influence to make certain their governments remain on the proper public course – a headlong rush toward the merging of governments into a single world government. 1973 – At about this time, the ECHELON global surveillance system goes online. It incorporates high speed computers that run advanced search engines to automatically sift through the global communications traffic for specified keywords. (See file, Inside Echelon, by Duncan Campbell) 1973 – Uri Geller stops working with Andrija Puharich and returns to Israel. 1973 – Tipped off about forthcoming investigations into the CIA’s mindcontrol programs, Richard Helms destroys a large number of documents relating to MKULTRA prior to leaving his position as Director of the CIA.

1974 (February 4) - The MKULTRA-created SLA kidnap Patricia Hearst, the daughter of Randolph Hearst, the ultra-wealthy owner of Hearst newspapers. She is kept locked in a closet and sexually abused while brainwashing techniques are used to bring her over to their side (via the ‘Stockholm Syndrome’). She joins the group in committing a number of bank robberies. When the police close in on the group’s safe house, a shoot-out takes place and the safe house is burned to the ground, killing six SLA members, including Donald DeFreeze, the group’s leader. Patricia Hearst will get away and remain on the run for the next year before being caught. In spite of having been brainwashed, she will be found guilty for her part in SLA activities and sentenced to seven years in prison. President Carter will commute her sentence and she will be pardoned after serving two years. DeFreeze’s body will be delivered to his parents in a closed casket. They will open the casket and find a headless and handless corpse inside. Four of MKULTRA’s leading experts in mind-control – Margaret Singer, Robert J. Lifton, Martin Orne, and Louis Jolyin West – will testify as expert witnesses at Patty Hearst’s trial. West had been the head of the infamous UCLA ‘Violence Project’ at Vacaville, which DeFreeze had been recruited into. 1974 (April 18) – 13-year-old Todd Bequette is abducted at the Old Market in Omaha, Nebraska, by a man named Terry Holman and forced to help abduct other children. He will eventually be found by a private detective. Holman will never be charged. (See online file, Child Trafficking and Mind Control in the Heartland - My Cost of Child Advocacy, by David Shurter) 1974 – First successful unclassified ‘voice-to-skull’ experiment conducted by Dr. Joseph C. Sharp and Mark Grove at the Walter Reed Army Institute of Research. 1974 – J. F. Shapitz, working at the Department of Defense, files a proposal that states: “In this investigation it will be shown that the spoken word of the hypnotist may be conveyed by modulated electro-magnetic energy directly into the subconscious parts of the human brain - i.e., without employing any technical devices for receiving or transcoding the messages and without the person exposed to such influence having a chance to control the information input consciously.” This is an extension of the work done by Dr. Joseph C. Sharp and Mark Grove at Walter Reed Institute of Research the same year (See previous entry). Besides this proposal, no records of this research have ever been declassified, suggesting that it was successful. The wording of the proposal suggests that this technology incorporated subliminal audio via ‘voice-toskull’ technology, since it states that the messages are directed to the

subconscious and don’t necessitate a receiving device (such as an implant) to transcode them. 1974 – An Army Medical and Information Agency document, entitled Biological Effects of Electromagnetic Radiation, discusses, among other things, the induction of voices inside the brain by use of signal modulation at very low power densities. 1974 – Andrija Puharich publishes his book, Uri: A Journal of the Mystery of Uri Geller, in which he describes the strange psychic phenomena that surrounded Uri Geller, particularly during Puharich’s involvement with him. Apart from the many descriptions of objects allegedly materializing, dematerializing, and teleporting to other locations whenever Geller was around, Puharich also claims that he and Geller had been in communication with disembodied beings from the future, who identified themselves as the same entities his Round Table group had been channeling years earlier. According to Puharich, they claimed that he had been chosen for a special mission to reveal to the world through Geller that these entities were here to save mankind from imminent destruction and were about to land en masse in spaceships. Although the book will be an instant bestseller due to the fame that Geller has already achieved in the USA, the more unbelievable events described in the book and the inclusion of information about channeled entities and their strange communications will only serve to discredit both Geller and himself. Doing this would assure that his research would never be taken seriously, and so it appears to have been a forced move. This same year, Puharich sets up ‘Lab Nine’ at his home in Ossining and starts working with another psychic named Phyllis Schlemmer. John Whitmore, the professional racecar driver and international tycoon, will also be closely involved. Schlemmer will soon begin channeling an entity that claims to be part of ‘The Nine’ from Puharich’s Round Table days in the 1950s. These channeling sessions will continue into the next year, when the three will have a falling out. Schlemmer will continue to channel these entities for the next twenty years, eventually publishing a book based on the communications titled, The Only Planet of Choice: Essential Briefings from Deep Space. In her book, she will claim that these entities are known about by our world governments but our governments refuse to disclose their existence and are covering it up. Puharich’s second-in-command at Lab Nine is James J. Hurtak, who will later collaborate with Carla Rueckert, a paranormal researcher who will be best known for her 1984 publication of The Ra Material, which is channeled information from a group of entities that have suspicious similarities to Puharich’s ‘Council of Nine’. Lab Nine disciples include multi-millionaire businessmen (many hiding behind pseudonyms and including members of Canada's richest family, the Bronfmans), European nobility, scientists from the Stanford Research

Institute and at least one prominent political figure who is a personal friend of President Gerald Ford. Author Lyall Watson is involved, as is the influential counter-culture guru Ira Einhorn, as well as Gene Roddenberry, the creator of the television hit ‘Star Trek’. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1974 – With the increasing need to control his followers, L. Ron Hubbard incorporates the Rehabilitation Project Force within his Church of Scientology. It is a slave labor prison system onboard his ship, the Apollo. Members who break the rules receive extremely harsh punishments and have to live under extremely harsh and degrading conditions. It is seen within the organization as ‘the last chance at redemption’. Those members who have thoughts of leaving Scientology are placed in this ‘project’. Those who have been successfully broken by the ordeal will have nothing but thanks for having been put through it, becoming all the more loyal to Hubbard and his organization. (See online book, L. Ron Hubbard: Messiah or Madman?, by Corydon Bent) 1974 – Robert and Mary Ann DeGrimston, joint leaders of the Process Church of the Final Judgment, get divorced, and the original organization changes its name to the Foundation Church of the Millennium, while many of its chapters across the country split off to form into autonomous groups. 1974 – The Citizens Freedom Foundation (CFF) is founded. It will officially change its name to the Cult Awareness Network (CAN) in 1986. 1975 – By the beginning of this year, members of the Church of Scientology will have infiltrated the IRS, the US Coast Guard, and the DEA. 30,000 pages of documents have been stolen from the IRS relating to Scientology and its founder. Burglaries of the Department of Justice offices resulted in the copying of tens of thousands of other government files. A government sentencing memorandum on Mary Sue Hubbard will state: “The crime committed by these defendants is of a breadth and scope previously unheard of. No building, office, desk or file was safe from their snooping and prying. No individual or organization was free from their despicable conspiratorial minds. The tools of their trade were miniature transmitters, lock picks, secret codes, forged credentials, and any other device they found necessary to carry out their conspiratorial schemes.” (See book, Bare-Faced Messiah, by Russell Miller) 1975 – The Travis Walton alien abduction. 1975 – Betty Andreasson Luca responds to a local newspaper article by UFO researcher J. Allen Hynek, in which reader’s personal UFO experiences are being solicited. Her response will contain little data to mark it as significant,

causing it to be filed away and forgotten about until 1977. A local investigator, Jules Vailencourt, will eventually be informed of her case and contact her to see if she would be willing to investigate it. She agrees, and begins undergoing hypnotic regression sessions, with a man named Dr. Edlestien conducting the hypnosis. This is the point when the full details of her experiences will start to surface. She will often be placed under subliminal hypnosis by Dr. Edlestien, which causes her to have spontaneous flashbacks throughout the weeks between these sessions. The hypnotist has to plead with her to allow this to continue, stating that others are having these experiences as well. Some years after these first hypnosis sessions, another hypnotist by the name of Fred Max will continue exploring her experiences. 1975 (April) – At about this time, future serial killer David Berkowitz becomes involved in a satanic cult in New York. Initially, according to Berkowitz, the group is involved in harmless activities, such as séances and fortune telling. Gradually, however, the group introduces him to drug use, sadistic pornography, and violent crime. They begin by killing dogs, mostly German Shepherds. Over a dozen mutilated dog corpses will be discovered in Yonkers, especially near Untermeyer Park, which Berkowitz will claim to be a frequent meeting place for the cult. 1975 (April) – Government agent and future Urantia Foundation trustee, Neal Waldrop, is admitted to the Urantia Brotherhood as a member. (See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1975 (May) – Andrija Puharich travels to England, where he meets several children who can bend spoons, pocketknife blades, keys, etc. He gets permission from their parents to study their paranormal powers further. Soon after, he meets more children with these same abilities in Mexico City. By July, he will have an “experimental school” set up for testing these psychic children at his home in Ossining, NY. There are initially nine children plus his fourteen-year-old son, Andy. They will be informally known as the ‘space kids’, and will undergo extensive hypnosis sessions that involve teaching them that they are from other planets and came here with a life mission. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1975 (May) – Lt. Col. Michael Aquino leaves the Church of Satan and founds the Temple of Set. It will develop into a small group of several hundred members (including many military personnel) and an inner circle called the Council of Nine. According to Aquino, the Council takes its name from the legend of the Nine Unknown Men, recounted by Louis Pauwels and Jacques Bergier in their book, Morning of the Magicians. During this same year, Aquino also co-authors a psychological warfare manual for the US Army titled From Psyop to MindWar: the Psychology of Victory.

1975 (July) – According to the Napa Valley Sentinel in an article by Harry V. Martin and David Caul titled, Mind Control (August-November 1991), at a NATO conference in July, 1975: “A U.S. Navy psychologist, who claims that the Office of Naval Intelligence had taken convicted murderers from military prisons, used behavior modification techniques on them, and then relocated them in American embassies throughout the world […] The Navy psychologist was Lt. Commander Thomas Narut of the U.S. Regional Medical Center in Naples, Italy. The information was divulged at an Oslo NATO conference of 120 psychologists from the eleven nation alliance […] The Navy provided all the funding necessary, according To Narut. “Dr. Narut, in a question and answer session with reporters from many nations, revealed how the Navy was secretly programming large numbers of assassins. He said that the men he had worked with for the Navy were being prepared for commando-type operations, as well as covert operations in U.S. embassies worldwide. He described the men who went through his program as ‘hit men and assassins’ who could kill on command. “Careful screening of the subjects was accomplished by Navy psychologists through the military records […] and many were convicted murderers serving military prison sentences.” 1975 (August) – Henry Lee Lucas is released early from prison after serving a four year sentence for the attempted abduction of a child. By the next year, he will be teamed up with another serial killer named Ottis Toole, with whom he will spend the next seven years committing murders and abducting children as they roam around the country, eventually being caught in 1983. After his arrest in 1983, Lucas will claim to have been initiated into a cult that Toole had introduced him to, called the Hand of Death. According to Lucas, this cult is part of a larger network that spans the country and involves very wealthy and influential people at the top, including high-ranking politicians. After his release from prison, he claims to have spent some time in the Florida Everglades, formally training at a mobile paramilitary camp in assassination, kidnapping, and arson. Toole’s grandmother, who had raised him as a youth, had been involved in satanism all her life, which is probably how they became involved in the cult network. According to Lucas, the cult operates out of Texas and from a ranch in northern Mexico, and trafficks in children and drugs, among other things. He will claim that what appeared to be the random work of a serial killer was in fact a planned series of crimes often committed for specific purposes, including the assassination of foreign dignitaries. Contract hits were mixed in with random murders in order to conceal the purpose of the crimes. (See online book, Programmed to Kill, by David McGowan)

1975 (September 5) – Lynette ‘Squeaky’ Fromme, who became the head of Charles Manson’s ‘Family’ after Manson was arrested in October 1969, is arrested and imprisoned for an attempted assassination of US President Gerald Ford. Another associate of the Manson Family, Sarah Jane Moore, will also be arrested and imprisoned for another failed assassination attempt on President Ford. If either woman had been successful, Nelson Rockefeller would have taken the presidency. 1975 – US Congressional hearings into Project MKULTRA are initiated by the Church Committee. Investigative efforts are hampered by the fact that CIA Director Richard Helms had illegally ordered all MKULTRA files to be destroyed in 1973, leaving the Church Committee with no other choice but to rely on the sworn testimony of direct participants and on the relatively small number of documents that survived Helms’ destruction order. The hearings will reveal that over 30 universities and institutions were involved in an “extensive testing and experimentation” program which included covert drug tests on unwitting citizens “at all social levels, high and low, native Americans and foreign.” All told, the program consisted of 149 projects at 80 universities and other institutions involving drug testing and a variety other studies on unwitting human subjects, including numerous studies using electromagnetic technologies. 1975 – Future serial killer and satanic cult member John Wayne Gacy is set up in a construction business in Chicago with financing provided by an unknown benefactor. 1975 – Helen Schucman publishes A Course In Miracles, based on her channelings. The book will become a New Age bible for millions of people. 1976 (July 29) – The first ‘Son of Sam’ killings allegedly by David Berkowitz in New York City. Six people will be killed and seven will be wounded before he is caught a year later, on August 10, 1977. During the killing spree, a number of cryptic and taunting notes from Son of Sam will be sent to reporters and investigators, claiming that he is taking orders from a neighbor’s dog. The case will be closed without any further investigation immediately after Berkowitz’s arrest, even though there are definite signs that others were involved. Queens' District Attorney John Santucci will reopen the case in 1979 after concluding that Berkowitz did not act alone. Berkowitz was an adopted child, and both families were Jewish. After his adopted mother died, his father remarried and moved to Florida in 1971, leaving David to live alone in New York. He spent time in the US Army between 1971 and 1974, stationed in Korea, and was a proficient marksman. When Berkowitz joined the army, he had entered a special program reportedly for ‘profiled’ candidates of an unspecified character, and was also taking hallucinogenic drugs for recreational purposes at one point. It was after his release from the military that he began to show paranoid delusions, believing that various people and dogs were possessed by demons. At the

time of the murders, he is working as a postal worker. Berkowitz may have been under mind-control and known the source of his programming. In the first handwritten missive he sent to the New York police, he wrote, “I am the ‘Son of Sam’. I am a little ‘brat’,” the possible implication being that he was an army brat. He also wrote, “I am on a different wave length than everybody else — programmed to kill.” After Berkowitz’s arrest, police will find numerous telephone numbers scrawled on the walls of his apartment, including the unlisted private home numbers of prominent doctors living on Long Island, the number for a large Scientology training center in Florida, and the number for the Montauk Golf and Racquet Club, an exclusive country club on Long Island that lies adjacent to the purportedly closed Camp Hero military base that has been tenuously linked by researchers to ongoing mind control operations. In 1997, Berkowitz will reveal to author/investigator Maury Terry that there were other people involved in the killings apart from himself, that he only killed three of the victims and wounded a forth, and the rest of the shootings were done by other members of the cult. Although he will refuse to discuss anything that relates to the cult, it will be determined that the Son of Sam group were part of a larger satanic network that extended across the country, with the local chapter having members from the Yonkers police department. Berkowitz will claim that their group performed animal sacrifices and made child pornography. Many of the victims they targeted had been involved in college prostitution rings that may have tied in to the satanic network. At the time of the murders, dead and mutilated dogs, mostly German Shepherds, have been turning up in the area. Berkowitz will name his neighbors, brothers John and Michael Carr, and their father Sam Carr, as members of this satanic group. John Carr is alleged to have been involved in satanism since high school, and was in the Air Force for many years until being discharged only a few months before the first Son of Sam murders. John Carr had been a staff sergeant stationed at Offutt AFB in Minot, North Dakota, and the headquarters of the satanic group he was associated with at the time was located in nearby Bismarck. Michael Carr was apparently a Scientology executive and was involved with one of its offshoots – most likely The Process Church, which had moved its headquarters from California to New York around the time that the Son of Sam murders started. John Carr will be found shot dead in a girlfriend's North Dakota apartment in 1978. Michael Carr will be killed in a car crash in New York City less than two years later. (See online book, The Ultimate Evil, by Maury Terry) 1976 (August 20) – The Allagash alien abduction incident involves four men (Jack and Jim Weiner, Charlie Foltz, and Chuck Rak) who are out camping near Allagash, Maine. They spot a strange light in the sky while fishing out on a lake at night. When one of them signals it with a flashlight, a beam of light shoots out from the craft and it comes towards them. They are

enveloped in the light, and in the next moment they find themselves back on shore, staring at the craft as it hovers nearby before suddenly disappearing into the night sky. The men are exhausted and go to bed for the night, not discussing the incident. Days later, they all start to have similar nightmares of strange beings with long necks and large heads. Years later, in 1988, Jim Weiner meets ufologist Raymond Fowler at a UFO conference and agrees to undergo regressive hypnosis. All four men take part, and they recall being abducted and undergoing physical examinations. Their descriptions of the aliens are consistent. Chuck Rak points out that he has trouble focusing clearly on the alien’s appearance, which suggests that the recalled memories were screen memories. 1976 (October) – Over the next year, 85 German shepherds and Dobermans will be found skinned and drained of blood in New York City. It is suspected that they were used in satanic ritual sacrifices. 1976 – First non-classified Remote Neural Monitoring device patented by Robert G. Malech (US patent #3951134, “Apparatus and method for remotely monitoring and altering brain waves”). At the time of it’s writing, this patent was only a conceptual idea and a prototype was never actually built and tested. It can be shown that the technology described within it wouldn’t be capable of what it claims, and would never have made it into the patent records if it was, since the military immediately classify any new patent application that has any possible weapons application, which this one obviously does. Nonetheless, this patent will come to be referred to or described in innumerable online documents and articles on mind-control technologies, influencing many people’s beliefs that this particular technology exists. It is very possible that this patent application was purposely put into the US Patent Office records in order to use it as disinformation. 1976 – The Soviets begin transmitting an extremely low frequency (ELF) electromagnetic signal that disrupts communications around the world. It is at a frequency that also has the potential to disrupt brainwaves. 1977 (February 14) – Frederick Cowan, a neo-fascist from New Rochelle, New York, who was suspended from work after quarreling with his Jewish boss, turns up at the plant with a small arsenal and proceeds to kill five people and wound two others before turning a gun on himself. According to serial killer David Berkowitz, Cowan had been involved with the Four Pi movement, a satanic cult that Berkowitz was also involved with. (See online book, The Ultimate Evil, by Maury Terry) 1977 (March) – Andrija Puharich and Dr. Robert Beck build a magnetic wave generator in the laboratory in Ossining and begin charting the effects of different ELF waves on humans. The dangerous implications of their findings

will lead them to prepare a scientific document and send it (hand carry it) to the political leaders of the western world: Carter, Trudeau, and Thatcher. Nothing will result. At this point or earlier, Puharich has learned that ELF waves can be used to enhance a person’s potential for telepathic communication. He is also aware that people’s brainwaves will fall into electromagnetic resonance when in close proximity. (See online book, Memories of a Maverick, by H.G.M. Hermans) 1977 (April) – Dr. William Joseph Bryan is found dead in Las Vegas on the eve of the House Select Committee on Assassinations starting an investigation into the assassination of Senator and Presidential hopeful Robert F. Kennedy by Sirhan Sirhan. 1977 (July 8) – 134 FBI agents, armed with search warrants and sledgehammers, simultaneously break into the offices of the Church of Scientology in Washington and Los Angeles and cart away 48,149 documents. These documents will reveal an astonishing espionage system that spanned the USA and penetrated some of the highest offices. (See book, Bare-Faced Messiah, by Russell Miller) 1977 (September) – After numerous articles in Hearst's S.F. Examiner and New West Magazine exposing the People’s Temple, Jim Jones begins an exodus of temple members to an isolated commune in Guyana. 1977 (October 17) – The first murder attributed to the Hillside Stranglers takes place in the Los Angeles area. By February 17, 1978, twelve more victims will die. The murderers will eventually be identified as Angelo Buono and Kenneth Bianchi. 1977 – Future serial killer and satanic cult member John Wayne Gacy is made a Precinct Captain in Chicago where he lives. He will be responsible for helping to fix Chicago elections so that only ‘special’ members of the Democratic Party are elected. 1977 – Hal Puthoff and Russell Targ publish their book, Mind Reach, in which they describe some of the successful early remote viewing experiments at SRI. 1977 – Project Dreamscan supposedly begins at Montauk. 1977 – On the Senate floor, Senator Ted Kennedy states: "The Deputy Director of the CIA revealed that over thirty universities and institutions were involved in an 'extensive testing and experimentation' program which included

covert drug tests on unwitting citizens 'at all social levels, high and low, native Americans and foreign." 1978 – At around this time, the US Army begins funding an operational remote-viewing program at Fort Meade, Maryland. Six volunteers from Army Intelligence are trained in remote viewing at SRI. 1978 (February 9) – the last murder attributed to Ted Bundy occurs. 1978 (February 17) – The last murder attributed to the Hillside Stranglers takes place. 1978 (February) – Future serial killer Richard Ramirez, who will become known as the Night Stalker, arrives in San Francisco and has a meeting with satanist Anton LaVey, as well as attending a Church of Satan ritual. From here, he moves on to Los Angeles, where he will eventually begin his killing spree in the years ahead. When he is finally caught, he will be visited in jail by LaVey’s daughter Zeena. 1978 (May) – Serial killer John Wayne Gacy is photographed with First Lady Rosalynn Carter, being congratulated as a Ward boss for the Chicago Democratic Party for a “job well done”. The photograph shows him wearing an ‘S’ pin, indicating to the Secret Service that he carries a special government clearance. At this time, he has a number of corpses buried under the crawlspace of his house. 1978 (June) – Jeffrey Dahmer kills his first victim, 19-year-old Steven Hicks, after picking him up hitchhiking and taking him home to drink and have sex. Afterwards, when Hicks tries to leave, Dahmer bludgeons him to death and stores the body in the crawlspace under his father’s house. Three days later, when it begins to smell, he decides to cut the body up into pieces and put them in garbage bags before burying them in the woods behind the house. Nine years will pass before he kills again. The murders will involve rape, dismemberment, necrophilia, and cannibalism. At the end of this year, Dahmer will enlist in the Army and be stationed in Germany. He will be discharged two years later due to alcoholism. Although Dahmer had grown up in a healthy family environment, by the age of six, after having surgery for a double hernia, he had become different. According to his father, “he grew more inward, sitting quietly for long periods, hardly stirring, his face oddly motionless.” This change would remain for the rest of his life. 1978 (August) – Andrija Puharich’s ‘Lab Nine’ research center permanently closes when someone burns it to the ground. Puharich flees to Mexico, claiming that the CIA are targeting him. Lab Nine has been involved up until this time in experimenting with children who showed psychic potential. It’s

very likely that these experiments were related to those that reportedly take place at Camp Hero (Montauk), Long Island. Little is known about what actually went on at Lab Nine, but reports by visitors state that many of the children being used in experiments there appeared to be very traumatized. It is possible that the CIA feared revelations about these children through a scandal involving Puharich’s associate Ira Einhorn, who at this time is being investigated for the murder of his former girlfriend Holly Maddux (for which he will be subsequently convicted). At the time of her disappearance, Maddux apparently possessed papers relating to the Puharich’s research with these children. It is also possible that what Puharich knew about psychic phenomena and/or the US government’s secret remote-viewing programs posed a threat to them, and they were making sure that this information didn’t get out. Up to this time, Puharich has been trying to alert the governments of the western world to the dangers of ELF waves. (See online file, Behind the Mask: Aliens or Cosmic Jokers?, by Lynn Picknett & Clive Prince) 1978 – According to Walter Bowart (author of Operation Mind Control), there are only 25 diagnosed cases of Multiple Personality Disorder (MPD) at this point in time. By the year 2000, there will be hundreds of thousands of diagnosed cases. This initial low number apparently doesn’t include cases of MPD prior to it being formally recognized as a medical condition, since the medical literature from the 18th and 19th centuries is filled with many such cases. 1978 – A woman by the name of Jenny O’Connor is introduced to the famous Esalen Institute in California by Sir John Whitmore, a former racecar driver who was involved with Andrija Puharich’s Round Table Foundation. O’Connor will become the channeller for ‘The Nine’, continuing the communications that first started at Puharich’s Round Table Foundation. The Nine will literally take over the administration of Esalen between 1979 and about 1982, which includes deciding who is hired or fired. Many of the people who attend O’Connor’s seminars will become prominent in political circles both in America and the USSR. Another participant at these seminars will be David M. Myers, who will go on to channel the Nine and publish at least one book about them, called Two Thirds. He will also work closely with Richard Hoagland in promoting the ‘Face on Mars’ controversy in the years ahead. (See online file, Behind the Mask: Aliens or Cosmic Jokers?, by Lynn Picknett & Clive Prince) 1978 – The Unabomber (allegedly Ted Kaczynski) begins his mail-bombing campaign, planting or mailing numerous home-made bombs to selected targets, eventually killing 3 people and injuring 23 others. The campaign will continue until Kaczynski is arrested in 1996.

Kaczynski had been a child prodigy, and had been accepted into Harvard University in 1958 at the age of 16. While there, he was a subject of mindcontrol experiments conducted by a Dr. Henry Murray. Later, he was an assistant professor at the University of California, Berkeley at age 25, but resigned two years later. In 1971, he moved to a remote cabin in Montana that had no electricity or running water, and lived as a recluse while learning survival skills, hoping to become self-sufficient. He decided to start his alleged bombing campaign after watching the wilderness around his home being destroyed by development. He believed that violent collapse was the only way to bring down the techno-industrial system. He will later write: “In a general way, I think what has to be done is […] try to increase tensions in society to the point where things start to break down. To create a situation where people get uncomfortable enough that they’re going to rebel. So the question is how do you increase those tensions?” That Kaczynski was angry about the mind-control experiments conducted on him at Harvard is suggested when he states in a letter to the New York Times that one of his targets was attacked because “its business is in the development of techniques for manipulating people's attitudes.” 1978 (November 18) – The Jonestown massacre occurs in Guyana, South America, under the direction of the psychopathic cult leader and CIA operative, Rev. Jim Jones, leader of the People’s Temple Church. Congressman Leo Ryan, who was actively investigating CIA-bred cults, is assassinated by cult members after he arrives at Jonestown to investigate reports of abuse made by former members. At about the same time that Ryan is murdered, the mass deaths of most of the population of Jonestown takes place. Ryan’s killers are described by witnesses as ‘zombies’, walking mechanically, without emotion, and “looking through you, not at you” as they fired their guns. The initial body count given by the US Army is 400, while claiming that another 700 people had fled into the jungle to escape their deaths. When none of these survivors fail to materialize, the excuse is made that they miscounted due to the fact that some of the dead had been hidden under the bodies of others. However, it is hard to conceive how 400 bodies could possibly conceal almost twice as many more, so the public was being lied to and a coverup of some sort was underway. A week after the massacre, the final official body count will be 916 dead and 16 survivors, but no explanation will be given as to where almost 200 others are. The cause of the deaths will be reported as cyanide poisoning by drinking tainted Kool-Aid, but the evidence will show that this is false. Most of the bodies are found to have needle injection marks located at the back of the left shoulder blade, while others had been strangled or shot, indicating a different scenario to the official one. Jim Jones (or a possible look-alike, as he was known to employ) is found shot in the head, and although it will be

reported as a suicide, the gun that was used is found 200 feet away from the body. A massive amount of drugs commonly used in MKULTRA mind-control programs are found at the site. This includes 11,000 doses of Thorazine, 20,000 doses of Demerol, stockpiles of sodium pentathol, chloral hydrate, thallium, and more. It will later be confirmed by Joseph Holsinger, one of Congressman Ryan’s aides, that the CIA was responsible for the formation of religious cults in the USA, stating that MKULTRA had shifted its programs from public institutions to private cult groups like the People’s Temple since 1963, and that a CIA rear-support base had been in collusion with Jim Jones to perform medical and mind control experiments. It will also be discovered by investigators that Jonestown was the pet project of Dr. Lawrence Laird Layton of the University of California at Berkeley, a former chemist for the Manhattan Project and head of the Army’s chemical warfare research division in the early 1950s. Layton had conceived, staffed, and financed the Jonestown project, and his own son was the man who had shot and killed Congressman Ryan. Another CIA agent within the inner ranks at Jonestown is Richard Dwyer. Reports by a number of survivors reveal how harsh living conditions were at Jonestown. Infractions of the rules or disloyalty had resulted in increasingly harsh punishments, including public humiliation, forced drugging, physical torture, sensory isolation in an underground box, and public sexual rape. The inhabitants of this tightly run concentration camp setting had also been subjected to medical and psychiatric experimentation. Beatings and verbal abuse were commonplace. Only the special guards were treated humanely and fed decently, while everyone else survived mostly on rice, bread, and rancid meat. Prior to their fatal end, those living at Jonestown would be regularly put through ‘suicide drills’. A number of the Jonestown survivors will end up being murdered after returning to the USA, quite possibly to assure their silence. The mass ‘suicide’ appears to have been ordered at the last minute by somebody other than Jim Jones, since he had been murdered as well, just when Congressman Ryan was about to expose the situation at Jonestown. He was becoming a serious threat to the CIA’s secret involvement in this and many other mindcontrol cults that had been cropping up in recent years. The CIA apparently had a number of their agents within Jones’ elite ranks (who all survived), and ordered them to pull the plug and eliminate everyone, including Ryan, so that no information could leak out about what had really been going on and who had been involved. Immediately after the massacre, World Vision, a CIA front organization, will develop a scheme to repopulate the Jonestown site with CIA-linked mercenaries from Laos.

(See online file, CIA Cults and the Global Brainwashing Experiment: The Untold Story of the Jonestown Massacre, by John Judge) 1978 – At about this time, a man named John Todd begins speaking out about his alleged involvement with the top levels of the Illuminati. He claims to have been a member of their Grand Druid Council. He names the Rothschild family as the ultimate head of this Luciferian secret society, with the Rockefellers acting as its American head. Todd reveals that the Illuminati seek to bring in the Anti-Christ, and are constantly on the lookout for an ideal candidate to play this crucial part in the unfolding of their plans for world conquest. It is certain that this candidate, whoever it might be, will have undergone the most extensive mind-control programming possible. 1978 – At about this time, the Texas House Select Committee on Child Pornography discloses that investigators probing leads to organized crime in Houston, Dallas, and other major cities found that slave auctions for sixteenand seventeen-year-old boys are routinely held in Mexico. Some of the boys are featured in brutal snuff or ‘slasher’ movies. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1979 – William Moore and Charles Berlitz release their book, The Philadelphia Experiment: Project Invisibility, detailing the events that allegedly took place in 1943 involving the USS Eldridge. It is an instant bestseller. 1979 – Publication of The Andreasson Affair, by Raymond E. Fowler. This is the first of three books he will write about the alleged alien abduction experiences of Betty Andreasson Luca. 1979 – Ufologist Bruce Maccabee begins his secret involvement with the CIA. 1979 – Ted Gunderson ‘retires’ from the FBI after 29 years of service and opens a private detective agency. Gunderson had headed the FBI field offices in Memphis, Dallas, and Los Angeles and was an expert in counterintelligence. During his career, Gunderson had been a vociferous defender of the FBI, acting as their media spokesperson during the Watergate scandal and publicly supporting the COINTELPRO tactics used in the 50s and 60s, claiming that such extreme measures were necessary. After ‘retiring’, he will go on to lead investigations into a number of controversial cases that link to an international drug/child sex trafficking network involving people at the highest levels of government. His real agenda in these investigations will be to contain the situation, gather intelligence, and spread disinformation. He will work tirelessly over the years in helping to raise a satanic scare among the public, which will effectively backfire when psychiatrists and childcare workers who report claims of satanic ritual abuse by their clients are accused of planting false memories of these incidents. For all of Gunderson’s years of

investigation, nothing positive will result and doubt and confusion over the whole issue will only multiply. (See online file, Ted Gunderson: Death of a Public Paranoid) 1979 - CompuServe becomes the first computer network to offer email service to personal computer users. 1980 – MKULTRA mind-control victim Cathy O’Brien will claim that during this year she was programmed at Fort Campbell, Kentucky, by Lt. Col. Michael Aquino of the US Army. Aquino is a self-confessed neo-Nazi and devout Satanist. He will use barbaric trauma techniques on both Cathy and her daughter Kelly that involve NASA technology. Aquino is the founder of the Temple of Set, and holds top-secret clearance in the DIA's Psychological Warfare Division. He is also deputy director of reserve training at the Presidio Army Base in San Francisco. He will be charged (but never tried or convicted) for the ritual and sexual abuse of children at the Presidio Army Base day care center in the years ahead, leading to his involuntary discharge from the Army. Cathy O’Brien is a ‘presidential model’ Monarch sex slave, meaning that she is specially programmed to cater to the sexual perversions of the highestranking politicians in the USA. During her time as a sex slave (which started as a child), she services a number of well-known politicians, including Bill and Hilary Clinton, Ronald Reagan, Pierre Trudeau, Brian Mulroney, George H.W. Bush, Dick Cheney, Governors Lamar Alexander and Richard Thornburgh, Bill Bennett, Senator Patrick Leahy, Senator Robert Byrd (who is her handler) and Arlen Spector. O'Brien will eventually give testimony before the US Senate regarding the events she was forced to go through and she will name her perpetrators, and not one of these men will challenge her or accuse her of slander. (See online book, Trans-Formation of America, by Cathy O’Brien and Mark Phillips) 1980 – William Moore and Charles Berlitz coauthor and publish The Roswell Incident, which is the first book to come out about this alleged crash. 1980 – Emma ‘Christy’ Christensen, the daughter of William S. Sadler, receives an apparently audible ‘message’ from ‘unseen friends’, who are believed to be the same supernal beings who provided the Urantia material. 1980 – Andrija Puharich is invited to live at the estate of Richard Joshua Reynolds (Reynolds dynasty), where he is able to conduct research studying the effects of electromagnetic fields on brain waves. 1980 – Paul Bennewitz, a scientist and amateur UFO investigator, becomes the target of a UFO hoax initiated by government agents. It begins when he

and another UFO investigator, Dr. Leo Sprinkle, hear the story of a young woman named Judy Doraty, who claims that she and her son had been abducted by aliens and taken to an underground base where they were examined and implanted with alien devices. She claims that while at the base, she saw large vats with human body parts floating in them. CAT scans paid for by Bennewitz reportedly confirms the existence of the implants in the woman and her son. Bennewitz comes to believe that “at least 300,000 or more in the USA and at least 2,000,000 if not more worldwide” have been implanted with cerebral control devices by the aliens, although his means of detecting these implants is questionable: “You can recognize them because of their eyes... [a] peculiar look in the eyes and a funny smile.” Bennewitz, who owns an electronics research laboratory, attempts to detect the electromagnetic signals that he believes the aliens are using to control the woman, in order to find out a way to shield against them. In late 1979, he had told members of the Aerial Phenomena Research Organization (APRO) that he was detecting these low frequency signals, and that he had begun to make calculations about electronic and propulsive techniques employed by the aliens. At the same time, from his home in Albuquerque, New Mexico, he had been photographing unidentified lights in the area of the Manzano Nuclear Weapons Storage Facility east of Kirtland Air Force Base. He believed that he had “established constant direct communication with the Alien using a computer and a form of Hex Decimal Code with Graphics and print-out.” The communication method also involved asking the aliens questions telepathically when a UFO was in sight. Bennewitz comes to believe that he has located two underground alien bases in the New Mexico desert, and begins collecting evidence, hiring a helicopter to take photographs of the sites. He claims to have captured images of saucer craft, beam weapons, and aliens on the ground. However, when the film is developed, these images are inexplicably missing. Bennewitz goes on to produce a written report on his research titled Project Beta, which includes a study of alien psychology, as well as proposed means by which the military might destroy the alien bases – using his own company, Thunder Electronics, as a sub-contractor for his own beam weapon inventions. Throughout all this, Bennewitz was in close touch with a military officer named Major Edwards at the Manzano facility, and through him, was able to give several presentations to ‘high-level’ Air Force personnel at the base. UFO writer/researcher William Moore will later explain that “[Bennewitz] had innocently stumbled on a signal used in a secret Air Force experiment that was totally unrelated to UFOs. He was approached by security officers who tried to get him to disconnect this equipment and to stop monitoring their electromagnetic tests. The more they did this, of course, the more Bennewitz was convinced they had something to hide (which was true) and that it had to do with UFOs (which was false). And he refused to comply.”

The hoax is stepped up in an attempt to lead Bennewitz into discrediting himself. People with apparent implant scars begin to come to him more frequently with their abduction stories, and Bennewitz begins to have a number of his own abduction experiences. By early September, William Moore is contacted by a “well-placed individual within the intelligence community who claimed to be directly connected to a high-level project dealing with UFOs.” This man, known only as ‘Falcon’, claims that he is part of a group that wants to expose the continuing government cover-up of UFOs. Moore goes along with the man in the hopes of gaining access to government UFO information. Acting as liaison between Moore and this group is Sgt. Richard Doty, who will later be found to have been working for AFOSI and trained in disinformation and psychological operations. Moore soon learns that his own role is to provide information on Bennewitz in exchange for ‘sensitive’ information on UFOs. He also learns that several government agencies are collaborating together to discredit Bennewitz by passing him disinformation. By 1982, the alien scenario that Bennewitz is being fed will be adopted into the belief structure held by a large portion of the UFO community in the years ahead, where malevolent grey aliens are abducting humans, mutilating cattle, farming hybrids, and implanting humans with control devices. These aliens, as the story went, had made a secret treaty with the US government, in which they would be allowed to operate an underground base in Dulce, New Mexico, and abduct a certain number of humans for experimentation, and in exchange for this they had given alien technology to the US government. To add further excitement to the plot, there was also a benevolent group of aliens intent on stopping the destructive greys from ravaging the planet. Eventually, Bennewitz will have a nervous breakdown due to the stress induced by the situation, and he will be hospitalized and placed under psychiatric care. Many other up-and-coming UFO researchers/investigators will be unwittingly manipulated in the years ahead and provided with false documents and disinformation that will continue to promote this belief system and lead it along with enough intrigue and sensationalism to capture and hold the attention of as many willing believers as possible. (See online file, Mind Control, World Control, by Jim Keith) 1980 (December 8) – Mark David Chapman murders John Lennon outside Lennon’s residence at the Dakota Hotel in New York City. When Chapman sees Lennon, he hears a voice in his head saying, “Do it! Do it! Do it!” After the shooting, Chapman sits down on the curb and begins reading a copy of the book, The Catcher in the Rye, by J. D. Salinger, and waits for the police to arrive. Inside the book, he had written, “This is my statement.” The book is known to be prescribed to mind-control victims by their programmers. A few months after the shooting, Chapman will send a handwritten statement to The New York Times, urging everyone to read The Catcher in the Rye,

calling it an “extraordinary book that holds many answers.” Even though his lawyers believe they can get him off with an insanity plea, Chapman will decide to plead guilty after a voice in his head that he attributes to God commands him to do so. Chapman’s father was a staff sergeant in the U.S. Air Force, which ties him to the military as a possible target for mind-control programs. Chapman will state that as a boy, he lived in fear of his father, who was physically abusive towards his mother and unloving towards him. Such fear and abuse within the family are further signs of a possible mind-control situation. He also had suicidal tendencies, and had tried to kill himself by carbon monoxide asphyxiation in 1977, which led to him spending time at Castle Memorial Hospital for depression. He was later hired to work at the hospital. Chapman had also been an employee of World Vision in 1975, and had worked at a refugee camp in Ft. Chaffee, Arkansas, as well as several other refugee camps in various foreign countries. Chapman would accompany his World Vision employer to meetings with government officials, and even had a chance to shake hands with Gerald Ford at one of these meetings. World Vision works with refugees worldwide, and is a CIA front company involved in recruiting mercenaries in foreign countries. It has links to Rev. Jim Jones and his Jonestown community in Guyana. John Hinckley Sr., the father of the man who attempted to assassinate President Reagan, is a high-ranking official at World Vision. He is also a close friend of George Bush Sr. and the owner of Vanderbilt Oil. After leaving World Vision, Chapman became a security guard for a while, and took a week-long course that qualified him to carry a firearm. Chapman began planning the assassination three months before the incident, and had confided to his wife about his obsession to kill Lennon, even showing her his gun and ammunition. She failed to report it. He made an appointment to see a clinical psychologist, but never showed up. The doorman at Lennon’s residence was an anti-Castro exile from Cuba. It has been alleged that he had worked for the CIA as far back as 1961, and had even participated in the failed Bay of Pigs invasion. Lennon had long known that he was being monitored by the FBI and his phones were tapped, and he even stated that if something should ever happen to him, it would be no accident. 1980 – At this point in time, nearly twenty serial killers are reported each year in the USA. 1981 (January) - The Law of One books (also known as The Ra Material) begin to be channeled by Carla Rueckert, Don Elkins, and Jim McCarty (founders of L/L Research), and will continue until 1984. The entity that is channeled will describe itself as belonging to a Council that consists of nine

members, and, when asked, will affirm that this Council is the same group that identified themselves as ‘The Nine Principles and Forces’ that were contacted through Andrija Puharich’s Round Table Foundation many years earlier (see sessions 7.9 and 7.10). The transcripts of these more recent channeling sessions reveal that Carla Rueckert, Don Elkins, and Jim McCarty are in contact with Puharich (see sessions 7.11, 12.1, 12.10, 21.3, 23,11, 39.4, and 84.7). The Ra Material places humans in a greater cosmic scheme of things that pits positive forces against negative forces within cycles of incarnations and stages of spiritual development where we humans move towards one extreme or the other through free-will choice, with an eventual ‘harvest’ of souls at the end of these cycles. The material presents the idea that many of us are born into our lives as ‘Wanderers’, using this as a method to entice followers through their own wishful thinking. There is no critical questioning by Rueckert, Elkins, or McCarty about the validity of the material being offered, and they even seem to grasp the rather deep philosophy quite easily, as though they’re already familiar with it. The questions being asked the entities are focused strictly on these philosophies, and completely ignore anything that might be insightful relating to science, history, etc., that would qualify these entities as advanced beings worthy of listening to. There is nothing within the Ra Material that hasn’t already been introduced by one person or another in our past as beliefs or ideas about the human condition and the nature of reality. 1981 (March 30) – The attempted assassination of newly-elected President Ronald Reagan by John Hinckley Jr. If Hinckley had been successful, Reagan’s position as President would have been taken over by the Vice President, George Bush Sr. Interestingly, Hinckley’s father, John Hinckley Sr., is a good friend and neighbor of George Bush, and as owner of Vanderbilt Oil, a fellow oil tycoon. He is also president of World Vision, which acts as a front organization for the CIA’s mercenary training camps. Bush’s son Neil even had dinner with Hinckley’s older brother Scott the night after the assassination attempt on Reagan. Hinckley is obsessed with the actress Jodie Foster, and believes that assassinating Reagan will win her heart. He identifies strongly with the character of Travis Bickle in the movie Taxi Driver, played by Robert DeNiro, and is emulating him – in the movie, Bickle attempts to assassinate a presidential candidate in the belief that it will please the woman he loves. Prior to this event, Hinckley had stalked Jimmy Carter during his 1979 presidential campaign, which resulted in him being arrested for possession of firearms at the Nashville Airport. After this previous incident, Hinckley’s parents sent him to see a psychiatrist named John Hopper. Hopper didn’t think there were any signs of mental illness, and recommended that Hinckley’s parents cut him off financially and evict him from their home. This was just prior to the attempt on Reagan’s life, and seems to have been the catalyst for the act. After the assassination attempt, a copy of J. D. Salinger’s The Catcher in the Rye will be found in the hotel room where Hinckley has

been staying. Interestingly, Hinckley will claim that he met with serial killer David Berkowitz while in Colorado. Hinckley was able to get very close to Reagan as he was leaving the Washington Hilton, and fired off six shots in three seconds. Although Reagan was hit, there is reason to believe that the bullet didn’t come from Hinckley’s gun. Reagan will only feel pain from the bullet after he has been shoved into the back seat of his limousine by a Secret Service agent, and at first thinks that the pain is caused by the agent’s gun pressing against him as the agent lays over him to shield him from gunfire. Later forensics will show that none of Hinckley’s bullets could have hit Reagan, and it seems that the Secret Service agent was the one who actually shot Reagan. Hinckley was using hollow-point bullets that shatter on impact, causing maximum damage, but Reagan will not show any signs that such a bullet hit him. Hinckley will be found innocent by reason of insanity, and remain incarcerated at St. Elizabeth’s Hospital in Washington, DC. He will have Secret Service agents watching him 24 hours a day, 365 fays a year. Why? What is so important about Hinckley that the President’s special security men must keep such a close eye on him? 1981 (July 27) – The abduction of six-year-old Adam Walsh in Hollywood, Florida will lead to his father John Walsh creating and hosting the FOX TV show, America’s Most Wanted. Adam’s decapitated head will be the only remains ever recovered. Years later, Ottis Toole, a serial killer with ties to a satanic ring called the Hand of Death, will confess to killing Adam. The widespread publicity of this case will result in the implementation of federal DNA, fingerprint, and sexual offender databases. Despite that these technologies will be put into place under the guise of protecting children, there will still be a record number of unsolved disappearances taking place every year, and sexual offenders will continue to prey on victims. 1981 – ARPANET is expanded when the National Science Foundation develops the Computer Science Network. (CSNET). The number of host sites is 213, and new ones will be added regularly. These are all military sites, universities, or research centers. 1981 – The NSA becomes responsible for detailing trusted computing and network platform specifications, meaning that they can easily secure hidden functions in any computer architecture. This gives them the ability to surreptitiously insert spyware or malware in any computer, which would be completely undetectable (even to computer manufacturers and technicians). Computer chips that have other functions, such as for transmitting electronic mind-control signals, could also be designed and surreptitiously inserted as well.

1981 – UFO researcher and hypnotist Budd Hopkins publishes his book, Missing Time, in which he discusses the purported ‘alien abduction’ phenomenon, based on the retrieved memories of hypnotized subjects. 1982 – Vern Grimsley, founder of the Family of God Foundation, awakes one morning with a sudden compelling urge to purchase new property for his organization. Around this same time, he claims he is hearing voices that are from the same higher beings who wrote the Urantia Book, and that they warn of an impending world war that will be followed by a nuclear holocaust. A month later, while viewing the vacated St. Anthony's College campus with a realtor, he hears an audible voice from no apparent source telling him, “This is it!” The site is surrounded by a number of different military installations, as well as the Livermore Nuclear Research Laboratory, all of which are within a thirty-mile radius of it. (See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1982 (September 5) – Twelve-year-old Johnny Gosch is abducted from a shopping mall parking lot in West Des Moines, Iowa, while doing his paper route. He is never seen again. Years later, during an interview with private investigator Ted Gunderson, child abductee and sex slave victim Paul Bonacci will reveal that, as a child, he was directly involved in Gosch’s abduction, having acted as a lure to draw Gosch into the hands of his pedophile abductors. The abduction was reportedly ordered by Lt. Col. Michael Aquino. After the abduction, Johnny is taken to a farmhouse where he is held for two weeks until Michael Aquino comes to pick him up and take him to Colorado. Both Gosch and Bonacci are used for the pedophiliac pleasures of highranking government officials, which will tie in with the Presidio case in 1986, the Finders case in 1987, and the Franklin case in 1988, as part of a deeper satanic network operated by very rich and powerful people. The police chief in West Des Moines, who fails to do anything in the Gosch case, will also be linked to the Franklin case. 1982 (October 20) – Robin Gecht, a 28-year-old carpenter-electrician who had worked for serial killer John Wayne Gace in the past, is arrested for the vicious slashing of an 18-year-old prostitute. This case will open a Pandora’s box of depravity, sadism, Satan worship, and cannibalism that involves nearly a score of Chicago-area women. Within a week of Gecht’s release on bond for the attack on the prostitute, another woman will claim to have been attacked by him, leading to his re-arrest. 1982 – Around this time, Operation Clydes Dale is purportedly initiated as a Special Operations Group to identify, track down, and exterminate the pedophiles who are kidnapping children from the streets of New York City and using them to make pedophile porn films. Some of the children are being killed in snuff films, some are sold into white slavery, and others are

programmed and used in projects similar to Project Monarch. All the children are being tortured in satanic rituals. 1983 (June) – After being arrested for illegal possession of a firearm, Henry Lee Lucas begins confessing to a long string of gruesome murders spanning almost a decade. His partner in crime, Ottis Toole, will corroborate his involvement in over 100 murders. Lucas’ willingness to confess to all these murders allows authorities to take advantage of this in order to close the files on many unsolved cases, and so Lucas probably admitted to many murders that he didn’t actually commit. He will claim to have been working for a large satanic cult network called the Hand of Death. According to Lucas, this network involved wealthy and powerful people, and Lucas and Toole performed contract hits and child abductions for them. He will state that he delivered the children to ranches in Juarez and Matamoros, Mexico, where they were used in child pornography and ritual sacrifices. Years later, a mass grave will be found exactly where Lucas had said. In 1998, Lucas will become the only inmate on death row to ever have his sentence commuted by thenGovernor of Texas George W. Bush. Lucas’ partner Ottis Toole will similarly have his sentence commuted in Florida by then-Governor Jeb Bush. This raises the question about whether Lucas and Toole might have helped to cover up murders that were tied to the Bushes. (See online book, There’s Something About Henry, by David McGowan) 1983 (August) – The Manhattan Beach Police Department in California begin an investigation regarding allegations of sexual abuse occurring at the McMartin Preschool. Altogether, approximately 400 children will be evaluated by therapists. All interviews will be videotaped and 350 children will disclose sexual behavior. Almost all the victims will show physical signs of abuse. Seven teachers at the preschool (six women and one male) will be named as having molested them. These individuals will be charged with 209 counts of child molestation. The child victims will describe sexual abuse, child prostitution, and child pornography occurring on school grounds and at various other locations. There will be descriptions of animal sacrifices as well as being urinated and defecated on. Children will state that the adults sometimes dressed in black robes, formed a circle around them and chanted. They will tell of being forced to witness and participate in the ritual torture, killing and mutilation of animals and, on occasion, of human babies and children as well. They will also describe being forced to drink the blood and eat the flesh of the slaughtered corpses, witnessing the beheading of infants, and being forced to stab infants themselves. Other local preschools will be tied to the case and 60 more victims will give reports of similar activities. The McMartin victims will also describe a tunnel system that is used to secretly transport them in and out of the school to where they were taken to be tortured. Law enforcement officers and the media will treat the claim of

tunnels as a fantasy and only a superficial search will be made, turning up nothing. Parents of the victims will eventually have a second search conducted when the property is sold in April 1990, and the tunnels will be found. Charges against five of the seven defendants in the case will inexplicably be dropped. The first parent to lodge a complaint in the McMartin case will receive threats before turning up dead just before her scheduled testimony. A private investigator hired by the victim’s parents will also turn up dead on the eve of his scheduled testimony. 1983 (October 10) – While traveling in West Germany on “official NATO business”, Lt. Col. Michael Aquino stages a satanic ‘working’ at the Wewelsburg Castle in Bavaria, attempting to invoke Nazi SS chief Heinrich Himmler. 1983 – Vern Grimsley has over 100 channellings, some even while he’s sleeping. The communications warn him of a coming nuclear war, and provide survival strategies. He begins preparing his compound and stockpiling arms. 1983 - George Bush Sr. allegedly begins sodomizing and electrocuting Project Monarch slave Cathy O’Brien’s three and a half year old daughter Kelly. Furthermore, constant threats are made by Bush on Kelly's life in order to keep Cathy in line. He also tells her that he is an ET and can activate a holographic image within Cathy's mind that would make him appear to change into a lizard-like alien creature. (See online book, Trans-Formation of America, by Cathy O’Brien and Mark Phillips) 1983 – MILNET splits off from ARPANET. The first desktop computer workstations become available. 1983 – The closure of the Camp Hero facility at Montauk, Long Island, NY. 1983 – DARPA begins research into ‘brain-computer interfacing’. 1983 – At about this time, crack cocaine begins flooding the streets of Los Angeles and in other US cities soon after, causing an epidemic drug problem unlike any time before in history. Street gangs develop into national networks and are essentially militarized as a result, establishing their territories and enforcing their share of the market. This leads to an influx of guns and the increased crime and violence that come with them. This rapidly growing problem is a direct result of the supposed ‘War on Drugs’, which was an excuse for various US government agencies (including the CIA, FBI, BATF, and DEA) to eliminate the existing South American drug cartels and take over the illicit drug markets themselves, funneling the profits into black projects being conducted by those agencies. This epidemic problem will also give the government an excuse to increase the size of police forces and give

them excessive powers of search and seizure, entrapment, and the recruitment and use of informants. 1984 (March 17) – An unnamed gunman is arrested near the White House who claims that he has been injected with a ‘crystalline implant’ that was broadcasting messages telling him to kill the president. (See online file, Mind Control, World Control, by Jim Keith) 1984 (July) – Ritual abuse is uncovered at West Point military base when a three-year-old girl finds herself in the emergency room of the West Point Hospital with a lacerated vagina. She tells the examining physician that a teacher at the daycare center had hurt her. By the end of the year, fifty children will be interviewed by investigators. Children at West Point will tell stories that will become horrifyingly familiar. They will report that they had been ritually abused. They will report having had excrement smeared on their bodies and being forced to eat feces and drink urine. They will say they were taken away from the day care center and photographed. Despite abundant medical and psychological evidence and literally dozens of child witnesses, and despite 950 interviews by 60 FBI agents assigned to the investigation, the investigation, led by former US Attorney (and future mayor of New York) Rudolph Giuliani will produce no federal grand jury indictments. 1984 (December 11) – Fellow UFO researchers William Moore and Jaime Shandera receive the controversial MJ-12 documents, contained on film that is anonymously delivered to Shandera’s mailbox. 1984 – A fictionalized account of the Philadelphia Experiment is released in theatres in the USA. The US government immediately forces an injunction, banning it. The injunction will be overturned two years later in 1986, at which time the movie is released on video. Why would the government ban this movie from public release? This only seems reasonable if there is actually some truth to this strange story. Stopping the release of the movie might have been a purposeful ploy to bring the story to the attention of conspiracy theorists and other fringe groups, in order to popularize the more outrageous aspects of it so that certain important truths buried within them – such as its association with T. Townsend Brown and his work – are discredited. If Brown’s work with the US Navy had been successful in making battleships invisible to radar, it is very likely that this had since become part of the new stealth technology for aircraft, or even antigravity technology, and a disinformation campaign was being conducted to cover this up. 1984 – Scottish inventor Sandy Kidd succeeds in building an antigravity device that uses gyroscopes attached to the ends of a crossarm. When the device was turned on, it levitated three inches off the workbench.

(See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1984 – The USAF seizes 89,000 acres of public land surrounding Groom Lake in Nevada (Area 51). 1984 - Carla Rueckert publishes The Ra Material, a collection of channeled information. This published information will become a huge hit among the New Age movement and take on a cult-like following. 1984 – The cult group, Order of the Solar Temple is founded in France by Jo Di Mambro and Luc Jouret. Di Mambro was inspired by the Ancient and Mystic Order Rosae Crucis (AMORC) during his involvement with them from 1956 to 1969. The Order of the Solar Temple is involved in promoting their New Age philosophy and the belief that the universe is nearing a great change. The Order consists of three levels of initiation or ‘clubs’. The Amanta Club is involved with disseminating the group's philosophy and bringing together a spiritual elite in order to achieve a higher state of consciousness. The Archedia Club is involved with providing selected members with more advanced knowledge. The International Knighthood Organization has access to special publications and to initiations exclusive to its members. Di Mambro presents himself to members as a representative of higher beings and the receiver and transmitter of divine messages, which he receives during group ceremonies. These messages will become apocalyptic in nature, with the leaders and members believing that Earth will one day be destroyed and that they will be the sole survivors. They will see themselves as unique beings, set apart from the masses through their discovery of the truth, and they will believe that they have a special mission to accomplish. Gradually, the feeling that they are different will lead them to believe that they have little in common with the rest of the world. The Order believed in the existence of an original source of consciousness to which members of the group would one day return. This latter point is similar to what is stated in The Ra Material put out by Carla Rueckert, Don Elkins, and Jim McCarty. 1984 - Paul Bonacci is an eyewitness to the ritual rape and murder of a young boy at the Bohemian Grove while being forced to take part in a homosexual snuff film. 1984 – The Gittinger Assessment Center is established at Hocking College, serving as a site for training, resources, information, data collection, and future development of the PAS. 1984 – George W. Bush is implicated in a Brownsville, Texas, mass murder, in which 17 people have been ritualistically murdered and skinned. Bush had disappeared for three days, during which time the murders happened, and he is unable to explain where he had been at the time or what he had been doing. The people murdered were allegedly members of a satanic cult that Bush also belonged to. His father, Vice President George Bush, will stop investigations into the matter. Brownsville is directly across the border from

Matamoros, where several mass gravesites connected to satanic cults will be discovered in several years time. Serial killer Henry Lee Lucas, whose death sentence Bush will commute in 1998, will provide authorities with information on at least one of these sites. 1985 – By this year, the number of murdered women in Washington suspected of being victims of the Green River Killer, going back to 1982, reaches 45. The main suspect, Gary Leon Ridgway, will continue to avoid arrest until 2001. Over the next few years, he will begin visiting the Vancouver area in Canada. There will be eyewitness accounts of him in Vancouver in the close company of future serial killer, Robert Pickton. 1985 - A ranch is uncovered in Kerrville, Texas. The ranch, run by a family of German immigrants, is found to be holding 75 human slaves, many of them acquired when they were young teenagers. The property is patrolled by armed guards who keep the slaves chained together and routinely torture them with electric cattle prods. Whenever one of the slaves was killed, the body was burned to dispose of the evidence. The Texas Rangers eventually raid the property, but only after routinely ignoring steady reports of strange happenings at the ranch. It will take the state of Texas almost two full years to bring the case to trial. When it is all over with, the rancher and one of his sons will receive extraordinarily light sentences for their crimes: 15 years for one, and 14 for the other. Another indicted son will be acquitted and walk away a free man. 1985 – Quantum Computer Services Inc., which later becomes America Online Inc. launches the first online service, Q-Link, on the Commodore 64. 1985 – Allegations of ritual abuse at the Jubilation Day Care Center at Fort Bragg erupt when several children report being sexually abused by a number of people at the day care center and at several locations away from the center, including at least two churches. Lt. Col. Michael Aquino is identified as having been present at one of those churches. 1986 (March 23) – 11-year-old Ricky Chadek is abducted in Omaha, Nebraska, the same state where Johnny Gosch went missing four years earlier. (See online file, Child Trafficking and Mind Control in the Heartland - My Cost of Child Advocacy, by David Shurter) 1986 (November) – The first allegations emerge regarding sexual abuse being perpetrated at the US Army’s Presidio Child Development Center in San Francisco. Alarmed by accusations made by her child, a parent seeks medical examination that confirms that the three-year-old boy had in fact been anally raped. The boy identifies his rapist as ‘Mr. Gary,’ a teacher at the center named Gary Hambright. It will take the Army almost a month to notify the parents of other children who have been in Hambright's class that the

incident had taken place. Within a year, at least 60 victims will be identified, all between the ages of three and seven, and further allegations will be made by parents that several more children have been molested even after an investigation has begun. Victims will tell of being taken to private homes to be abused, and at least three houses will be positively identified. They will also describe being urinated and defecated upon, and being forced to ingest urine and feces. Irrefutable medical evidence will document the fact that these children were abused, including five who had contracted chlamydia, and many others will show clear signs of anal and genital trauma consistent with violent penetration. Even before the abuse is exposed, the children were exhibiting radical changes in behavior, including temper outbursts, sudden mood shifts, and poor impulse control. Both Lt. Col Michael Aquino and his wife Lilith will be positively identified by victims as two of the perpetrators. At least one victim will be able to positively identify Aquino's home and describe with uncanny accuracy the distinctively satanic interior of the house. Only Hambright will ever be charged for abusing one child, and these charges will be dismissed three months later. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1986 – A woman named Eulice (Lisa) Washington tells Youth Care Worker Julie Walters, as documented in her Department of Social Services March 25, 1986 report, that Lawrence King ran a massive child sex, homosexual, and pornography industry. She describes how beginning in tenth grade, she had been taken by plane by King, with other youths, to be used as a child prostitute at parties in Washington, Chicago, and New York. Lisa states that at these parties, she sat “looking pretty and innocent” and guests could engage in any sexual activity they wanted except penetration. She names Vice President George Bush as in attendance at these parties at least twice, according to Walters’ report. Lisa states she had first met Mr. Bush at the Dallas 1984 Republican Convention. She also claims to have seen Vice President George Bush Sr. at a party in Chicago in September or October of 1984, accompanied by two large white males. Walters’ report states: “She [Lisa] indicates that she set [sic] on a table at the party while wearing nothing but a negligee. She stated that George Bush saw her on the table. She stated she saw Vice President George Bush pay King money, and that Bush left the party with a nineteen year old black boy named Brent.” According to the Chicago Tribune of October 31, 1984, George Bush Sr. was in Illinois campaigning for congressional candidates at the end of October, 1984. Walters’ report indicates that Lisa said she saw George Bush Sr. again at a party hosted by Lawrence King in Washington, DC, in which there were no women, only men perfectly made-up to look like women, older men and men in their younger twenties. She said she saw sodomy committed at those parties. (See online book, George Bush: The Unauthorized Biography, by Webster G. Tarpley & Anton Chaitkin)

1986 – ARPANET expands further when the National Science Foundation provides access to supercomputer sites in the US from research and education organizations. 1987 (February 4) – Two men – Michael Houlihan and Douglas Ammerman – are picked up on multiple counts of child abuse. They are found traveling in a van with six children ranging in age from two to seven years old. The children are dirty, barely clothed, and covered in insect bites, while the two men are well dressed. They claim they are going to Mexico to take part in a special school for “smart kids”. The van is found to belong to an organization in Washington, DC, called ‘The Finders’. A search of two of the offices of this organization results in the discovery that sex orgies and satanic activity had taken place at these locations, including a murder. A large collection of photographs of nudes, believed to be members of the Finders, is also obtained. Documents seized in the investigation reveal detailed instructions for obtaining children for unspecified purposes. The instructions include the impregnation of female members of the Finders community, purchasing children, trading, and kidnapping. Further evidence suggests that this is part of an international satanic pedophile ring. Numerous files seized relate to activities of the organization in different parts of the world, including London, Germany, the Bahamas, Japan, Hong Kong, Malaysia, Africa, Costa Rica, and Europe. Files are also seized that contain intelligence information on private families not related to the Finders. The intelligence gathering process appears to be have been a systematic response to local newspaper advertisements for babysitters, tutors, etc. A member of the Finders would respond to the ad and gather as much information as possible about the habits, identity, occupation, etc., of the family. What this information was used for is still unknown. There was also a large amount of data that had been collected on various childcare organizations. The police report on the case is classified secret. The investigation soon becomes a CIA ‘internal matter’. No further information is made available and no further action is taken. 1987 (August 11) – Dr. Bernard J. Eastlund, a physicist and expert on oilfield development, is working as a consultant for the Atlantic Richfield Oil Company (ARCO) when he is issued US Patent #4,686,605 for a technology he developed that will quickly be implemented as HAARP (High Altitude Auroral Research Project) in Gakona, Alaska. Using Eastlund’s technology, HAARP is capable of irradiating the upper atmosphere with electromagnetic energy for a variety of purposes, including over-the-horizon radar, weather modification, and mass mind-control. Eastlund assigned the patent rights to APTI Inc., a Los Angeles subsidiary of Atlantic Richfield. 1987 (August 14) – Lt. Col. Michael Aquino and his wife Lilith are identified by child victims as two of the sexual abusers at daycare programs at the US Army’s Presidio in San Diego, California. A search warrant is served on their residence and numerous videotapes, photographs, photo albums, photographic negatives, cassette tapes, and address books are confiscated.

Also observed is what appears to be a soundproof room. Neither Aquino nor his wife are charged with any crimes. One month later, a fire – which the Army will claim to have been accidental – will destroy the Army Community Services Building adjacent to the Presidio's day care center. The fire will occur on the autumnal equinox, a major event on the satanic calendar. The fire will also destroy some of the center's records. Three weeks after this, fire will strike again, this time at the day care center itself. A building that houses four classrooms, including that of Gary Hambright, is completely destroyed. Investigators from the BATF will determine that both fires, contrary to the Army's finding, had been arson. During this time, Hambright, the Presidio teacher who was charged in the case previously, will again be indicted, this time for molesting ten children. As before, the charges will be dropped. It will later be reported that there is clear evidence of satanic cult activity taking place on the grounds of the Presidio base, including an abundance of satanic graffiti, a satanic altar, and numerous artifacts of satanic rituals. By November, the Army will receive allegations of child abuse at 15 of its day care centers and several elementary schools. There will also be at least two cases at Air Force day care centers, and another at a center run by the US Navy. In addition, a special team of experts will be sent to Panama to help determine if as many as 10 children at a Department of Defense elementary school were molested and possibly infected with AIDS. Yet another case will emerge in a US-run facility in West Germany. These cases will occur at some of the most esteemed military bases in the country, including Fort Dix, Fort Leavenworth, Fort Jackson, and West Point. In the West Point case alone, by the end of the year, 50 children will be interviewed by investigators. There will be reports of satanic acts, animal sacrifices and cult-like behavior among the abusers. An investigation led by former US Attorney Rudolph Giuliani will produce no federal grand jury indictments. His investigation will conclude that only one or two children were abused, in spite of all the evidence to the contrary. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1987 (September) – Serial killer Jeffrey Dahmer picks up 26-year-old Steven Tuomi at a bar, takes him to a motel room to have sex, and then kills him on impulse. Stuffing the body in a suitcase, he takes it back to his grandmother’s home where he is living and cuts it up into pieces, places them in garbage bags, and leaves them out by the curb for the garbage man. He will later say that he had no memory of committing the crime. He will continue to kill sporadically after this, committing two more murders in 1988 and another in early 1989, usually picking up his victims in gay bars and having sex with them before killing and dismembering them. By 1990, he will move into an apartment in Milwaukee, where he will pick up the pace of his murders, killing four more by the end of the year, and another eight in 1991.

Dahmer will finally be caught when a victim escapes his clutches and draws police back to Dahmer’s apartment, where they discover the grisly remnants of his previous murders: vats of acid used to dispose of body parts, human skulls on display, photos of partially dismembered bodies, a human heart in the freezer, and the stench of decomposing bodies. 1987 – After defecting and speaking out about the Illuminati, John Todd is framed for rape and sentenced to 30 years in prison. 1988 – At about this time, the first commercial Internet Service Providers (ISPs) become available for connecting to the early Internet (ARPANET). Connecting to Europe’s CERN network expands it further. Expansion into Asian countries follows soon after this. The first ISP companies are formed. 1988 – MKULTRA Project Monarch victim Cathy O’Brien is rescued from her mind-control programmers and begins deprogramming by her rescuer, Mark Phillips. One effect of the MPD that trauma-based mind-control causes is a photographic memory in the victim, and this will allow O’Brien to eventually recall details that will lead to a tell-all book, Trans-Formation of America, which reveals how she and her daughter Kelly were prostituted out to pedophiles, politicians, criminals, and practicing Satanists as sex slaves for entertainment, blackmail set-ups, and both child and adult pornographic films. Cathy was specially trained as a ‘Presidential Model’, which is a mindcontrolled sex slave used specifically by US presidents for perverted and often very brutal sexual abuse (the first Presidential Model was Marilyn Monroe). She served Presidents Gerald Ford, Ronald Reagan, George Bush Sr., and a number of other high-ranking politicians, including Dick Chaney, Senator Robert C. Byrd (who bought her from her sexually abusive father for a million dollars), and Canadian Prime Ministers Pierre Trudeau and Brian Mulroney. Other abusers included country musicians Kris Kristofferson, Boxcar Willie, and Merle Haggard. Other Monarch slaves included Barbara Mandrell and her sisters, and Loretta Lynn. O’Brien was also forced to take part in satanic activities involving cannibalism, and used to produce fetuses for satanic rituals. Some of the places used for her programming were MacDill Air Force Base at Tampa, Fort Campbell in Kentucky, Fort McKlellen at Anniston, Alabama, Redstone Arsenal and Marshall Space Flight Center in Huntsville, Alabama, the NASA Kennedy Space Center, Cape Canaveral in Florida, and NASA's Goddard Space Flight Center near Washington D.C. The only problem with O’Brien’s story is that there is almost nothing revelatory about it that could be verified to prove that any of what she claims is true, and considering the fact that she claims to have a photographic memory, you would think that she would have included even a few pieces of information that could be checked out. (See online book, Trans-Formation of America, by Cathy O’Brien and Mark Phillips)

1988 (September 26) – In the midst of his killing spree, Jeffrey Dahmer is arrested for drugging and sexually fondling a 13-year-old boy in Milwaukee. He is sentenced to five years probation and one year in a work release camp. He is also required to register as a sex offender. Dahmer will be paroled from the work release camp two months early, after which he will begin a string of grisly murders that will end with his arrest in 1991. 1988 (October) – The airing of the TV special, UFO Cover Up – Live. This ‘documentary’ has William Moore and Jaime Shandra introducing two anonymous intelligence agents who claim that the US government is secretly collaborating with extraterrestrials. This is part of a disinformation campaign to promote the idea that the government is allowing aliens to abduct humans for experimentation in exchange for alien technology. 1988 (November 4) – FBI raid the Franklin Credit Union in Omaha, Nebraska, run by a man named Lawrence King. In the process, they uncover evidence relating to drug running, pedophilia, pornography, and satanic activity involving prominent individuals in the local community. Eighty children will come forward and identify many of those involved, including the Chief of Police Robert Wadman, a local newspaper publisher, a former vice squad officer, a judge, and others of prominence. The children will describe satanic ceremonies involving human and animal sacrifice. Evidence that will come out will show that children were abducted from shopping mall parking lots and auctioned off in Las Vegas and Toronto. Airplanes owned by the DEA were often used to transport the children. Other children are removed from orphanages and foster homes and taken to Washington, DC to take part in sex orgies with dignitaries, congressmen, and other high-level public officials. A number of the child victims will testify that George Bush Sr. was one of the people often seen at these parties. Photographs were being surreptitiously taken at these orgies by the child traffickers for blackmail purposes. There will be no follow-up investigation when these findings are made. The US national media will not report on the story. Local media will only focus on discrediting the witnesses. The FBI and other enforcement officers will harass and discredit victims in the aftermath, causing all but two victims – Paul Bonacci and Alisha Owen – to recant their testimonies. The child victims, rather than the perpetrators, will be thrown in prison. One of these, Alisha Owen (who the Omaha police chief Robert Wadman got pregnant), will spend more time in solitary confinement than any other woman in the history of the Nebraska penal system. She will receive a sentence of 9 to 25 years in prison for allegedly committing perjury, which will be ten years longer than the sentence that will be received by Lawrence King for looting his Franklin Credit Union of $40 million. This heavy sentence imposed on Owen will serve as a warning message to all other victims who might think of talking. The key investigator in the case, Gary Caradori, will be killed when his private plane explodes in mid-air while en route to delivering damaging evidence to Senator Loran Schmit. His briefcase containing the evidence will

be missing from the wreckage. This will be the first of many deaths of people attempting to uncover this politically connected satanic cult/sex slave/drug ring. The Discovery Channel will make a documentary about this case, entitled ‘Conspiracy of Silence’. At the last moment, US Congressmen will pay them $500,000 to not air it, and all copies will be destroyed. Republican senator John DeCamp, who is on the investigative committee, will write a book exposing the case, titled, The Franklin Cover-Up. There will be evidence of ties to mind-control programs being conducted at the highly secure Offutt Air Force Base in Minot, North Dakota, where the head of the Strategic Air Command (SAC) is located. The Anthroposophist Society is also involved in the pedophilia. The suicide of journalist Hunter S. Thompson will also be tied to the exposure of this pedophile ring, since according to the testimony of Paul Bonacci in 1999, Thompson had directed a snuff film at Bohemian Grove, an exclusive resort for the elite in the Sacramento, California area. Thompson apparently committed suicide soon after Bonacci’s testimony is made. Thompson had been close to Rusty Nelson, who was King’s ‘official’ photographer for the pedophile/blackmailers. Bonacci will also positively identify Lt. Col. Michael Aquino as an associate of Lawrence King, who is known to the children only as ‘the Colonel’. Rusty Nelson will also identify Aquino as the man that he once saw King give a briefcase full of money to, and who King had told him was involved in the Contra gun and cocaine trafficking operation being run by George Bush and Lt. Col. Oliver North. Minot is an area that has satanic cults operating in it that have been tied to the Son of Sam and Manson murders. A number of witnesses and investigators will die under questionable circumstances as the Franklin case is covered up. Other witnesses will be silenced with charges of perjury for testifying. 1988 – Karla Turner first becomes conscious of the ongoing alien abductions of herself and her family. She and other members of her family had already read and been intrigued by Whitley Strieber’s Communion, and she herself had also just read Budd Hopkins’ book, Missing Time. Both she and her husband had been experiencing stress symptoms, and were unable to explain its cause. For this reason, they are both getting counseling, and in the process, Karla begins keeping a journal of her dreams. In doing so, she starts recalling dreams of strange scenes, some involving UFOs. She also attempts to help her husband with his stress-related symptoms by practicing some hypnosis techniques that her therapist has used on her. When she does, he immediately begins to describe an experience that sounds UFO-related – a blinding light, a curved wall with strange symbols on it, a grey-type alien face, an enormous orange spacecraft. At this moment, her phone rings and she answers it, only to hear a strange unintelligible voice on the other end before it turns to static. Over the days and weeks, Karla continues to explore her new-found skills at using hypnotic regression on her husband, and uncovers further details about his experiences. Their exposure to the information they have been drawing up results in Karla seeking out a professional ufologist to find some answers. She uses a listing she finds in

Hopkins’ book, and is put in touch with members of a local MUFON chapter. A meeting with them leads to Karla relating some strange experiences in her own past, and she will ask that they put her in touch with a good hypnotist. On the way home from the meeting, they notice that they are being followed by another vehicle. They are soon put in contact with UFO researcher Barbara Bartholic. They meet with her for an initial interview, after which they again notice that they’re being followed. They are determined to further explore these strange memories that they’ve tapped into, and start regression sessions with Bartholic. Apparently, at no time up to this point has any possible explanation been considered other than the UFO/alien one. In the first regression session, Karla’s husband draws up scenes of being abducted in 1947, as well as the year before in 1987, and of having had something done to him during the last incident. A second session brings up an incident from 1960 where he witnesses a UFO landing as a young teenager, after which he finds himself with an unexplainable sore nose. Several other abduction incidents will also surface. After the second session, the Turners witness lights and what appears to be a saucer-shaped craft in the night sky. They will begin to wake up and find scratches and other unexplainable marks on their bodies, and then notice an increase of helicopter activity in the area. Further regression sessions to explore certain incidents (mostly dreams) that occurred to Karla, her husband, son, and others will result in the further belief that they are related to alien abductions. Of course, they have all been focusing on thoughts of abduction and all the information that they had been absorbing for months, so the fact that they would have strange dreams – especially if the thoughts and information was unsettling them – is not at all unlikely. The regression sessions they undergo will always reflect the information they have been absorbing. Although Turner states early on in her book Into the Fringe that she was reading both Strieber’s and Hopkins’ books prior to discovering her family’s abduction experiences, she will later claim within the same book (pg. 127) that she “had been entirely uninterested in UFOs before our own experiences forced us into this fringe reality.” It must be asked: Is she being absolutely honest about these experiences? There is also a point in her book where she mentions the information that John Lear presents in a lecture regarding underground bases where he claims military personnel work side-by side with aliens, and she reflects her acceptance of this claim without question. She uses the fact that many people start claiming to have seen this scenario during their remembered abductions, and she concludes that it must be true because these claims started to arise only after Lear’s lecture. She completely overlooks the fact that Lear probably influenced their memories, otherwise these claims would have arisen prior to Lear’s lectures. Is this the sort of shabby professionalism that a self-described researcher should have? In the years ahead, Turner will become a prominent figure in abduction research, working very closely with Bartholic and helping to form the beliefs and opinions of many others who will come to question whether their own experiences are somehow tied to alien abductions. In reality, Turner and

Bartholic and many other researchers before them and after have been quite limited or otherwise selective in their scope of inquiry and their logic, always focusing on the alien question and never considering any more down-toearth explanations. Karla’s husband had been enlisted into the US Army’s military intelligence branch after finishing school. (See online book, Into the Fringe, by Karla Turner) 1988 (December 21) – Pan Am flight 103 is blown out of the skies over Lockerbie, Scotland by a terrorist's bomb. 259 people plunge to their deaths, and 11 more die on the ground. It will be discovered that the CIA had foreknowledge of this attack and allowed it to occur. The flight is being used for a ‘controlled’ shipment of heroin coming from the Middle East, and one of the bags of heroin had been switched with one carrying the bomb. The purpose of the attack was to eliminate one passenger who was planning to blow the whistle on the US government, while putting the blame on Middle Eastern terrorists. The first responders to arrive on the scene of the crash will be Americans, who will arrive in large numbers almost immediately, appearing to arrive out of nowhere. These first responders will appear to be more interested in finding something (the drugs) among the wreckage, more than anything else. The excuse used by the US for not stopping the bombing will be that they didn’t want to jeopardize their negotiations with Iran to free six hostages they were holding. The US government effectively allowed 270 people to die so that six could regain their freedom. 1989 (January 17) – After the police receive an anonymous death threat directed at Cleveland Elementary School in Stockton, California, Patrick Purdy goes on a shooting rampage at the school. The 25-year-old Purdy, wearing camouflage gear, sets his own car on fire outside the school before entering the grounds and starting his rampage. He randomly murders five children and wounds thirty others. He will end the ordeal by committing suicide. Witnesses will describe him as acting ‘matter-of-factly’ and without emotion. He is being prescribed Amitriptyline, an antidepressant, as well as the antipsychotic drug Thorazine. Purdy was a drifter with a long criminal history that included prostitution, robbery, and drug trafficking. Purdy was born in Tacoma, Washington, and had grown up in Stockton, going to the same school that he later targets. At the time of his birth, his father was a staff sergeant stationed at Fort Lewis. Note that Fort Lewis is very close to Madigan Military Hospital, which has been involved in classified military research for a very long time and is rumored to be a major mindcontrol programming center. His parents had divorced after his father threatened his mother with a weapon. His father spent most of his last year of service in a hospital for psychiatric evaluation, and was then put on temporary medical disability for five more years before being honorably discharged in 1971. Because of a troubled childhood and possible further

physical abuse by his mother, Purdy had eventually ended up being adopted by a foster family in West Hollywood. He had been in trouble with the law on numerous occasions, including prostitution. He drifted around and worked sporadically for various companies over the years, most recently including DuPont in Memphis, Tennessee. DuPont is a contractor to the CIA and other government agencies involved in secret programs. Those who had known Purdy will describe him as full of frustration and angry about everything. The school will open the next day for classes, and students will be greeted by psychologists and nurses trained in treating grief. This incident becomes the catalyst for the original legislative frenzy to ban semiautomatic assault weapons in California and the nation. 1989 (April) - KLAS TV journalist George Knapp presents a series on UFOs, in which he interviews a man (later to be identified as Robert Lazar) who claims to have worked on alien flying saucers at a super-secret government facility in Nevada known as Area 51. 1989 (April 11) – A search for a missing Texas student, Mark Kilroy, ends with the gruesome discovery on a ranch near Matamoros, Mexico, of the graves of thirteen victims of a satanic cult. One of the mutilated corpses is that of Kilroy. According to the testimony of arrested cult members, the victims had been dissected while still alive and then cannibalized. Brains, hearts, lungs, and other internal organs had been cut or torn from many of the bodies, and some of these are found stewing in cauldrons in a shed at the ranch. There were signs of black magic being practiced at the ranch. Victims include the owner and secretary of a company that served as a front for a cocaine-processing lab, an informant for the Federales and his mistress, two federal narcotics officers, three former police officers, and the American nephew of a US Customs agent. There are also reported to be a number of law enforcement personnel within the cult, including a Mexico City Federal Judicial Police agent who was in charge of narcotics investigations. Juan Benitez, the Commandante of the Federal Judicial Police, will claim that there “were another six agents involved, but we have no proof at this time to bring charges.” The cult, which is heavily involved in drug trafficking, is part of a satanic network that spans Central America and the United States. Several members will implicate major Mexican establishment and entertainment celebrities; Florentine Ventura, the head of the Mexican Interpol, will shoot his family and then himself after his name is discovered on a cult membership list. The Mexican courts will withhold the names of those who supplied the sacrificial victims to the cult. Another mass grave site will be discovered near Juarez, Mexico, ten years later. Both sites will be located exactly where serial killer Henry lee Lucas had claimed they would be. 1989 (May) – Lt. Col. Michael Aquino is again questioned in connection with child abuse investigations. This time, at least five children in three cities are

making the accusations. The children had seen Aquino in newspaper and television coverage of the Presidio case and immediately recognized him as one of their abusers. The children are from Ukiah, Santa Rosa, and Fort Bragg. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1989 (June) – The Washington Times publishes a story about a man named Craig Spence, a behind-the-scenes Republican powerbroker in Washington who has been deeply involved with a callboy ring that supplied young boys to the elite of both political parties, as well as to visiting dignitaries. It is reported that a list of some 200 influential clients included the names of “government officials, locally based US military officers, businessmen, lawyers, bankers, congressional aides, media representatives and other professionals”, only a few of whom are publicly identified. Among the revelations in the case is that Spence had taken some of his callboy escorts on private, late-night tours of the White House. The tours, of which there were at least four, were cleared by a uniformed Secret Service guard who moonlighted as a bodyguard at Spence's parties. Spence will hint that the tours were arranged by the national security adviser to Vice President George H. W. Bush – Donald Gregg – for whom Spence once sponsored a dinner. There will also be indications that Spence is partnered with Lawrence King in running a pedophile ring, and that he was a CIA asset. Despite being a largely Republican scandal, it will be completely ignored by the New York Times, the Washington Post, and the Los Angeles Times. The story will soon disappear entirely and Washington and the media will proceed to pretend as though nothing had ever happened. The paper trail will be quickly covered up. Some 20,000 documents pertaining to the case will be sealed by court order and the US Attorney's office will issue a gag order on the release of information. By the time Craig Spence turns up dead in a Boston hotel less than five months after the story first breaks, he will have been all but forgotten. Before his death, he will tell a friend: “I may be disappearing soon. It will be sudden. It may appear to be a suicide, but it won't be.” (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1989 (August) – Neil Waldrop is now on the Urantia Foundation Board of Trustees. 1989 – A number of Urantia members and readers of the Urantia Book apparently claim to hear voices in their heads. 1989 – William Moore confesses before an audience at a Las Vegas MUFON UFO conference that he had been secretly working with intelligence agents throughout the 1980s, and had assisted AFOSI agent Lt. Col. Richard C. Doty in passing disinformation to civilian UFO investigator Paul Bennewitz

regarding aliens working in underground bases and experimenting on abducted humans. 1989 – Ted Rice, a natural psychic who has for a long time communicated with spirit guides, begins to experience nightly ‘spirit intrusions’ of an unfamiliar nature after moving to Shreveport, Louisiana. These experiences involve little grey aliens and UFOs, and he witnesses many others in his community being abducted along with him. Rice and a number of others form a small UFO group, and soon afterwards, questions of a metaphysical nature that come up during their discussions are answered during Rice’s nightly dreams. He also begins to see orbs of light in his bedroom, which flood his mind with information. What sound like holographic apparitions appear in his room, and walls and ceilings appear to turn invisible. Although Rice is very distraught over these strange experiences, others in his UFO group encourage him that these experiences are nothing but good. After placing an ad in a metaphysical newsletter, Rice is contacted by alien abduction researcher Karla Turner. She, in turn, puts him in touch with Barbara Bartholic, another researcher who also performs hypnotic regression. Both Turner and Bartholic both begin by collecting extensive background information on Rice through many hours of interviews with him. After this, Rice undergoes a series of hypnotic regression sessions with Bartholic, and uncovers memories of being visited by alien-looking beings that engage in raping both him and his grandmother. Through these sessions he is able to realize that the beings are often using disguises, but he and Bartholic both interpret this to mean that these are aliens attempting to look like humans, rather than considering that it might be the other way around. Bartholic even explains to Rice how extremely frightening screen memories are used to cover up real events, using the trauma of these false memories to discourage further exploration. But Bartholic (and Turner) approach their work strictly under the pretense that these experiences are alien abductions, and ignore the possibility that they are covers for extremely covert mind-control programs conducted by humans. They begin to study ufology literature, as well as attend MUFON lectures. Her son suddenly begins to show signs of an alter personality, and starts to have dreams of UFOs and aliens. He soon recognizes a strange sensation and a buzzing sound in his head when he goes to bed. Other events occur to the Turners and certain others around them. In response, they soak up as much information on UFOs and aliens as they can, and begin to see relationships to their own experiences, fitting their own into the scenario that is being widely presented in the media. They begin to accept the idea that the truth about an alien presence is slowly being revealed by the government. According to Turner in her book, Masquerade of Angels, Rice had a number of mysterious experiences throughout his life, and after learning about his ability to psychically read information about people, in 1970 he was coerced into joining a group of people who said that they had been looking for him. He was convinced by them that he had indeed been specially chosen and his experiences in life were all leading up to this, so at their urging he enrolled

with an organization called the National Spiritual Association of Churches and trained for and received a license in mediumship. This allowed him and his group to open up their own spiritualist chapter, where the group continually encouraged Rice and helped to guide his abilities. Soon after, however, he would begin to have nightly experiences where he was visited by an entity that would impart ‘spiritual truths’ to him, although he was never able to remember what had been imparted by the morning. He always felt as though he was in an altered state during these experiences. He will describe the entity as alien-looking, but not fitting the look of a typical grey. He remembers that the entity taught him how to pass through solid objects, although he apparently never even tries to display such a talent afterwards. At one meeting with members of his group, one of them claims that that she can see the entity, and tells him that it’s not of this earth but is trapped here, and that it is highly developed spiritually and that Rice should let it help him. He decides to accept this as true. Soon after, he begins to get visions involving widespread destruction, but when he seeks answers from his spirit guides, there is no perceptible response. He begins to wake up in the middle of the night with a compulsion to write, and what he writes seems so come out of nowhere. It is a child’s story with metaphysical components to it, and when he asks his group about it, they suggest that he is being guided to write such stories for children, to introduce them to the spiritual world. He spontaneously produces another creative piece of writing, which he finds all typed up one morning on waking, but no more after that. His involvement with his group and the strange experiences begins to tax his health, so he checks into a hospital, and after a number of weeks he feels much better and the weird experiences he’s been having have stopped. But within three years, in 1984, he begins to have recurring dreams of an entity he calls Raphael, from whom he receives a message to go to New Mexico, and is provided a date to be there. As circumstances turn out, he finds himself taking the trip on the date specified. Once there, he has another dream of Raphael, and this time he is told to submit a resume to a certain company on a certain date. He does so and is soon contacted for an interview. The interview takes place and Rice is given a job. (See online book, Masquerade of Angels, by Karla Turner) 1989 – Marc Dutroux of Belgium is convicted along with his wife for the rape and violent abuse of five young girls, the youngest of whom was just 11 years old. He will be accused of being a key player in an international child prostitution and pornography ring whose practices include kidnapping, rape, sadistic torture, and murder. He receives 13 years in prison, but will be released in 1992 after serving only 3 years, in spite of a medical report that described him as a perverse psychopath who was a danger to society. Shortly after his release, young girls will begin to disappear again. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1989 – The number of Internet hosts exceeds 100,000.

1989 – The breakup of the USSR. 1990 – The first commercial provider for Internet dial-up access is established. 1990 (May) - British Aerospace (BAe) Defense begins sponsoring tests on Sandy Kidd’s antigravity device. They reportedly show only minor success. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1990 – An advertisement by Elizabeth Y. Fitzhugh appears in New Age publications promoting her channeling of an entity named ORION. The ad is signed, “S. G., Boston, VA”. The only telephone listing in this area at the time that matches these initials is that of retired MKULTRA director Sidney Gottlieb. The name ORION is also that of a secret government program that was involved in hypnosis and electronic brain invasion. (See file, A Urantia, 9/11Truth.org & CIA Mind Control Technology, by Alex Constantine) 1990 (August 31) – Lt. Col. Michael Aquino, founder of the satanic Temple of Set, is processed out of the Army after being investigated for satanic ritual child abuse that took place at the Presidio Army Base. Although never formally charged, according to court documents, Aquino was ‘titled’ in a Report of Investigation by the Army’s Criminal Investigative Division (CID) for “indecent acts with a child, sodomy, conspiracy, kidnapping, and false swearing”. For unknown reasons, the CID chose to release their Report of Investigation three months after the statute of limitations ran out. The child abuse charges remained against Aquino because, according to the CID, the evidence of alibi offered by Aquino “was not persuasive.” Aquino will later deny that he was ever processed out of the Army and will even claim that he was selected as one of their first Space Intelligence Officers during this same year, and was stationed at Cheyenne Mountain for four years of active duty before retiring. 1990 – the US military initiates the construction of the High-frequency Active Auroral Research Program (HAARP), in Gakona, Alaska – originally a component of President Ronald Reagan’s so-called Strategic Defense Initiative or ‘Star Wars’, and sold to Congress as a tool for military communications. The HAARP antennas are designed to project powerful electromagnetic pulses that literally heat a specific point in the Earth’s ionosphere. This effect on the ionosphere will allow for “steerable,” controllable, electromagnetic frequencies to bounce back to earth at desired locations. HAARP consists of an array of 180 antennas laid out in a grid pattern over a 35 acre area, with a total power output capability 3.6 billion watts. It is capable of heating a 1000 square kilometer area of the ionosphere to over 50,000 degrees. In regard to weather modification,

HAARP’s heating effect will be able to literally lift the ionosphere (within a 30 mile diameter area), thereby changing localized pressure systems or even altering the route of jet streams. It is also capable of being used for mass mind-control by transmitting frequencies that affect human brainwave patterns to affect physiology in specific, predictable ways. 1990 – At this point in time, nearly three dozen serial killers are reported each year in the USA. 1991 (May 5) – Carl Campbell goes to a bus stop in the parking lot of the Pentagon and fires five shots into the chest and abdomen of Navy Commander Edward J. Higgins, who works as an arms control specialist for the Department of Defense. When Campbell is examined by psychologists, he will report that he was haunted by voices, and believed that he had been injected with a microchip by the CIA. Although Campbell will be charged with first degree murder, he will be ruled mentally incompetent to stand trial. (See online file, Mind Control, World Control, by Jim Keith) 1991 (May 27) – In the early morning hours, 14-year-old Konerak Sinthasomphone (the younger brother of a boy whom Jeffrey Dahmer had molested in 1988) is discovered wandering naked in the street, under the heavy influence of drugs and bleeding from his rectum. Dahmer chases his victim down and tries to take him back to his apartment, but two women from the neighborhood intervene and call 911. Dahmer tells the arriving police officers that Sinthasomphone is his 19-year-old boyfriend and that they had an argument while drinking. Against the protests of the two women, who recognize the young boy from the neighborhood and insist that he is a child and can’t speak English, the officers turn him back over to Dahmer. The officers, who had entered Dahmer’s apartment during the incident, will later report having smelled a strange odor there, but did not investigate it. The smell is the body of Dahmer's previous victim, who had been decomposing in the bedroom for three days. The officers do not make any attempt to verify Sinthasomphone's age or identity, nor locate someone who could communicate with him, and fail to run a background check that would have revealed that Dahmer was a convicted child molester who was still under probation. Later that night, Dahmer kills and dismembers Sinthasomphone, keeping his skull as a souvenir. He will kill three more people before he is finally caught. 1991 (July 22) – Serial killer Jeffrey Dahmer lures a man named Tracy Edwards into his home. Dahmer ends up struggling with him while trying to handcuff him, but ultimately fails to cuff his wrists together. Wielding a large butcher knife, Dahmer forces Edwards into the bedroom, where Edwards sees pictures of mangled bodies on the wall and notices a terrible smell coming from a large blue barrel. The barrel is filled with acid and is being used to dissolve human bodies to sludge before disposing it down the toilet. Edwards fights to get away and runs for the door to escape. Running through

the streets with the handcuffs still on one wrist, Edwards waves to a police car for help. Edwards leads the police back to Dahmer's apartment, where Dahmer at first acts friendly to the officers. However, when one of the officers checks the bedroom, he sees the photographs of mangled bodies and calls for his partner to arrest Dahmer. As one officer subdues Dahmer, the other opens the refrigerator and finds a human head. A further search of the apartment reveals three more severed heads and a human heart in the freezer, multiple photographs of murdered victims and human remains, and severed hands and penises preserved in jars filled with formaldehyde. The remains of several corpses will be found in acid-filled vats, and implements for the construction of an altar of candles and human skulls will be found in his closet. A total of seven human skulls will be found in the apartment. After his trial, Dahmer will say: “[I]t sure seems like some of the thoughts aren't my own, they just come blasting into my head... These thoughts are very powerful, very destructive, and they do not leave. They're not the kind of thoughts that you can just shake your head and they're gone. They do not leave.” 1991 (October 9) – Dr. Tom Philpott, a history professor at the University of Texas, is ‘suicided’ after he gives an interview on a show hosted by Frank Morrow, detailing the issues concerning the prostitution of boys in Houston, Texas and the power structure behind it that helps to promote and profit from the business. Investigations into what is happening in Houston come to a halt. (See online file, A History of Silence: Child Trafficking in the United States, by David Shurter) 1991 – Four-year-old Michael Dunahee is abducted from Blanshard Park in Victoria, BC, while his parents play a game of touch football nearby. He will never be seen again. It will be rumored that he was abducted by local satanists. 1991 – The mysterious death of investigative reporter Danny Casolaro. Casolaro had been investigating the theft of Project Promise software, a computer program capable of tracking down anyone, anywhere in the world. He was also investigating the connection of UFOs to Pine Gap, Area 51, and governmental bioengineering. 1991 – A Urantia Book study group member begins channeling a purported celestial named Ham. 1992 – Neil Waldrop resigns from the Board of Trustees at the Urantia Foundation.

1992 – A survey of 800 psychologists in the San Diego area reveals that between them, they have received 5,731 reports of (satanic) ritual abuse from their patients. These reports describe human or animal sacrifices, cannibalism, sexual abuse, satan worship, and other bizarre rites. (See online file, Diana Napolis vs. Michael Aquino Lawsuit 2008) 1992 – Phyllis Schlemmer publishes The Only Planet of Choice: Essential Briefings from Deep Space, a book that promotes the messages she channeled from a group of entities who call themselves ‘The Nine’. She has been channeling these entities ever since she became involved with Andrija Puharich in 1975. The book will continue to be a bestseller in the New Age movement for many years. (See online file, Behind the Mask: Aliens or Cosmic Jokers?, by Lynn Picknett & Clive Prince) 1992 – After being accused of molestation as a child by their daughter, Peter and Pamela Freyd establish the False Memory Syndrome Foundation (FMSF). The original board members include doctors who have been directly involved in MKULTRA mind-control programs, such as expert hypnotist Martin Orne and Dr. Louis Jolyin West, as well as many people who have been accused of child sexual abuse. Another board member, Richard Ofshe, is an alleged expert on coercive persuasion techniques, and Margaret Singer is a government expert on cults and cult tactics. The mandate of FMSF is to discredit the recovered memories of people who report having been traumatically abused as children by claiming that the child’s therapist has implanted false memories, and to develop legal defenses for protecting pedophiles in court. They will routinely argue in court cases that satanic ritual abuse (SRA) and multiple personality disorder (MPD) don’t exist, and the organization and its members will specifically target therapists who claim that they do. This defense strategy, if successful, would allow victims of traumabased mind-control to be completely discredited, and allow their perpetrators to continue their activities unimpeded. The fact that this relates to mind-control experiments and programs, where victims have had their memories of these events erased and overlaid with false memories of alien encounters, is important to bear in mind. At about the time that FMSF is established, a number of mind-control victims are starting to remember being involved in these events, and this threatens to expose the perpetrators, so it is important that a means to discredit them is in place. (See online file, Diana Napolis vs. Michael Aquino Lawsuit 2008) 1992 – Shortly after Marc Dutroux’s early release from a Belgian prison after serving only three years for sexual abuse of children, young girls begin to disappear in the vicinity of some of his homes. Though technically

unemployed and drawing welfare from the state, he nevertheless owns at least six houses and is living quite lavishly. The magistrate who releases him, Justice Minister Melchior Wathelet, is soon after appointed to serve as a judge at the European Court of Justice at the Hague. Dutroux’s rather lucrative income is apparently derived from trading in child sex-slaves, child prostitution, and child pornography. Many of his houses appear to stand vacant, although some of them are being used as torture and imprisonment centers where kidnapped girls are taken and held in underground dungeons. Some of his homes are used in this way for several years, and a growing body of evidence will indicate that fact. One informant will report to police that Dutroux is building secret cellars to hold girls before selling them abroad. The same informant will also tell police in 1995 that Dutroux had offered another man the equivalent of $3,000 to $5,000 to kidnap girls. Authorities will fail to act on any of the information they receive. They will routinely ignore tips that later prove to be accurate (including a report from Dutroux’s own mother that he’s holding young girls against their will). Key facts will be withheld from investigators and lines of communication will be broken, effectively hindering the investigation. On three separate occasions, one of his homes will be searched and voices of children will even be heard, but the police will turn up nothing, He will eventually be caught and arrested in 1996, when a final search will lead to the discovery of two fourteen-yearold girls who are imprisoned in a cellar dungeon, chained and starving. The girls will describe being used as child prostitutes and for the production of child pornography videos. More than 300 such videos will be discovered in the search. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1992 – Timothy McVeigh takes a job with Burns International Security Services in Buffalo and assigned to security detail at Calspan, a Pentagon contractor doing classified research into advanced electronic warfare, bioengineering, and artificial intelligence. Three years from now, after McVeigh is arrested for the OKC bombing, a spokesman for Calspan will describe McVeigh as a model employee. Todd Regier, who works with McVeigh, will tell the Boston Globe, “He was real different … Kind of cold. He was almost like a robot." Jeff Camp, who had worked with McVeigh as a guard in upstate New York, will tell a Newsweek reporter that McVeigh was “a very strange person. It was like he had two different personalities.” 1992 (December 16) – A shooting at Simon's Rock College in Great Barrington, Massachusetts leaves two dead, four wounded. The shooter, 18year-old Wayne Lo, is a gifted violinist from Taiwan, where his father had been a career officer in the Air Force. Lo claims that he had been relatively happy with life, but had suddenly started getting a ‘feeling’ (not visual or auditory) that he believed was God, directing him to buy a gun and kill people. He will later state: "At the time I thought I did the right thing. But as I look back at it over time, more and more it doesn't make sense to me. And

more and more I ask myself, why? Why did I do it? I mean, why?" His lawyer will use the insanity plea even though Lo will deny that he is insane. 1992 (December) – Julianne McKinney, an ex-NSA employee, member of the Association of National Security Alumni, and director of the Electronic Surveillance Project, publishes a paper titled, Microwave Harassment and Mind-Control Experimentation, in which she promotes the existence of directed-energy weapons and suggests that they are being used to experiment on US citizens without their consent. She states in her paper that she has received complaints from 25 individuals who claim to be targeted by these electronic weapons, and gives an overview of those complaints. She lists a number of methods used to overtly harass targets, including abuse, noise campaigns, vandalism, break-ins, and harassing telephone calls. Further, the report appears to blame a number of government agencies for the targeting, but almost completely omits the NSA as possibly being complicit as well. Although there are not enough cases at the time to support her, she claims in her report that the targeting is meant to pervert TIs in their loyalties, redirect their frustrations towards selected targets, and coerce them to act violently. Although the report appears to be sincere and accurate in most areas, her claims within it that she and her group are performing ongoing investigations into the complaints they have received will result in nothing further beyond adding a supplement to the report in 1994 that will state that the number of complaints has more than tripled. (See online file, Microwave Harassment and Mind-Control Experimentation, by Julianne McKinney) 1992 – John St. Clair Akwei files a lawsuit against the NSA, claiming that this agency is using advanced remote electronic mind-control applications on the public. The lawsuit will be thrown out on the grounds of frivolousness. Nonetheless, it will be referred to in the years ahead by many people as evidence that the technologies he describes are real. These technologies are very similar to what is described in the Robert G. Malech patent application that was filed in 1976. It is very possible that the Akwei case was part of a disinformation program to cover up for technologies that were developed as part of the US government’s remote-viewing program, which ends at about this same time. 1992 – The Great Invocation, an occult rite that originates from the writings of Alice Bailey, is read during the opening ceremonies of the UN's Earth Summit in Rio. It has often received the attention of world dignitaries at the UN and read at many official conferences. (See online file, Alice Bailey & Master DK Djwhal Khul A Satanic Communion, by Terry Melanson)

1992 – Members of the European Parliament begin to report being targeted with EMF weapons for having opposed US policies. At the same time, NSA whistleblowers such as Julianne McKinney and John St. Clair Akwei begin to make public claims of satellite-based mind-control technologies. 1992 – First commercial access to the Internet through NSFNET. 1992 – The number of Internet hosts exceeds 1,000,000. 1993 (February 26) – World Trade Center bombing. It will be revealed that the CIA had prior knowledge that this terrorist act was going to take place, and even aided the perpetrators, but did nothing to stop it. 1993 (February 28) – FBI/BATF raid on the Branch Davidian compound in Waco, Texas, which will lead to a 51-day standoff. 1993 (April 19) – Siege of the Branch Davidian compound in Waco, Texas. David Koresh, leader of this religious cult, has been hearing a voice that he believes is God. On April 19, the compound is stormed and 76 people inside (including Koresh) die when the building is burned to the ground at the hands of the authorities. April 19th is an important day for satanists, on which sacrifices are performed by fire, preferably of women and children. Prior to razing the compound by fire, the BATF contacted the local hospital to inquire about the number of beds available in their burn unit, revealing that this was indeed a premeditated act. Koresh was apparently a CIA asset, and Waco was a center for mind-control experimentation. The remains of the site will be quickly destroyed after the event, thus assuring that no independent investigation will ever be able to determine whether the official version of events was accurate. 1993 – UFO researchers discover that Dr. Bruce Maccabee has maintained close links with the CIA since 1979. 1993 – A paper written by physicists Douglas Torr and Ning Li of the University of Alabama in Huntsville is received by the Advanced Concepts office of the Marshall Space Flight Center. The paper describes how superconductors have the potential to alter gravity. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1993 – The US government’s secret remote-viewing programs end. Although they are claimed to have been unsuccessful, evidence will show that they were in fact very successful, with many phenomenal results. 1993 – The Montauk Project mind control operations reportedly start running out of Robins AFB near Atlanta, Georgia. In the years ahead, a spate of seemingly mindless and inhuman violence will be carried out by very young boys in this area. Is this an indication of some results of this project?

1993 – USAF seizes further public land in Nevada, including the last publicly accessible sites from which the Groom Lake military base (Area 51) is visible. 1993 – Paideka, a pedophilia magazine published in the Netherlands, quotes FMSF Advisory Board member Ralph Underwager in giving his open support to pedophilia. Underwager and his wife Hollida Wakefield are founding members of the FMSF, and Underwager earns his living testifying for the defense in child sexual and ritual abuse cases. 1993 – A raid on the Children of God compound in Argentina uncovers videos of ritual abuse and child pornography. Some 170 children are taken into protective custody. 1993 – By the early 1990s, some members of the Order of the Solar Temple have started to question leader Jo Di Mambro's authority and alleged mystical powers. Di Mambro's own son, Élie, begins questioning the visions and messages his father is claiming to receive from the Masters. Élie discovers that the spiritual visions, witnessed by several members are staged by his father, and that the divine beings and messages received are actually produced by special effects and holograms. He decides to share his discovery with the other members of the group, causing some of them to leave. Di Mambro has also started to live in increasing opulence compared to the rest of the group, and has become more authoritarian, demanding unconditional obedience. Some members begin to speak out and denounce Di Mambro. One member, Lucien Zecler, sends out a letter raising his concerns about the use of mind control to subjugate members. Police investigating terrorist threats in Quebec have come to suspect that the Order of the Solar Temple might be involved, leading to government persecution of the group and its members. The group begins talking about ‘transit’, which Di Mambro describes as a passage across a mirror or travel in a spaceship, and of “returning to the Father”. Di Mambro tells members to begin preparing themselves. He has been taking measures over the past year to establish a mythology surrounding this culminating event, sending 300 envelopes containing information on the group to selected locations around the world. One of these goes to the French Minister of the Interior, accusing him of attempting to destroy the group and causing the deaths of a number of members. 1993 (December 2) - Alan Winterbourne, a computer systems engineer, went on a killing rampage at a Ventura County, California, unemployment office. Winterbourne had been employed in classified scientific work, and had resigned after complaining of harassment by workers and that his phone was tapped. Winterbourne's problems had begun after he had written a letter to his congressman requesting a federal investigation of illegalities that he believed were taking place at Northrop. Before his murderous spree, he had

told his sister, “they're working on terrible things at Northrop that would kill millions of innocent people. Things you can't imagine.” (See online file, Mind Control, World Control, by Jim Keith) 1994 (May 3) – The documentary, Conspiracy of Silence, is scheduled to air on the Discovery Channel. At the very last minute, it is pulled when unknown parties pay $500,000 for the copyrights and destroy all copies. The documentary exposes a network of religious leaders and Washington politicians who are regularly flying children to Washington DC for sex orgies. 1994 (October 4) – The first in a series of murders, suicides, and arsons occur in Switzerland and Quebec, connected to the cult group, Order of the Solar Temple. A cottage in Quebec is torched, and police discover the charred bodies of five members of the Order inside. On the same day in Switzerland, several other homes are torched and a total of 48 bodies are recovered. Again, all are members of the Order. Many of the 53 bodies show signs of having been murdered prior to the fires. More deaths will surface in the next year. 1994 (December 14) – Just after 9 am on the last day of a class on the history of ancient Greece, in a subterranean room beneath the State University of Albany’s central quadrangle campus, a rifle-wielding student takes the class hostage, eventually shooting one youth in the leg. He is eventually subdued by the students. As police lead 26-year-old psychology student Ralph Tortorici away, he shouts to a crowd of bystanders, “Stop government experimentation!” Tortorici will tell psychiatrist Dr. Lawrence Siegel, who later examines him (after the prosecution spends six months looking for a psychiatric expert who is willing to get involved in the case), that Tortorici has been selected as the Anti-Christ, and that his thoughts and actions are being manipulated through an implant in his head. The psychiatrist will state to the court that Tortorici is not mentally competent to stand trial or assist in his own defense, but the decision will be made by the judge that he is competent to stand trial, and he will be found guilty and sentenced to 20 to 47 years in maximum security prison under 24 hour isolation. Tortorici’s grandmother, when she asks him why he did what he did, will be told that the voices in his head said that the implant would be removed if he went ahead with the shooting. Ironically, Tortorici’s brother Matthew, who is a corrections officer, will be working where Tortorici is to be held after the shootings. Matthew will state that at about the time that Ralph was 16, he started showing signs of paranoia, thinking that his family was out to get him and that the police were monitoring him. Ralph would claim to see things on TV, hear voices coming from appliances, etc. After undergoing surgery sometime earlier, Tortorici came to believe that he had been implanted with a tracking devise.

Prior to the shooting, Tortorici had been admitted to a mental ward involuntarily and treated with anti-psychotic drugs. He had also been designated as having chronic paranoid schizophrenia. A report will state that he “firmly believes he needed to pursue such a course of action to draw the media and the government into a position where they could first admit they implanted a device into his brain and penis and then to remove it and remove the pain it is causing him...He claims he never meant to hurt anyone, and waited a long time to take drastic action.” Tortorici will also claim, “I did what I had to do, and thought the evidence would come forward and the problem be solved.” Tortorici had been in the Army National Guard. In 1999, the University of Albany will be forced to shut down a project run by psychology professor Kathryn Kelley that involves mind-control implants when individuals begin claiming that they have been implanted with communications devices that can read and transmit their thoughts. The research is funded by the NSA and DoD, with an annual budget of $2 billion. The devices will typically be implanted in “uninformed, unconsenting subjects” who were usually “federal prisoners and political dissidents.” 1994 – Using a Ouija board, Laura Jadczyk begins channeling entities that claim to be from the Cassiopaea star system. They say they are from the future. 1994 – A secret government program is established to project large, threedimensional objects that appeared to float in the air for psyop applications. The ‘Holographic Projector’ is described in a classified Air Force document as a system to “project information power from space ... for special operations deception missions”. (See Washington Post article on PSYOPS, 2/1/1999) 1994 – The Communications Assistance for Law Enforcement Act is enacted, requiring telecommunications providers to design their equipment according to FBI specifications in order to make eavesdropping easier and more convenient. (See online file, The Surveillance-Industrial Complex, by the ACLU) 1995 (February) – Part of a human skull is found by the roadside near the farm of Robert (Willie) Pickton in Port Coquitlam, BC. The skull has been cut down the middle with a table saw and appears to be relatively fresh. DNA tests will reveal years later that it belongs to one of the many women who have or will be murdered on the Pickton farm. Dozens of women, most or all of them drug addicts and/or street workers, have been disappearing at an increasing rate from the Downtown Eastside of Vancouver, BC. The earliest unsolved incident goes back to 1978. The current year will show a spike, with five reported missing from the area (this doesn’t

count the many women found dead or murdered). Police show little concern and are extremely slow to respond to tips and missing person reports. Their attitude is that these women are ‘disposable’. 1995 (April 19) – The bombing of the Alfred P. Murrah building in Oklahoma City occurs, in which 168 people are killed and over 680 injured. The building was apparently chosen because it contained offices for a number of different government agencies, including the BATF, FBI, DEA, Social Security Administration, and recruiting offices for the Army and Marine Corps. Timothy McVeigh, who is picked up within 90 minutes of the bombing after being pulled over for driving without a license plate and arrested for unlawfully carrying a concealed weapon, will be portrayed as the main perpetrator. He will be very cooperative with the arresting officer and will show no signs of having just committed such a massive bombing. Terry Nichols, Michael Fortier, and Lori Fortier will soon after be named as accomplices by authorities. On April 21, Terry Nichols will learn that he is wanted by the authorities in connection with the bombing, and will immediately turn himself in. In neither case will these men act like people who had just engaged in the largest terrorist attack in the history of America. Many witness reports will state that McVeigh was seen with at least one additional unidentified man (not Nichols or Fortier) around the time of the event (identified in these reports as "John Doe #2"), although authorities will ignore this information and then later deny it. In fact, there will be reports of up to four additional accomplices made by witnesses that will be ignored and eventually forgotten about by the authorities. Witnesses who saw anything that didn’t fit the official version of events will be intimidated into changing their stories, or otherwise ignored. Before McVeigh is even caught and identified as a suspect, the BATF will already be claiming that this terrorist act was in retaliation to the Waco massacre at the Branch Davidian compound. McVeigh’s anger over that event, which was a reflection of the feelings of many people, was used to prop up the claims that he perpetrated the OKC bombing. A 7,000 lb. fertilizer (ammonium nitrate) bomb in a Ryder rental truck will be claimed by authorities to have caused the destruction of the Murrah building, as well as damaging or destroying 324 other buildings in a 16-block radius. They will equate the effects of the blast to damage that would be caused by 5.000 lbs. of TNT. The blast of the fertilizer bomb had to have been powerful enough to penetrate deep into the building in order to knock out a number of large supporting pillars. However, a fertilizer bomb by itself – even of this size – could not have done nearly as much damage as what occurs at the blast site. Pillars closer to the truck bomb survived the blast and columns further away went down, suggesting that more than one bomb was responsible for the damage. Two additional unexploded bombs will be found in the building. There will be many reports that there were two bomb blasts, several seconds apart that were heard by witnesses, and both blasts

registered on seismograph charts. This will also be denied by authorities, and surveillance tapes from the area that might prove or disprove this claim will be suppressed. All of this suggests that there is far more to the story than what the authorities are revealing. As the official story unfolds in the media, it will change repeatedly and facts that come out early will later be ignored or denied. Added to this is the fact that several people saw what appeared to be workmen handling what appeared to be plastic explosives at one of the underground pillars of the building several days before the bombing. At least one witness will state that the workers seemed out of place and acted very nervous when they saw her watching them, hiding the materials they had when she approached. One police officer who was one of the first to arrive at the scene, Terrance Yeakey, will state that McVeigh’s truck couldn’t have contained an ammonium nitrate bomb because the air would have been unbreathable for some time after the bombing, which it wasn’t. Yeakey didn’t buy the official story, and was harassed and intimidated by his fellow officers for saying so. He will be found dead a year later under unusual circumstances that would refute the official claim that he committed suicide. Also, an FBI agent named Burmeister will acknowledge during McVeigh’s trial that no PETN or ammonium nitrate was found at the blast scene. Coincidentally (or not), the FBI had a bomb squad drill the day before, and the Sheriff’s bomb squad was witnessed at the scene just prior to the explosion. They will later deny this, and yet they will arrive at the bomb site only a few minutes after the blast. Witnesses will be intimidated by the FBI into accepting a false version of events. This pattern will occur again and again in future terrorist acts on US soil. While rescue workers are searching for survivors immediately after the blast, they will be stopped while federal officials remove boxes of documents. Up to 50 federal agents will spend much of the night carrying boxes from the floors occupied by the federal DEA and BATF. These may have been documents that the FBI will later admit were withheld from the defense lawyers. The targeted building will be torn down within a month and all evidence on the site will be disposed of, effectively removing any chance of conducting a proper investigation and forcing the official version of events. The same tactic will be used immediately after the 9/11 disaster in 2001. The circumstances surrounding the Oklahoma City bombing strongly suggests deeper complicity by government agencies and a major cover-up. McVeigh will be portrayed as acting through a militia group, but this will never be proven. The purported reason for the bombing is retaliation for the Waco massacre that occurred exactly two years earlier. It should be noted that this date is an important day of human sacrifice for satanists. McVeigh, Nichols, and Michael Fortier had become friends while in the Army. All three were supporters of the militia movement, opposed gun control, and believed that the government was incredibly corrupt. McVeigh had earlier disclosed to friends that he was upset because he had been implanted with a

microchip while in the military during the Gulf War, which suggests that he might have been influenced by mind-control. McVeigh had been a loyal and decorated soldier in the Army, and had performed valiantly on the front lines at the start of the Gulf War. It will be discovered that he had taken a psychological operations training course while stationed at Ft. Riley, and had been attempting to get into the Special Forces, but was apparently never accepted. Although this fact will be used to portray him as a disgruntled soldier whose dreams were dashed, it is very likely that he was secretly enlisted as a covert agent and continued to work for the military, even up to and after the bombing. After his arrest, McVeigh will be visited at least seventeen times by the CIA’s infamous mind-control expert, Dr. Louis Jolyin West. West will also head a psychological trauma team put together by the American Psychological Association to treat survivors and victim’s families. Interestingly, the Alfred P. Murrah building had been previously targeted numerous times in the past, the last time being in October 1983 by a white supremacist group that called itself ‘The Covenant, the Sword, and the Arm of the Lord’. The founders of this group who participated in this plan were James Ellison and Richard Snell. The group had also plotted to park “a van or trailer in front of the Federal Building and blow it up”, in their case, with rockets detonated by a timer. After Snell's appeal for murdering two people in unrelated cases was denied, he was executed the same day as the OKC bombing. Was he an additional sacrificial lamb? Could he have known something that could expose who was really behind McVeigh’s actions? It turns out that the FBI, ATF, and probably the CIA were all facilitating the plans for this terrorist act, and had been warned by multiple sources about it just days before the event, but chose to ignore those warnings. McVeigh’s lead lawyer, Stephen Jones, will come to believe that McVeigh was a patsy in a larger conspiracy, but this will be dismissed by Judge Matsch, who will independently rule the evidence concerning such a possibility to be too insubstantial to be admissible. A gag order will be imposed during the trial, prohibiting attorneys on either side from commenting to the press on the evidence, proceedings, or opinions regarding the trial proceedings. While prosecutors will intersperse relatively circumstantial evidence with heartwrenching and completely irrelevant tales from tearful bombing victims, the defense will not be allowed to present any expert witnesses debunking the government's ‘single bomb’ theory, or any evidence linking other suspects to the crime. A 517-page Justice Department report will be published that criticizes the FBI crime laboratory and David Williams, one of the agency's explosives experts, for reaching unscientific and biased conclusions. The report will claim that Williams had worked backward in the investigation rather than basing his determinations on forensic evidence. This suggests that a predetermined conclusion was sought during the investigation, with no consideration to reaching the truth. As late as May 2001, the FBI will announce that it had withheld over 3,000 documents from McVeigh's defense counsel. McVeigh, who will have already been convicted and sentenced to death by this time, will have his execution postponed for one month so that

the defense can review the documents. On June 6, Judge Matsch will rule that the documents would not prove McVeigh innocent and will order the execution to proceed. With President George W. Bush’s approval, McVeigh will be executed by lethal injection five days later. Most people sentenced to death wait years before being executed (McVeigh’s was the first federal execution in 38 years). Nichols will eventually receive 161 consecutive life sentences without the possibility of parole. For testifying against McVeigh and Nichols, Michael Fortier, who the FBI will pressure night and day for months, will cooperate and receive a reduced sentence of twelve years in prison and a $75,000 fine, and his wife will receive complete immunity – provided she performs in the prosecutions favor during the investigation and trial. After doing ten and a half years, Michael Fortier will be released and put into the Witness Protection Program and given a new identity. Nobody else will ever be investigated for the bombing. In spite of the possibility that there was a larger conspiracy at work, McVeigh will release a letter in which he writes, “For those die-hard conspiracy theorists who will refuse to believe this, I turn the tables and say: Show me where I needed anyone else. Financing? Logistics? Specialized tech skills? Brainpower? Strategy? ... Show me where I needed a dark, mysterious ‘Mr. X’!” Was this letter intended to cover up a larger conspiracy, or was it reflecting the truth? Or, just as probable, did McVeigh merely think he was acting of his own accord? A great deal of evidence will arise that suggests even further that people working within the government were involved in perpetrating this event. For instance, BATF employees who worked in the Murrah Building apparently received messages on their pagers prior to the bombing telling them not to go in to work on this day. It will also be discovered that McVeigh was reportedly trained at the School of the Americas, the CIA's academy for death squads, and he was actually a CIA sharpshooter and assassin who had been involved in covert government drug trafficking operations, and had been decorated several times, even receiving a commendation while he was in prison for the bombing. According to McVeigh’s sister, McVeigh had been recruited by a special operations Army group, but he had supposedly turned them down. He had apparently told her that this group was involved in criminal activities, including protecting drug shipments, assassinations, and population control. During his Grand Jury hearing, McVeigh appeared calm and unworried, as though he knew that he would go free. He refused to speak to anyone, protecting whoever it was that had orchestrated the plot to bomb the building. Investigations will reveal that there were strong ties to Middle Eastern terrorist groups who were using American neo-Nazi and white supremacist groups as proxies to engineer the plot. Various naïve government insiders will report that the bombing was a failed sting operation, and that John Doe #2 was an undercover agent who was supposed to disarm the bomb at the last moment but had failed to do so.

These insiders will state that the federal authorities had planted this agent deep within the militia movement, and the agent’s identity was being protected with the belief that he would be seen as a hero within the movement and would then be trusted enough to be let in on their future plans. These insiders will effectively suggest that the protection of this agent’s identity is more important than exposing the bombing as a failed sting operation. Immediately after the event, public opinion will be mobilized against the apparent threat of the growing militia movement, and the consequences of this will be the public acceptance of President Clinton’s ‘solutions’ of increased FBI powers to infiltrate and attack these militia groups, as well as to allow military enforcement of domestic laws, and a media ban on so-called 'anti-government' extremists such as the People's Militia, who are fully aware of the workings of America's secret government. (See online book, The Oklahoma City Bombing and the Politics of Terror, by David Hoffman) 1995 (April 24) – The ‘Unabomber’, later alleged to be Ted Kaczynski, sends a letter to the New York Times in which he promises "to desist from terrorism" if the Times or the Washington Post publishes his manifesto, titled Industrial Society and Its Future (also called the Unabomber Manifesto), He defends his actions in the letter, arguing that his bombings are extreme but necessary to attract attention to the erosion of human freedom necessitated by modern technologies that require large-scale organization. He warns of the psychological consequences for individual life within our current industrial-technological system, which he states has robbed contemporary humans of their autonomy, diminished their rapport with nature, and forced them “to behave in ways that are increasingly remote from the natural pattern of human behavior.” He also states that rather than recognizing that humans currently live in conditions that make them terribly unhappy, the system develops ways of controlling human responses to the overly stressful environment in which they find themselves. He goes on to identify some of these trends: “Imagine a society that subjects people to conditions that make them terribly unhappy, then gives them the drugs to take away their unhappiness. Science fiction? It is already happening to some extent in our own society. It is well known that the rate of clinical depression has been greatly increasing in recent decades. We believe that this is due to disruption of the power process... The entertainment industry serves as an important psychological tool of the system, possibly even when it is dishing out large amounts of sex and violence. Entertainment provides modern man with an essential means of escape. While absorbed in television, videos, etc., he can forget stress, anxiety, frustration, dissatisfaction.”

The later sections of the manifesto speculate about the future evolution of this system, arguing that it will inevitably lead to the end of human freedom. Paragraphs 157 and 158 state: “157 Assuming that industrial society survives, it is likely that technology will eventually acquire something approaching complete control over human behavior. It has been established beyond any rational doubt that human thought and behavior have a largely biological basis. As experimenters have demonstrated, feelings such as hunger, pleasure, anger and fear can be turned on and off by electrical stimulation of appropriate parts of the brain. Memories can be destroyed by damaging parts of the brain or they can be brought to the surface by electrical stimulation. Hallucinations can be induced or moods changed by drugs. There may or may not be an immaterial human soul, but if there is one it clearly is less powerful than the biological mechanisms of human behavior. For if that were not the case then researchers would not be able so easily to manipulate human feelings and behavior with drugs and electrical currents 158. It presumably would be impractical for all people to have electrodes inserted in their heads so that they could be controlled by the authorities. But the fact that human thoughts and feelings are so open to biological intervention shows that the problem of controlling human behavior is mainly a technical problem; a problem of neurons, hormones and complex molecules; the kind of problem that is accessible to scientific attack. Given the outstanding record of our society in solving technical problems, it is overwhelmingly probable that great advances will be made in the control of human behavior.” The above excerpt of the Unabomber’s manifesto reveals the writer’s acute awareness of mind-control technologies. The manifesto will be published in the Washington Post on September 19. The style and content of the text will be recognized by Kaczynski’s brother David, who had often debated with Ted the subject matter contained within it. His recognition of the text will lead to Kaczynski’s capture in April of 1996. (See online file Ted Kaczynski, at wikipedia) 1995 (August 19) – The San Francisco Chronicle reports that 48-year-old freeway sniper Christopher Shaw Scalley had told authorities after his arrest that he had been receiving messages via radio waves and electronic appliances, and had heard voices telepathically from passing vehicles. 1995 (August 24) – The release of Windows 95. It will later be discovered to have a secret backdoor built into it for NSA access. Microsoft holds 90% of the market share of computer users, with their Windows operating system running on most home and office computers. 1995 (December 15) – The second in a series of deaths occur that are connected to the cult group, Order of the Solar Temple. 16 cult members (13 adults and 3 children) are immolated in a clearing on a plateau in Vercors, France. They were shot and then their bodies burned. The killers had committed suicide after killing and torching the others.

1995 – While employed as a Court Intervention Social worker at Child Protective Services in San Diego, California, Diana Napolis decides to work undercover on her own time and investigate satanic cults on the internet under the pseudonyms ‘Curio’ and ‘Karen Jones’. A year earlier she had established the Ritual Abuse Court Cases Project, which was dedicated to proving that satanic ritual abuse existed after a cover-up had occurred in San Diego County. In spite of this, she continued to address ritual abuse cases, and successfully protected children via the system she was employed by despite the efforts of the Director of CPS to stop all training about this subject. 1995 – The US government declassifies its remote-viewing programs. 1995 – The Farsight Institute is founded by Courtney Brown, Ph.D., evolving from a research program he conducted in the early 1990s (described in his book, Cosmic Voyage: A Scientific Discovery of Extraterrestrials Visiting Earth). Brown's investigations began with his training in a remote viewing technology that had previously been used by the US military during highly classified operations in the 1980s and 1990s, according to his sales literature. “Historically, the principal breakthroughs with this technology were made at Stanford Research Institute in the 1970s and 1980s by the gifted artist and natural psychic, Ingo Swann. The vision of The Farsight Institute is to promote the continued research and development of the most modern and effective forms of this continually evolving technology.” Other remote viewing gurus from the SRI remote-viewing program will spring up like poison mushrooms around the country, ranting obliquely on the paranormal and scapegoating ‘aliens’. 1995 – DreamWorks SKG and Microsoft join forces to form DreamWorks Interactive, to produce interactive and multimedia entertainment properties. 1995 – Release of the Alien Autopsy film by British entrepreneur Ray Santilli. Eleven years later in 2006 he will admit that the film is a hoax. 1995 – The Internet is commercialized. More ISPs quickly come into service to meet increasing demand. 1996 (March 13) – Thomas Hamilton kills sixteen children and one teacher and wounds ten others at Dunblane Primary School in Scotland. He ends the rampage by killing himself. There is evidence that Hamilton was part of a child pornography ring that included police and politicians, and to silence him, the shooting had been staged to make it appear that he was the shooter. Hamilton will be found to have had links to two senior politicians in Scotland, as well as the head of NATO and Scotland’s Secretary of State. He was also involved in Freemasonry. 1996 (April 29) – Martin Bryant calmly walks around a tourist site in Tasmania, methodically shooting 56 people, killing 35 of them. Interestingly,

Bryant is in possession of an assault rifle that had been handed in to police in Victoria as part of a gun amnesty program, but mysteriously wound up in Bryant's hands before the massacre. After his arrest, Bryant said that he had been ‘gotten to’, and had been ‘programmed’. An anti-social loner, Bryant had recently returned from a solitary two-week trip to the U.S., ostensibly to visit Disneyland. Australian Customs agents noticed he carried no luggage and was acting strangely. They took him to the hospital to be examined as a possible drug courier, but found nothing. Had Bryant actually visited Disneyland, or had he visited a different type of playground - one inhabited by the mind-control masters of the CIA? In the wake of this massacre, Australia underwent wholesale gun confiscation of its citizenry. Not surprisingly, Australia and New Zealand have long served as a playground for the CIA, who reportedly played a major role in the overthrow of Australian Prime Minister Gough Whitlam, directed from the CIA's super-secret Pine Gap facility. It has also been reported that the CIA has been testing subliminal TV transmissions to influence the outcome of elections. (See online book, The Oklahoma City Bombing and the Politics of Terror, by David Hoffman) 1996 (April 3) – Ted Kaczynski is arrested as the Unabomber, ending a mail-bombing campaign that has been going on since 1978. There will be many indications that Kaczynski was set up as a patsy. The signs of a coverup will be similar to those in other high-profile ‘lone nut’ cases. The authorities end all further investigation into the case immediately after Kaczynski is apprehended and present the public with their version of the facts. He will be denied the attorney of his choice, San Francisco radical lawyer Tony Serra, who would probably have mounted an ideological defense that could result in disclosure of federal entrapment or conspiracy. Instead he will be appointed two federally employed California ‘defense’ attorneys, who are convinced of Kaczynski’s guilt and will intend to seek an insanity plea. Kaczynski will balk at these legal maneuvers and, after a request to represent himself is denied, will bargain a guilty plea in return for life imprisonment instead of the death penalty. Many questionable elements of the official story are ignored – including strong evidence that there were other accomplices – and never allowed to be contested. Authorities quickly gather up and cart away every possible piece of physical evidence related to the case, including Kaczynski’s entire cabin and everything in it. During his sentencing, on May 4, 1998, Kaczynski will make the following brief statement: “My statement will be very brief. A few days ago the government filed a sentencing memorandum, the purpose of which was clearly political. By discrediting me personally,

they hope to discredit the idea expressed by the Unabomber. In reality, the government has discredited itself. “The sentencing memorandum contains false statements, distorted statements and statements that mislead by omitting important facts. At a later time I expect to respond at length to the sentencing memorandum and also the many other falsehoods that have been propagated about me. Meanwhile, I only ask that people reserve their judgment about me and about the Unabom case until all the facts have been made public.” (See online file, The Scapegoat: Ted Kaczynski, Ritual Murder and the Invocation of Catastrophe, by Michael A. Hoffman II) 1996 (July) – Dr. Ian Wilmut of Roslin Institute in Scotland, succeeds in the first cloning of a mammal – ‘Dolly’ the sheep. 1996 (August 13) – Four years after his early release from prison for sexual abuse of children, Belgian authorities arrest Marc Dutroux once again for his involvement in the disappearances of young girls, along with his wife (an elementary school teacher), a lodger, a policeman, and another man named Michel Lelievre. The latter is described as “an associate with political connections”. Two days after the arrest, police search Dutroux's home and find a soundproof dungeon/torture chamber. Several days after this, police will dig up the bodies of two eight-year-old girls at another of Dutroux's homes. They had been kept in one of Dutroux’s dungeons for nine months after their abductions, during which time they were repeatedly tortured and sexually assaulted, which was all captured on videotape. More buried bodies will also be found. At least ten other people will be arrested in connection with these crimes. Evidence of high-level government and police complicity will begin to emerge. An accomplice, businessman Jean-Michel Nihoul, will confess to organizing an orgy at a Belgian chateau that had been attended by government officials, a former European Commissioner, and a number of law enforcement officers. A Belgian senator will note, quite accurately, that such parties are part of a system “which operates to this day and is used to blackmail the highly placed people who take part.” Nihoul will claim that he is beyond the reach of the law because he has information that, if made public, “would bring the Government and the entire state down.” In September, 23 suspects - at least nine of whom are police officers – will be detained and questioned about their possible complicity in the crimes and/or their negligence in investigating the case. The reports are based on information supplied by a police inspector who had already been charged as an accomplice. This case will have connections to the 1991 assassination of prominent Belgian businessman and politician Andre Cools, who had been planning to make some ‘shocking revelations’ before his death. High-ranking officials will continually interfere with investigations as it becomes known that a pedophile ring exists that involves very wealthy and powerful individuals. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan)

1996 (September 1) – Britain’s Sunday Telegraph headlines a breakthrough in gravity-shielding research by a Russian scientist named Dr. Evgeny Podkletnov at Tampere University of Technology in Finland. The research had already been heavily scrutinized by a number of independent experts, and a paper was being put forward for publication in Journal of Physics D: Applied Physics. However, the release of this news causes Podkletnov to be ostracized by the university and the paper is pulled from the journal. Podkletnov goes back to Russia for a year but continues his work, eventually returning to Finland to work at a local company. The reaction he received for the newspaper article may have been intended to cover up the significance of this research. Like the work of Douglas Torr and Ning Li in 1993, Podkletnov’s work involves the use of superconductors to inhibit gravitational force. The development of superconductors at this time is still in relative infancy. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1996 (September 17) – A shooting at Penn State University, State College, PA leaves one dead and one wounded. The shooter, 19-year-old Jillian Robbins, when asked why she did it, will state repeatedly, “I don't know.” Was she under mind-control? Robbins had suffered hallucinations since the tenth grade, including hearing voices. She had enlisted in the US Army Reserve before graduation, where she became a rifle expert. She had been seeing a State College psychologist who was treating her in the months before the shooting, and had told him of urges to ‘commit random acts of violence’ and of owning a Mauser rifle. The psychologist, Wilbur Wadlington, had done nothing about it. She had been discharged from a mental institution only a month before the shootings. 1996 (December 25) – The molestation/murder of six-year-old beauty queen JonBenet Ramsey. By all appearances, the parents, John and Patsy Ramsey, or someone very close to them, are the killers. JonBenet’s body is found in the basement of their Boulder, Colorado home with a rope around her neck, and there are signs of sexual abuse. The body has been dead long enough to give off an odor, meaning that JonBenet had been killed days earlier, but this fact will be completely ignored. An autopsy will reveal that she had been sexually abused many times in the past. It will become strongly suspected that the parents were involved in a satanic pedophile ring and were pimping out their daughter. It is also suspected that JonBenet was killed in a snuff movie. According to the San Jose Mercury News, at least 150 videotapes were seized from the home. John Ramsey, who is a former Navy officer, runs a Denver company called Access Graphics, which is doing business with a company called the William Morris Agency, which represents up and coming child models and had solicited a contract from the Ramsey's for the 'services' of JonBenet. At the time of JonBenet’s death, this company is under investigation for its involvement in a child pornography ring. The pornography ring is being run

by the FBI’s Div. 5 (Special/Black Ops). During the investigation into JonBenet’s murder, John Ramsey’s company computers will be found to contain a large volume of child pornography. Access Graphics, it will turn out, also has service contracts that are directly tied to the Iran Contra affair. Access Graphics’ bank accounts are with Silverado Savings and Loan, the noted Iran Contra money-laundering outfit that is administered by the Director of Silverado, Neil Bush, George W. Bush's brother. John Ramsey is also on a list of witnesses that are never subpoenaed by former Iran Contra Prosecutor Lawrence Walsh. John Ramsey's daughter Elizabeth (from his first marriage), will later uncover several vivid memories of satanic, ritual sexual abuse after a failed suicide attempt (during the ensuing therapy sessions) in which her father apparently played a major role in the rituals. Within several months of uncovering the memories and going ‘public’ with them (talking to friends and family members) she will be found dead – killed in a freak car accident. 1996 – Robert (Willie) Pickton and his brother David sell various parcels of their pig farm property in Port Coquitlam, a small town just outside the city of Vancouver, and acquire over five million dollars in total. David Pickton takes some of the money and opens a party hall down the street from the farm, calling it ‘Piggy’s Palace’. Robert Pickton carries on running the pig farm. Piggy’s Palace will soon become a hangout for local Hell’s Angels members (they have a clubhouse across the road from the farm), as well as politicians, police officers, businessmen, teachers, and sometimes even children. It will also be regularly frequented by many different female street workers, most of them brought there from nearby Vancouver City, who are there to be used for sexual services, and some will never leave. This same year, Robert Pickton will be charged with attempted murder and unlawful confinement for repeatedly stabbing a street worker who he had been holding against her will at his farm. She is naked and has a pair of handcuffs locked onto one wrist when she flags down a car during her escape. She dies and is revived at the hospital. The charges will be dropped within a year, with the excuse from court prosecutors that they would be unable to get a conviction because the woman was a drug addict and would never be believed in court. (See online file, Death Farm, by Charles Mudede) 1996 – Eric Harris (who will be one of the shooters at Columbine High School) and his family move to Littleton, Colorado from Plattsburgh Air Force Base in New York. Before he leaves, he will confide to a friend that he’ll be glad to get away from the place because of the experiments the military has been conducting on him there. Plattsburgh AFB has an 18-level underground facility where many different types of psyops and mind-control programs are conducted.

1996 – Mexican police break up an international child pornography ring based in the resort of Acapulco that reportedly has at least 4,000 clients in the United States. A UN envoy investigating the case states that the child pornography sometimes involved babies of less than one month old. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1996 – A pedophile ring called the Orchid Club is exposed in San Jose, California. The member’s crimes include recruiting young relatives and friends of their own children to be molested and photographed. The club is also involved in real-time exploitation of children on the internet, where members are able to send in requests and have them acted-out on live feeds. The club also held a pedophile ‘summit,’ at which members could trade stories about pre-teen girls they have molested and photographed in sexually explicit poses. The summit was held on April 20 – the birth date of Adolph Hitler and a major satanic holiday. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1996 – The NSA’s ‘Intelink’ system goes online as part of the ECHELON system, connecting 13 different US intelligence agencies and some allied agencies with the aim of providing instant access to all types of intelligence information. Just like logging onto the Internet, intelligence analysts and military personnel can view an atlas on Intelink's home page, and then click on any country they choose in order to access intelligence reports, video clips, satellite photos, databases and status reports. (See file, Inside Echelon, by Duncan Campbell) 1996 – Michael Aquino ‘retires’ from his satanic church, the Temple of Set. 1996 – America Online, the world’s largest Internet service provider, reaches five million members. 1997 – Released documents reveal that the CIA admits having encouraged reports of flying saucers in the 1950s and 1960s in order to obscure test flights of the U-2 and U-12 spy planes. (See book, The Hunt for Zero Point, by Nick Cook) 1997 – Police in France detain more than 250 people and confiscate some 5,000 videotapes in conjunction with an investigation into a massive child pornography ring. Those detained by police are described as “mainly married professionals.” A dozen of them will soon turn up dead, allegedly suicide victims. As the case proceeds in the years ahead, the French courts will be accused of attacking the easy targets – the porn consumers – rather than the producers and distributors. Senior public figures will be among those investigated – but their cases will be dropped before going to court.

(See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1997 (March) – An RCMP report states: “It has been determined that [Robert Pickton’s stabbing victim from 1996] is an East Hastings [Vancouver, BC] area hooker and Pickton is known to frequent that area weekly. […] Given the violence shown by Pickton towards prostitutes and women in general, this information is being forwarded to your attention.” This familiarity of the police with Robert Pickton won’t be uncovered until after his trial, when it’s entered into evidence during a later inquiry. 1997 (March 22) – The third and final in a series of murders, suicides, and arsons occur in connection to the cult group, Order of the Solar Temple, this time in St. Casimir, Quebec. Five people, four cult members and the parent of one of the members have committed suicide. Police discover a letter explaining that they have taken this action to ensure a path to the new world. 1997 (March 26) – Thirty-nine Heaven’s Gate cult members, including the leader, Marshall Applewhite, commit mass suicide. They believed that by doing so they will be transferred to an alien spaceship that is purportedly following the Hale-Bopp comet as it passes near Earth. Three members of Heaven’s Gate worked for Advanced Development Group (ADG), Inc., a company that developed computer-based instruction for the US Army. ADG later became ManTech Advanced Development Group. These organizations have connections to the First Earth Battalion. The First Earth Battalion was a psyop group that was formed in the US military to allegedly handle military extraterrestrial affairs such as abductions, contact through telepathy, remote viewing, ESP, and possible simulated extraterrestrial ‘drills’ using holographic technology. First Earth Battalion eventually became the Jedi Project. All of these secretive psyop groups are well skilled in spreading disinformation (including about themselves). 1997 – Michael Aquino files two lawsuits in San Francisco against Diana Napolis’ internet provider Electriciti in attempts to force them to cancel her account and reveal her identity to him. During this time, Aquino is routinely misrepresenting to newspaper reporters what had occurred on the internet between them in attempts to make himself appear a victim. However, after reviewing Napolis’ public messages, Electriciti refuses to disclose her identity or even investigate who she might be because they believe that Aquino is dangerous and that Napolis needed protection. These lawsuits are dismissed due to the CDA precluding internet companies from liability due to their customer’s messages. 1997 – While preparing for a story about the abduction of Johnny Gosch, Karen Burnes of ABC’s 20/20 uncovers 45 other victims of child sexual abuse, satanic abuse, and kidnapping, several of whom knew Gosch and were with

him on many occasions. One of these victims is the son of Anton LaVey, founder of the Church of Satan, who will claim that his father had castrated him. 1997 (October 1) – A shooting at Pearl High School in Pearl, Mississippi leaves two dead, seven wounded. The shooters are Luke Woodham, 16, and Grant Boyette, 19. Woodham will later state, “[I] fought with myself because I didn't want to do any of it.” Woodham, who had killed his mother earlier in the day, will later state that he doesn't remember killing her, but will recall hearing Boyette’s voice telling him to kill her. He will also say he was driven by demons. Boyette, an avid church-goer with deeply religious parents, will be found to have directed Woodham’s actions during the killings, and is the leader of a small satanic cult named the ‘Kroth’. This group consists of Boyette, Woodham, and at least five other teenagers, and are known to dabble in black magic. All seven will be charged for the murders. The shooting spree had been planned since the beginning of the year and was intended to target a number of enemies of the group. A notebook belonging to Woodham will be found, in which is written, “I killed because people like me are mistreated every day. […] I did this to show society—'Push us and we will push back.' I suffered all my life. No one ever truly loved me. No one ever truly cared about me.” 1997 (December 1) – A shooting at Heath High School in Paducah, Kentucky leaves three dead and five wounded. The shooter, 14-year-old Michael Carneal, is carrying five guns and 1,000 rounds of ammo. When later asked why he did it, will state he doesn't know. Carneal's homeroom teacher will report that he didn’t seem to recognize what he had done. His sister, Kelly Carneal, who is present at the shooting, will state that her brother’s face looked different and his body posture was different. She will state, “He looked like a completely different person. I would not have recognized him had he not had on the same clothes as he had on that morning. .... He turned his head and he looked at me. And I realized he didn't know who I was. ... I will never forget that stare on Michael's face in a million years...... It was just blank, nothingness. It's like there was nothing in him.” Carneal’s father is a prominent attorney. Carneal will later describe in an interview how he was being controlled and tormented by a group of entities that called themselves the ‘Danes’. He had told some students that “something big was going to happen” on that Monday. 1997 – Laura Knight-Jadczyk and her channeling group, the Cassiopaeans, are joined by her soon-to-be husband, Dr. Arkadiusz (Ark) Jadczyk. Dr. Jadczyk is a theoretical physicist working as a professor at the University of Wroclaw, Poland, teaching mathematical physics. He had met Laura on the Internet and then came to the USA to join her and her group. The group certainly has all the signs of a cult, and Laura is the perfect portrayal of a paranoid and psychopathic cult leader with delusions of persecution and self-

importance who demands very tight control over her members and what they believe. She claims to be a ‘Wanderer’, which is a term that comes straight out of the Ra material channeled by Carla Rueckert, Don Elkins, and Jim McCarty. 1997 – HAARP is activated, although it isn’t slated to go fully on-line until 2002. 1998 (January 27) – Charges that have been laid against Robert Pickton for unlawful confinement and attempted murder are stayed by BC’s Criminal Justice Branch. 1998 (February 11) – The Times reports that workmen restoring the residence of Benjamin Franklin in London have dug up the remains of a baby, five children and four adults from under the house. The bones are estimated to be about 200 years old and were buried at the time Franklin was living in the house, which was his home from 1757 to 1762 and from 1764 to 1775. Most of the bones show signs of having been dissected, sawn or cut. One skull has been drilled with several holes. While living in London, Franklin was a member of the Hellfire Club, otherwise known as the Order of the Friars of St. Francis of Wycombe. The Hellfire Club was a meeting place where members of high society and ‘people of quality’ could meet and engage in black masses, sexual orgies, and other immoral acts. 1998 (March 24) – School shooting at Westside Middle School in Jonesboro, Arkansas. Five are killed and ten injured. The camouflage-clad killers are 13year-old Mitchell Scott Johnson and 12-year-old Andrew Douglas Golden. Johnson’s mother is a prison guard and had married an inmate when Johnson was seven years old. Following the shooting, Johnson's attorney will claim that Johnson had been sexually abused as a child by a family member of the day care where he had been placed. A year before the shootings, he was charged with molesting a 3-year-old child. Both of Golden’s parents are postal workers. Since that day, when the boys have been asked why they did it, they appeared not to be able to give an answer. Johnson will state, “I really thought that no one would actually be hurt.” 1998 (April 24) – A shooting at Parker Middle School in Edinborough, PA leaves one dead, three wounded. The shooter, 14-year-old Andrew Wurst, will state that he had no reason to do it. 1998 (May 22) – A shooting at Thurston High School in Springfield, Oregon leaves one dead, seven wounded. The shooter, Kip Kinkel, also kills his parents. He will repeatedly state in a police interview that he had no choice. Q: “Why did you go to school and start shooting people?” A: “I had to. I had no other choice. I couldn't do anything else.” He had been hearing loud voices in his head that commanded him to kill. When asked where he thinks the voices come from, Kip will reply, "Well, I had some theories. Maybe it was from the devil... the government might have put a chip in my head.

Government satellites might have transmitted to the chip.... At first I thought the voices were outside of my head because they were so very loud, like surround sound." Kinkel will also claim that he believes one satellite gives voices to the microchip and another follows his movements. 1998 (July) – At about this tine, Australia's longest serving mayor, 68-yearold Frank Arkell, is bludgeoned to death in his home. He had been facing 29 child sex charges, and was a key witness in a royal commission into police corruption that uncovered a pedophile network. Police suspect his murder is part of a series of gruesome gay hate killings in the Sydney region that are linked to a notorious pedophile ring. In the past few months two other men, one a convicted child sex offender, were attacked in their homes in similar circumstances and also suffered horrific injuries. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1998 (August) – Alleged mind-control victim Andy Pero goes public with his story. His father was a Lieutenant Commander at the Fallon Naval Air Station in Nevada at the time of his birth in 1969, and his experiences began about two years later. He has flashback memories of being subjected to shock treatments and various other forms of trauma at that age in order to split his mind and create multiple personalities. He states that he was programmed at such places as the University of Rochester, NY, the Rome National Air Base in Rome, NY, Camp Hero, at Montauk, LI, and also at Dobbins Air Force Base in Atlanta, GA. By 1974 his family had moved to Munich, Germany. At age 10 his mother enrolled him in a (legitimate, non-MKULTRA) Silva Mind Control course where he learns self-hypnosis techniques. His government mind-control programming involved training him to endure suffering beyond belief and be able to accomplish superhuman feats of strength and survival. One of the things he claims he was trained to do was to jump from extremely high places – including from airplanes without a parachute – and land without hurting himself. By the time he was 15 years old, he was being used on secret military missions. He also claims to have been used in the ‘Montauk Chair’ to create time portals and threedimensional materializations. He also claims to have encountered alien creatures during many of his experiences, including greys and reptilians. 1998 (September) – At about this time, police in 22 US states and 13 foreign countries conduct coordinated raids aimed at breaking up an internet child-pornography ring. The pedophile network is called the Wonderland Club, in honor of Lewis Carroll’s children's book, Alice's Adventures in Wonderland, and of Carroll himself, who is known to have had a predilection for underage children, and who has become something of a patron saint of pedophiles. The ring involves as many as 200 people around the world, who were exchanging thousands of sexually explicit images of children as young as 18 months. The

ring shares pictures of children being abused – in some cases live via webcam broadcasts over the internet. Some members are reported to be using their own children in pictures. In other cases, parents are suspected of taking money to let their children be used. Over 1,250 children are said to be featured in the photos and videos, many of whom appear to be suffering appalling injuries and are seen sobbing uncontrollably while being sexually violated. Most of the children are under the age of ten. The combined raids result in the seizure of more than 750,000 computer images of children. The raids include homes in Australia, Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Italy, Norway, Portugal and Sweden, although the ring extends into 47 countries. 107 suspects are eventually arrested. As with earlier raids on pedophile rings in Europe, a rash of ‘suicides’ will soon follow. Four of the 34 American suspects will commit suicide, including a retired Air Force pilot, a microbiologist, and a computer consultant. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1998 (October) – Wade Michael Page (aka Wade Vanbuskirk) receives a less-than-honorable discharge from the Army after serving for almost six years. He was stationed at Ft. Bliss, Texas, and Ft. Bragg in North Carolina, where he was trained as a Psychological Operations Specialist. After his discharge, he moves to Littleton, Colorado. According to some sources, he had grown up in Littleton, Colorado and was a student at Littleton High School. Page had become a neo-Nazi while in the military, and is possibly a member of the Trench Coat Mafia, the group that shooters Eric Harris and Dylan Klebold belonged to. 1998 – Vancouver Police have only two officers working in their missing persons unit, while the number of women disappearing from the downtown eastside is growing. 1998 – A large-scale international pedophile ring is discovered operating out of the Netherlands and Berlin, Germany. Images of abuse of babies and infants are being peddled via the Internet and other media. Police discover voluminous records of what appear to be clients and suppliers from countries including Israel, Ukraine, Britain, Russia and the United States. The ring is uncovered when a key member is found dead in Italy, apparently murdered by another member of the ring. His apartment is found to contain thousands of digital images stored on computer disks, as well as hundreds of addresses of suspected suppliers and clients. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1998 – Serial killer Henry Lee Lucas becomes the only inmate on death row to ever have his sentence commuted by then-Governor of Texas George W. Bush. Lucas’ partner in crime, Ottis Toole, will similarly have his sentence commuted in Florida by then-Governor Jeb Bush.

1998 – Rusty Nelson, who was the blackmail photographer for Lawrence King in the Franklin pedophile ring, is arrested in Oregon, and found in possession of thousands of pornographic photographs. 1998 – Diana Napolis publishes the results of her research in an archive titled Satanism and Ritual Abuse Archive, which consists of appellate documentation and news articles that provide substantial evidence proving that ritual abuse exists. 1999 (February 5) – In US District Court in Lincoln, Nebraska, an extraordinary hearing occurs in Paul A. Bonacci v. Lawrence E. King, a civil action in which the plaintiff charges that he had been ritualistically abused by the defendant, as part of a nationwide pedophile ring linked to powerful political figures in Washington and to elements of the US military and intelligence establishment. During the hearing, Noreen Gosch, whose twelve-year-old son Johnny was abducted in 1982, stuns the court with sworn testimony linking US Army Lt. Col. Michael Aquino (ret.) to the nationwide pedophile ring: “Well, then there was a man by the name of Michael Aquino. He was in the military. He had top Pentagon clearances. He was a pedophile. He was a Satanist. He's founded the Temple of Set. And he was a close friend of Anton LaVey. The two of them were very active in ritualistic sexual abuse. And they deferred funding from this government program to use [in] this experimentation on children. Where they deliberately split off the personalities of these children into multiples, so that when they're questioned or put under oath or questioned under lie detector, that unless the operator knows how to question a multiple-personality disorder, they turn up with no evidence. They used these kids to sexually compromise politicians or anyone else they wish to have control of. This sounds so far out and so bizarre I had trouble accepting it in the beginning myself until I was presented with the data. We have the proof. In black and white." Paul Bonacci, who was simultaneously a victim and a member of the nationwide pedophile crime syndicate, subsequently identifies Aquino as the man who ordered the kidnapping of Johnny Gosch. Three weeks later, on February 27, Judge Warren K. Urbom will order King, who is currently residing in Federal prison, to pay $1 million in damages to Bonacci. 1999 (April 20) – The Columbine High School massacre takes place. Eric Harris and Dylan Klebold enact a planned attack on their high school, killing 13 others and wounding 24 before allegedly turning their guns on themselves. The official report will be that the shooting started at 11:20 am and ended at 12:08 pm, although many witnesses will state that the shootings went on for far longer. This event would be televised live, with trained and fully-geared SWAT teams holding off outside the school for an

inexplicable length of time (up to four hours), allowing the shooters to continue their rampage and waiting until long after they finally kill themselves before taking any action at all. The police will later claim that they didn’t go in immediately because they were out-gunned. Because of this, teacher Dave Sanders will bleed to death waiting for help to arrive. Denver physician William Deagle, who attempts to go in to help the injured, is threatened with violence by the police and kept from doing so. Many eyewitness testimonies will reveal that others are involved in the shootings, some of them identified as Robert Perry, Chris Morris, Brian Sargent, and Joseph Stair. An older, muscular man with an ‘chiseled face’ is also witnessed at the scene carrying a shotgun, and another ‘pudgy’ male is seen with Harris and Klebold just before the shooting starts. Morris will be photographed being arrested by police at the scene. The names of these other shooters will be redacted from the police report later released to the public, serving to cover up their identities. Some or all of these named accomplices are connected to the ‘Trench Coat Mafia’, a neo-Nazi gang of youths and adults that Harris and Klebold are associated with. Early on during the shootings, three youths in combat fatigues – Matthew Christianson, Matt Akard, and Jim Branetti – are apprehended in a field near the school. They claim that they had heard about the shooting on the radio and had come to investigate, and name Harris and Klebold as the shooters. This is before any radio announcements have been made. In spite of the many witness reports of more than two shooters, authorities will not investigate the matter and conclude that there were only two shooters. At the same time, they will use the excuse that there might be other accomplices in order to withhold releasing an official report on the incident. Some witnesses inside the school will claim to have heard shots hours after both Harris and Klebold are supposed to have killed themselves at 12:08 pm. Police will report that just before 1:00 pm, they were exchanging gunfire with the shooters. A student inside the school will call into a local new station at 1:09 and report that he just heard gunfire. He will call back again soon after and report that he just saw shooters wearing black trench coats and masks. At about 3:45 pm, a reporter will state that he just heard more gunfire inside the school. From 60 to 90 bombs will later be found placed in various locations within the school. Several witnesses will report that they saw BATF officers shooting students inside the school. An incredible number of different federal and state agencies (one report claims 26), including NATO officers and a four-star general, will be witnessed at the scene soon after the shooting starts. A large, blue truck with NATO clearly printed on it is witnessed by numerous people on the school grounds at about 11:30 am. It is captured on camera from a helicopter. When the cameraman zooms in on it, the video feed is suddenly cut. An army of

psychiatric ‘grief councilors’ are also immediately on location to handle the surviving students, possibly to help deal with those students who witnessed what they shouldn’t have, pumping them with pharmaceuticals so that they will forget many of the details of what they witnessed. Many students who are interviewed will describe the school atmosphere as one with a lot of bullying and rivalry. Some students will state that the staff were known to turn their backs and do nothing to stop it. The educational system in the Denver area is focused heavily on ‘mental health’-related classes for students, and at Columbine there was a ‘death education’ class, which led several students to suicide. One student will describe class field trips to cemeteries, mortuaries, crematoriums and being assigned to write their own obituaries and eulogies, design their own headstones, etc., as well as classroom activities focusing on “how you would 'do it' if you killed yourself.” Many students besides Harris and Klebold had been harboring the idea of blowing up the school. It is possible that this was being influenced through mind-control in some way. The greater Denver area is a center for many secret government projects, and over 10,000 residents in the Littleton area work for companies that ran these programs. Like in a number of other suspect cases that appear to involve government complicity, certain facts that surface early on in the case will suddenly be forgotten, ignored, or covered up by the authorities. Nonetheless, there will be evidence that many students at Columbine knew about Harris and Klebold’s plans up to two years prior to the event, and know who some of the other accomplices are and who remain free. There will be threats made against witnesses, victims, and victim’s families by unknown parties in the days and weeks ahead, silencing many of them. When the school reopens for the new school year on August 16, a number of swastikas will be found drawn or etched both inside and outside the building. There will be rumors of Satanism and deeper connections of the Trench Coat Mafia to government agents. One member of the Trench Coat Mafia who told the police that satanic worship was practiced within this group is Eric Ault. The police will also question another unnamed person who is carrying sexually explicit photographs of a homosexual nature. This person will state that he had been to the house of an individual known to some in the TCM group as ‘Pedophile Bill’, a sadistic homosexual who had given him the pictures and had shown him photo albums which made him sick to his stomach. He will state that the albums contained sexually explicit photographs of small children up to the age of fourteen. Displays of homosexuality among the TCM group had been witnessed by Columbine students on a number of occasions. Journal notes and online entries will reveal that the killers had spent over a year planning this event, and had built over 100 homemade bombs that they were able to somehow plant throughout the school prior to the shooting event. Notes in Harris’ journal will also mention a plan to fly a plane into a

tall building to cause maximum damage (predating 9/11). A school video made by Harris, Klebold, and Scott Fuselier (the son of Dwayne Fuselier, lead FBI investigator in the case and a government psychologist) two years earlier eerily depicts an enactment very similar to the events of this day, as does an essay that Harris turns in to his teacher only weeks prior to the event. Scott Fuselier is a member of the Trench Coat Mafia as well. The fact that both Harris and Klebold appeared otherwise normal right up to morning classes just prior to the shootings, and that they were even making plans for their futures after graduating, makes it more plausible that they were triggered (through mind-control) to act as they did. Further evidence will reveal that Harris, if not Klebold, had been involved in a mind-control program earlier on, when his family lived at the Plattsburgh AFB in New York (his father Wayne gas an extensive military background as a retired Air Force officer with intelligence ties). Harris was known to be full of hate and have violent tendencies, while Klebold did not. This is reflected in their journals. A student who had known Harris will describe Harris telling him about a recurring dream where he is walking through the school shooting at people, with the school blowing up at the end. He also describes having other very vivid dreams that are like virtual reality games. Wellington Webb, the mayor of Denver, is said to have connections to the British Royal Family, who own a large amount of land in the area through various front companies. The new Denver International Airport, with its Masonic themes, Apocalyptic artwork, and rumored secret underground components, is being constructed in this area. On the same day of the shooting, a gas line leak is reported at the home of Eric Harris. When the Littleton Fire Department arrives they find live bombs with live triggers and lots of gas spilled in the garage. Because Chris Morris will help police to set up a man named Mark Manes for helped to buy guns for Harris and Klebold, he will be cleared of all charges. Manes, on the other hand, will receive a six-year prison sentence. Joseph Stair, who allegedly founded the TCM in Littleton, will commit suicide in 2007. The day after the shooting, David G. Penland, a certified private investigator who handles security for local neighborhoods and homeowner associations, will receive a call about a loud party taking place in the nearby town of Aurora (the location of a future mass shooting), and the participants were celebrating both Hitler's birthday and the victory of Harris and Klebold. Penland will state, “We know as a security firm that we have past reports on this youth being involved in Neo-Nazi activities. This he does not deny and he is proud of being part of this large group. He also has been arrested for other disturbances, and for selling and using drugs often.” He also stated that the resident of the home has been arrested on drug charges in the past.

Wade Michael Page, who will be directly involved in a mass shooting at a Sikh Temple years later (2012) in Oak Creek, Wisconsin, is living in Littleton, CO. during this time. He may have been one of the other shooters at Columbine. Page was a psyops specialist in the military prior to the Columbine shooting, (See online file, The REAL Columbine, by the CRTF Webmaster) 1999 (April 23) – Five juveniles are arrested on charges of planning an attack on Danforth Junior High School in Wimberley, Colorado. The five unnamed 14-year-old boys had had been planning the attack since the beginning of the year and intended to kill fellow students and teachers. A search of the suspect’s homes turn up crude explosive devices and gunpowder, as well as computer disks and internet documents about bombmaking. 1999 (April 24) – At a memorial for the victims of the Columbine shooting, Vice President Al Gore and numerous other government officials attend, all wearing the symbolic black trench coats that Eric Harris, Dylan Klebold, and their gang, the ‘Trench Coat Mafia’, were known to wear. There will also be an armed military presence, including a fly-over by Air Force jets. This seems to be a message to surviving witnesses and anyone else who has knowledge of the deeper aspects of this case, to intimidate them into keeping silent about what they know. 1999 (April 27) – A shooting at W.R. Myers High School in Taber, Alberta leaves one dead and one wounded. In a signed police statement, the shooter, Todd Cameron Smith, will state, “I have no particular reason for shooting the boys that I did. I don't know who any of them were.” Was he under mindcontrol? 1999 (April 29) – An unnamed 13-year-old boy with a loaded handgun and a hit list of 30 names is arrested at Sierra Middle School in Bakersfield after classmates report they see a gun under his shirt and see him loading it outside. A .40-caliber semiautomatic handgun and 13 rounds of ammunition are found on the boy. In the boy's backpack are 30 pieces of paper, each one with the name of a classmate or teacher, a drawing and the words “'because they deserved to die'” scrawled at the bottom. 1999 (May 20) – A shooting at Heritage High School in Conyers, Georgia leaves six wounded. The shooter, 15-year-old T.J. Solomon, upon handing the gun over (a teacher convinces T.J. not to kill himself when he puts the barrel in his mouth) starts crying hysterically and saying repeatedly “I don't know why I did this.” Witnesses will describe the shooter as initially ‘calm, sedate, vacant, and robotic’. A note by the assailant is found in his room that says, “I did this because, well, I'm not sure..... Ever since the shooting at Columbine in Colorado all I've been able to think about is doing this.” It continues, “One big question I leave behind for you to find is why. But for the sake of my brothers and sisters related to the Trench Coat Mafia, those answers will

have to remain out of the public eye.” Dr. Eddy Regnier, who teaches psychiatry at Harvard University and who will be hired by defense attorneys to examine Solomon, will state, “He heard voices telling him to do strange things, but they were robotic voices, not human voices.” 1999 (June) – At about this time, two unnamed German men go on trial, accused of running a child pornography ring in Germany, Poland and the Czech Republic. The pair, along with at least eleven known but unindicted accomplices, are reported to have made video recordings of the gang sexually abusing children between the ages of three and 14 since 1993. A large but unspecified quantity of videos, photography, magazines and CDROMs containing child pornography were confiscated. There is a possible connection to the Marc Dutroux case in Belgium: It is reported that There have been cases of Slovak children being taken to Vienna to make pornographic films. The Belgian paedophile Marc Dutroux had been a regular visitor to one Slovak town. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1999 (July 13) – Rafael Resendez-Ramirez reportedly walks across a bridge from Juarez, Mexico into El Paso, Texas and turns himself in. He is wanted for a string of alleged serial killings attributed to the ‘Railroad Killer’. Ramirez had been taken into custody several weeks earlier by the US Border Patrol, only to be promptly released despite his presence on FBI most-wanted lists and the issuing of alerts to the immigration service, and with a nationwide manhunt under way. He killed four more people after being let go. He chose to surrender in Texas, where there is a death penalty, rather than in Mexico, where there is none. 1999 (August) – Police in Latvia uncover a massive child prostitution/child pornography operation involving as many as 2,000 severely abused children. A special parliamentary commission is formed to investigate. The scandal will reach to the very top of the nation’s political power structure. In February 2000, the chairman of the commission will deliver a report to Parliament implicating the country's Prime Minister, Justice Minister, director of the State Revenue Service, and a number of army and law enforcement officers in the case. Efforts will immediately be taken to discredit the commission chairman, including making allegations that he is tied to the former KGB, enabling the allegations to be dismissed as ‘Communist’ propaganda. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1999 (August 27) – Only months after the Columbine massacre, four other high schools in Jefferson County, Colorado – Dakota Ridge, Standley Lake, Pomona, and Bear Creek – receive anonymous letters that suggest further threats of violence. They contain no specific threats of action, but make general statements that the Columbine High massacre was the start of more

school violence. A second set of threats will be mailed to local south Denver schools a week later. (See online file, The REAL Columbine, by the C.R.T.F. Webmaster) 1999 (September) – A raid is made on the home of Thomas and Janice Reedy in Ft. Worth, Texas, who are operating a business called Landslide Productions, which sells child pornography over the internet. The raid yields a database containing the names and addresses of 75,000 subscribers around the world. Although almost half of those subscribers were in the USA, only 100 arrests will be made in the months after the initial arrests. By early 2003, the story will have dropped out of sight with little indication that there would ever be any further arrests, despite the insistence from authorities early on that the initial arrests were just “the tip of the iceberg.” The names, addresses, and credit card information of more than 7,000 British subscribers are provided by the FBI to British authorities, who launch their own investigation. As in the USA, only a few of the known offenders will be arrested. Included among these suspects are hundreds of child welfare professionals, including police officers, care workers and teachers, all of whom are identified as ‘extremely high-risk pedophiles’. Included among those questioned by police will be television personality Matthew Kelly and legendary guitarist Pete Townsend. The list of British suspects also includes at least 20 senior executives, services personnel from at least five military bases, GPs, university academics, civil servants, and an official with the Church of England. 1999 (September 15) – Larry Gene Ashbrook opens fire on a Christian rock concert and teen prayer rally at Wedgewood Baptist Church in Fort Worth, Texas. He kills 7 people and wounds 7 others, almost all of them teenagers. Ashbrook commits suicide in the end. Ashbrook had previously served in the Navy. 1999 (December 6) – A shooting in Fort Gibson, Oklahoma leaves four wounded. According to a witness, the shooter, 13-year-old Seth Trickey, starts yelling, “I'm crazy, I'm crazy,” during the shooting. He drops the emptied 9 mm semiautomatic handgun when he is approached by a teacher. When later asked why he did it, Trickey will say “I don't know”. Trickey will be described as a smart and popular student. Was he under mind-control? 1999 (December 16) – Patrick J. Naughton, an executive of Walt Disney Co. who runs one of the company's child-friendly web sites, is convicted on child pornography charges. The very next day, the US 9th Circuit Court of Appeals will issue a ruling on pornography laws that will stipulate that the government cannot prohibit computer-generated sexual images that only appear to be pictures of children, since the graphics technology that is now available to the general public is so sophisticated that it is virtually impossible in many cases to prove that a pornographic image is of a real child. This ruling will effectively make digital still images of child pornography

completely legal. Within hours of the appeals court ruling, Naughton is released by federal prosecutors on $100,000 bail. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 1999 – Military Psyops Specialist Wade Michael Page receives a traffic ticket for driving without a valid license in Littleton, Colorado. This places him in the area during the time of the Columbine shootings. 1999 – Ex-Monarch sex slave Brice Taylor publishes her book, Thanks for the Memories, in which she discloses her experiences as a mind-controlled slave of the Illuminati. She describes how sexual blackmail is used to control highranking politicians and explains the true moral depravity that those in power have sunk to. 1999 – Ben Johnston, an employee at DynCorp who is working in Bosnia, discovers that fellow employees and supervisors are involved in purchasing illegal weapons, women, forged passports and are participating in other immoral acts including pedophilia. Johnston witnesses coworkers and supervisors literally buying and selling women and children for their own personal enjoyment, and heard employees bragging about the various ages and talents of the individual slaves they had purchased. When Johnston reports the activity, he is fired “for bringing discredit to the company” and forced into temporary protective custody. A videotape of Johnston’s supervisor raping a 14-year-old girl will be retained as evidence. DynCorp is a long-time contractor to the US military, maintaining its aircraft. No charges will be laid and the company will continue to do business with the US government. 1999 (December 1) – The Los Angeles Times reports the discovery of a mass grave in Juarez, Mexico, just across the US border. Early reports state that from 100 to 300 bodies are expected to be exhumed, including 22 missing US citizens and a number of former FBI and DEA informants. The investigation quickly expands to include at least three more possible burial grounds in the area. When US authorities take over the investigation, the body count suddenly drops to 9 and coverage of the story promptly seizes, indicating a coverup. The location is exactly where serial killer Henry Lee Lucas claimed that the Hand of Death cult maintained a ranch, years earlier. (See online file, ‘Programmed to Kill’, by David McGowan) 1999 – It’s discovered that Microsoft has provided the NSA with a key to allow them backdoor entrance into every copy of Windows 95osr2, Windows 98, Windows 98 SE, Windows NT 4, and the soon to be released Windows 2000. 1999 – First wireless networking.

2000 – Computers and cell phones are becoming heavily proliferated in the Western world, offering the potential means to act as a carrier for transmitting and receiving brainwave signals for mind-control purposes. 2000 – RCMP consider getting a warrant to search Robert Pickton’s property after reports that he is involved in the disappearance of missing women from Vancouver BC’s lower east side, but fail to do so. 2000 (May) – The Jefferson County Sheriff’s Office, amid pressure over the long delay in publishing their investigation’s findings into the Columbine massacre, releases a report that includes an overwhelming 11,000 pages of material, making it a slow process for the public to sort through. 2000 (September) – At about this time, eight people are arrested in Italy and three in Russia, and police say that another 1,700 people are being investigated in Italy, as yet another pedophile network surfaces. The images traded by this ring included ones in which children are raped and tortured to death. By November, close to 1,500 people will be charged in the case. There are clear indications of high-level complicity and a strong belief among the Italian people that the facts of the case are being covered up. The magistrate heading up the inquiry denounces a ‘paedophile lobby’ supported by highlevel politicians who openly obstruct investigators. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 2000 (September) – According to Diana Napolis (or someone posing as her), she has an ‘alien abduction’ experience. She kinesthetically feels an object come over her that she believes is extracting her astral body, after which she is taken aboard a craft. She is shown a pictograph of two diminutive ‘aliens’ struggling over a weapon, as well as physics equations on a chalk aboard. She tells them she is not proficient in physics but if she can assist them with something she will consider it. She then returns to her body. 2000 (December 26) – Edgewater Technology employee Michael ‘Mucko’ McDermott shoots and kills seven of his coworkers at the office in Wakefield, MA. McDermott claims he had “traveled back in time and killed Hitler and the last six Nazis.” He will be sentenced to seven consecutive life sentences. McDermott had previously served in the Navy aboard a nuclear submarine. 2000 – Michael Aquino and others continue their efforts to discover the identity of Diana Napolis, who is attempting to expose their pedophile activities. A satanic cult ‘retractor’ and alleged MPD/DID sufferer, Michelle Devereaux, eventually approaches Napolis and claims that ‘dangerous’ individuals are seeking her identity and Devereaux is concerned about her safety. A ‘sting’ is then orchestrated by satanist Devereaux and unknown others, at which time Devereaux files a false police report at the San Francisco Police Department so that San Diego State University (SDSU) would identify Napolis. For unknown reasons, SDSU then releases Napolis’

name to San Diego Union-Tribune reporter Mark Sauer even though Napolis has told them that dangerous people are seeking her identity. Mark Sauer proceeds to write an invasive and defamatory news article in the San Diego Union-Tribune titled, The Web of Intrigue, The Search for Curio Leads Cybersleuths Down a Twisted Path, which consists of false allegations made by Carol Hopkins, Elizabeth Loftus, Michelle Devereaux, and Michael Aquino. There are numerous efforts made in this article to make it appear that Napolis is writing ‘libelous’ online posts when in fact these people are making libelous allegations about her in efforts to ruin her reputation, in retaliation, due to her investigation that had exposed them. Although Devereaux's actions against Napolis were described by Mark Sauer as ‘cyber-sleuthing’, her overall behavior actually meets the criteria for a criminal stalking complaint. 2000 – Noreen Gosch publishes her book, Why Johnny Can’t Come Home, detailing her private investigation into the abduction and sex-slavery of her son Johnny in 1982, which was perpetrated by satanist and pedophile Michael Aquino. 2001 (January) – Interpol agrees to set up an electronic library of child sex victims at its headquarters in Lyon, France. The first images to be processed into that database are 750,000 photos seized by British authorities in the Wonderland raids. The database has the potential to be used as a recruitment list to identify those persons who have been ‘preconditioned’ for future mind-control operations. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 2001 (March) – Yet another interlinked, global pedophile network called Blue Orchid is exposed, and four Americans are arrested for their involvement. 2001 (March 5) – A shooting at Santana High School in San Diego, California, leaves two dead and thirteen wounded. The killer is Charles ‘Andy’ Williams, whose mother is in the military and father is in intelligence. After Williams moved with his family to San Diego from Fort Dettrick (a base deeply connected to psychological operations), his father began working at a Naval Medical Center that was involved with neurosurgery. 2001 (September 11) – The attack on the World Trade Center in New York City and the Pentagon in Washington, DC. At least 2,744 lives are lost in New York this day. The Bush Administration will immediately point the finger at Osama bin Laden. An incredible amount of evidence reveals that this was an inside job, perpetrated on the American people by its own government. It will lead to increased domestic surveillance and sweeping anti-terrorist laws. The New World Order will suddenly begin to loom much closer.

One telltale sign that this is a false flag operation that is evident in other ‘terrorist’ events in the US is that there is a military exercise drill going on at the exact same time, using the same type of scenario as the actual event – in this case, that a plane is going to fly into a building in New York City. This exercise caused NORAD to stand down at that time, thus allowing the hijacked planes to fly into the towers and the Pentagon. 2001 – Reports indicate that there are over 100,000 child pornography sites on the internet. 2002 (January) – John Poindexter, working through Syntek Technologies, is appointed to develop sophisticated data-mining software for DARPA’s Total Information Awareness program. The system will utilize sophisticated computer algorithms to find relevant information – links between people, organizations, places, and things – from the masses of available data, looking for connecting information patterns that can be evaluated and analyzed, and learning what patterns discriminate between legitimate and suspicious behavior. During the Reagan administration, Poindexter was the highest-ranking official to be found guilty during the Iran-Contra affair. He had been convicted of five felony counts of lying to Congress, destroying official documents, and obstructing congressional investigations, and was sentenced to prison by a federal judge who called him “the decision-making head” of a plot to deceive Congress. Later, an appeals court overturned the conviction on a technicality, holding that the testimony Poindexter gave to Congress about Iran-Contra was immunized, and therefore couldn't be used against him at his trial. Now he was in charge of designing the software system that would be the eyes and ears of Big Brother, siphoning all digital communications for possible ‘terrorists’. 2002 – Despite the fact that she has previously been a high-functioning social worker in her local community with no criminal record, Diana Napolis begins suffering from attacks from ‘nonlethal’ electronic weapons, as well as hearing unexplained ‘voices’ in her head. Several of these voices appear to be that of filmmaker Steven Spielberg and actress Jennifer Love-Hewitt. She attempts to confront these two celebrities and ends up being charged with a criminal offense that leads to a year of jail time, months in a mental hospital, and the end of her career. She is also given a court order to refrain from using the internet, which makes it impossible for her to defend herself against further claims against her. She only later realizes that her perpetrators (Michael Aquino and others) coerced her to confront these celebrities and act as she did. 2002 (February 5) – A number of Hell’s Angels members in the Vancouver area (Canada) have recently been busted for drugs and guns. Soon after, the charges are mysteriously dropped. Soon after, the ongoing investigation into missing women in Vancouver leads police to a pig farm in the outlying town

of Port Coquitlam. A warrant is served on its owner, Robert Pickton, and a search of the site uncovers a gruesome scene – human body parts, including heads, hands, and feet, stored in a meat freezer in one of the sheds. They belong to two of the missing women. Other evidence found on the site includes clothing and ID cards belonging to many of the missing women. A wood chipper is found at the site, and is believed to have been used to dispose of other body parts. Pickton is charged with fifteen counts of first degree murder. As the investigation continues and details begin to come out, an information ban is ordered by the courts, keeping many of the details of the investigation from public awareness. Every inch of Pickton’s property will be carefully scoured for DNA traces of other missing person’s, and much will be found. The circumstances leading to his arrest, coming immediately after the stay of charges on Hell’s Angels members, suggest that Pickton has been made into a ‘fall guy’. As the investigation and court trial proceeds, many important police documents will somehow be ‘lost’. The murder count will reach 49. (See online file, Death Farm, by Charles Mudede) 2002 (March) – Knight Ridder carries a report that states: “Postal inspectors, the FBI and Canadian authorities have broken up an underground network of adults who traded pornographic videos of children – sometimes their own – being brutally beaten.” Ten arrested have already been made at the time of the report, and more are expected. The brutally sadistic beatings involved whips, hairbrushes, canes, and wooden paddles. Among those convicted are a middle school teacher, a nurse, a former Boy Scout leader, and a former Sunday school teacher. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 2002 (August) – The Independent reports that US authorities have uncovered a child pornography ring stretching to Britain and continental Europe, in which parents sexually abused their children and distributed photographs of them over the internet. (See online file, The Pedophocracy, by David McGowan) 2002 – A woman files rape charges against George Bush, and is found dead from a gun-shot wound 9 months later. There is a near-total blackout in the media on the subject. 2003 (July 8) – Doug Williams, a Lockheed Martin employee, shoots up his plant in Meridian, MS in a racially-motivated rampage. He shoots 14 people, most of them African American, and kills 7 before killing himself. 2003 (September) – The International Herald Tribune carries a report from Berlin concerning “an international police investigation [that] had uncovered an immense child pornography ring involving 26,500 suspects who swapped

illegal images on the Internet in 166 countries.” More than 500 homes in Germany have been searched and hundreds of computers seized, along with tens of thousands of CD-ROMs, diskettes, and videotapes. One seized image shows a baby of four months being abused. The German Interior and Justice Ministries issues a warning that many of the suspects, a number of whom are reportedly teachers and police officials, “are extremely dangerous pedophiles and are from all walks of life.” About 800 suspects reside in the United States. 2003 – Author and Illuminati exposer Fritz Springmeier is framed for a bank robbery and sentenced to nine years in prison. 2005 – The NSA implements information technology called ‘Turbulence’, an extension of their ECHELON system that includes offensive cyber-warfare capabilities, such as injecting malware into remote computers. (See online file, National Security Agency, at wikipedia) 2005 (March 21) – A massacre at Red Lake High School in at the Red Lake Indian Reservation in Minnesota leaves ten people dead. The shooter, 27year-old Jeff Weise, ends the ordeal by shooting himself in the head. He is wearing a black trench coat. Prior to arriving at the school on his rampage, Weise had shot and killed his grandparents. A second shooter is detained but later completely disappears from all reports, the FBI report and all the video surveillance evidence will be kept secret, five fulltime FBI agents will be permanently located in Red Lake, and according to Weise’s internet posts, unmarked vans full of FBI agents began showing up at Red Lake the year before, and he said he had been named as a possible shooter back then. Weise was having strange dream experiences, similar to virtual reality scenarios. The following is one of his internet posts: "Lately I've been having some really strange dreams, they seem very realistic and filled with colour and sounds, ....a few night's ago I had this dream where I saw this very evil, very creepy canine's face coming toward's me, and I heard someone say "shoot!," either way everything went black and I could feel my whole body jerking and shaking, and while this was happening I could hear very loud and very distinct gunshot's, mostly machine gun fire... I found it very weird and woke up immediately after feeling a little disoriented... ." 2005 (July 7) – The terrorist bombing attack in London. Scotland Yard is performing a ‘crisis exercise’ on the same day, in which the scenarios exactly parallel the attack, with bombs exploding exactly at the railway stations where the “terrorist” bombing occurred.

2005 (November) – The CIA is active in operating recruitment programs based out of Virginia Tech at this time, and will continue to be as of the 2007 shootings at that campus by killer Seung-Hui Cho. A coalition of concerned graduate students and campus organizations at Virginia Tech stage a ‘teach in’ to protest CIA recruitment on campus. Planned events also include the protest of a ‘career information’ session to be held by the CIA. Several professors from Virginia Tech are involved in government programs linked with NASA and other agencies. (See online file, Seung-Hui Cho Was a Mind-Controlled Assassin, by Paul Joseph Watson) 2005 – The online organization Freedom From Covert Harassment and Surveillance (FFCHS) is established by ex-NSA employee Derrick Robinson. FFCHS will position itself as a support group for people who believe that they are being targeted by government COINTELPRO tactics, electronic harassment, or mind-control. Through their activities and promoted material, FFCHS will encourage anybody, whether real targets or imagined, sane or delusional, to claim that they are victims of government harassment. FFCHS will promote the most unrealistic claims about the purported technologies used in this targeting, misleading many people about their capabilities while downplaying the more plausible targeting methods. FFCHS will come to reflect many indications that it is actually a cult, drawing in the most gullible people who tend to fall for traditional cult-oriented mind-control tactics. Through its heavy promotion over the years among a growing online community of purported government targets, FFCHS will be in an ideal position to identify, monitor, recruit, contain, and control anyone who already is or might make a good candidate for mind-control. Much of their efforts will serve to destroy the credibility of those people who are actually being targeted by encouraging obviously false or delusional claims to be made as well. 2006 (March 25) – Seven die and two are injured by 28-year-old Kyle Aaron Huff in a shooting spree through Capitol Hill in Seattle, Washington. 2006 (May) – Mark Kline, a former AT&T employee, alleges in court that this company was cooperating with the NSA in installing hardware to spy on both domestic and foreign network communications. (See online file, National Security Agency, at wikipedia) 2006 (October 2) – An Amish schoolhouse in Lancaster, PA is gunned down by 32-year-old Charles Carl Roberts. Roberts separates the boys from the girls, binding and shooting the girls. 5 young girls die and 6 are injured. Roberts commits suicide afterwards. 2007 (February 12) – The Trolley Square massacre in Salt Lake City, Utah. The shooter, 18-year-old Suleiman Talovic, leaves five dead and four

wounded. He is wearing a dark trench coat during the attack. He will be described as being totally calm and silent throughout the rampage. 2007 (April 16) – Virginia Tech shootings. The shooter, Seung-Hui Cho, kills 32 people and wounds 17 others in two separate attacks, approximately two hours apart, before taking his own life. Out of 174 rounds fired, he will make 135-odd hits, which is an astoundingly high percentage, suggesting he had extensive weapons training. The incident starts in the early morning when Cho shoots and kills two victims. He then goes to his dorm room on campus, changes his clothes, deletes his email, and removes the hard-drive from his computer. About two hours later, he appears at a nearby post office and mails a package of writings and video recordings to NBC News. This package will be found to contain an 1800 word manifesto, photographs, and a number of digitized videos in which Cho compares himself to Jesus Christ and expresses his hatred of the wealthy. After mailing the package, he then returns to campus and enters Norris Hall, chaining the three main entrances so no one can get in or out. He places a note on at least one of the doors, warning that a bomb will explode if entry is attempted. A faculty member will find the note and report it, but no action will be taken. Cho begins to shoot and kill those he encounters in the building. After killing 30 and wounding 17 within a 10 – 12 minute period, Cho shoots himself in the head. For some reason, the FBI, BATF, DEA, and the Secret Service arrive as first responders or investigators, rather than local police. BATF will tell FOX News that their response was “immediate”. In the ensuing investigation, police will find a suicide note in Cho's dorm room that includes comments about “rich kids”, “debauchery”, and “deceitful charlatans”. The result of this shooting incident will be the institution of tougher gun laws. Cho had a lifetime of anxiety disorders, and in 2005, after being accused of stalking two women, he was ordered to undergo psychiatric treatment. Several former professors of Cho’s will report that his writing as well as his classroom behavior had been disturbing, and he had been encouraged to seek counseling. Between the time Cho is identified by name and the time his mailed package is received, there will be reports on the news that he was an ex-Marine. After this, this will never be mentioned again. 2007 – Serial murderer Robert Pickton is convicted for six counts of seconddegree murder. 2009 (January 24) – 24-year-old Richard Ayala fires into a crowd at a nightclub in Portland, Oregon, killing three people and wounding six before taking his own life. A note found at his home will insinuate he was planning on committing suicide.

2009 (March 11) – 17-year-old Tim Kretschmer, wearing black combat gear, goes on a rampage in Albertville-Realschule, Germany, killing a total of 16 people (including himself) and wounding 7. He first descends on his former school, killing nine students and three teachers and wounding seven before leaving and going to a mental health clinic in nearby Winnenden where he used to receive treatment, killing another person. He leaves the clinic and then comes back and kills two more. After this, he hijacks a car and goes to a car dealership in the nearby town of Wendlingen where he kills two others before taking his own life. Almost all of his victims are women. At one point there are between 700 and 1,000 police officers chasing him. Witnesses will describe him as being in a trance during the school shooting. One former classmate will state that Kretschmer used to spend all day in front of the computer. He reportedly had a problem fitting in. Kretschmer’s father is a wealthy businessman and avid gun enthusiast, and was Kreschmer himself had won a number of shooting competitions in the past. From April to September of 2008 Kreschmer had been under psychiatric treatment, and attended a psychiatric clinic in Weissenhoff five times between April and September before his care was transferred to the centre in Winnenden and he broke off treatment. 2009 (April 3) – Jiverly Wong, 41, opens fire at an immigration center in Binghamton, New York before committing suicide. He kills 13 people and wounds 4. Police will state that he was wearing body armor. Wong’s family came to the US from Vietnam in 1990. Wong’s father had been a captain in the South Vietnamese Army. Wong would have had to do compulsory service in the Vietnamese Army from 1986 to 1989. Wong’s parents will describe their son as having shown signs of mental illness 19 years earlier when he claimed that someone was trying to kill him. He moved to California soon after that, and they didn’t see him for 15 years. When he moved back, his father says that he had changed. He had worked for a sushi restaurant for seven years until he suddenly stopped showing up in 2007. Two weeks before the shooting, Wong stopped eating and watching TV, and spent most of his time alone in his room. A letter written by Wong will arrive at News 10 Now in Syracuse three days after the shooting. In it, Wong writes that undercover police officers were taunting him, torturing him, and spreading rumors about him wherever he went. Pictures will be included of him holding guns. 2009 (November 5) – 43 people are shot by Army psychiatrist Nidal Malik Hasan at the Fort Hood Army Base in Texas. Hasan reportedly yells “Allahu Akbar!” before opening fire, killing 13 and wounding 29 others. He will be described as appearing vacant, neither happy nor angry, during the shootings.

2011 (January 8) – Former congresswoman Gabrielle Giffords (D-AZ) is shot in the head when 22-year-old Jared Lee Loughner opens fire on an event Giffords is holding at a Safeway market in Tucson, Arizona. Six people die, including Arizona District Court Chief Judge John Roll, one of Giffords’ staffers, and a 9-year-old girl. 13 people are wounded. Witnesses will report that Loughner appeared emotionless during the incident. He will be sentenced to seven life terms plus 140 years, without parole. Prior to the shooting, Loughner had started writing in notebooks using a code. He was labeled as schizophrenic, and had fears that the college police were out to get him. He had attempted to enlist in the Army at some point in the past, but was rejected. A skull shrine will be discovered in Loughner’s backyard. 2011 (September 6) – 32-year-old Eduardo Sencion enters an IHOP restaurant in Carson City, Nevada and shoots 12 people. Five die, including three National Guard members. In the end, he turns the gun on himself. Both the FBI and BATF will become involved in the investigation for some reason. The shooting occurs at a location that is surrounded by military installations and recruitment centers. 2011 (December 8) – Virginia Tech shooting. 22-year-old Ross Truett Ashley randomly kills a police officer who is sitting in his cruiser. Within a half hour, Ashley will be found dead, apparently from suicide. The FBI, BATF, Secret Service, and DEA arrive as first responders/investigators. Ashley had gone to the shooting range with a friend at least three times prior to the shooting. He will be described as normal. He has no online footprint and no criminal history. There will be no known motive. 2011 – Truth and Reconciliation Commission hearing in Victoria, BC, is supposed to be a healing event for victims of sexual abuse and torture, but the presence of many of their abusers – high-ranking clergy members – sitting front-row before the stage while the victims tell their stories, is purposefully intimidating. When one of the victims makes accusations of one of those in attendance, the TRC Commissioner angrily tells her to “show some respect”. The command effectively re-traumatizes the victims and stops them from speaking openly. 2012 (January 27) – A shooting at Chardon High School in Chardon, Ohio by T. J. Lane. Three are killed and three are wounded. When asked why he did it, Lane will state, “I don't know.” At another point he will state, “I don't really understand myself.” For some reason, the FBI, BATF, and DEA will all take part in the investigation. Psychiatric testimony given during his preliminary hearing will state that Lane suffers from auditory hallucinations and involuntary fantasies. Lane will be described as a good and intelligent person who has never been in trouble before.

2012 (May 26) – A shooting in Hyvinkää, Finland, leaves two dead and seven wounded. The shooter, 18-year-old Eero Samuli Hiltunen, will express remorse for his actions under questioning, and will indicate that he understands the consequences of his actions, but will be unable to give a reason for his opening fire on a group of people. Hiltunen had enlisted in the army at the beginning of the year but left before completing his stint. 2012 (May 29) – Ian Stawicki opens fire in the Cafe Racer Espresso in Seattle, Washington, killing 5 people and then commits suicide after a citywide manhunt. Stawicki, whose brother later described him as mentally ill and full of anger, had frequented the café regularly. According to his brother, Stawicki had spent time in the military and this is where his mental illness surfaced, although there is no record of him having served active duty. 2012 (July 20) – A mass shooting takes place in a movie theatre in Aurora, Colorado, leaving 12 dead and 58 injured. The alleged shooter is a man named James Holmes, who is arrested without incident behind the theatre, where he is found sitting in his car. There is a loaded 40 mm Glock on the seat beside him but he appears ‘meek’ and non-threatening. His hair is died orange and he introduces himself as ‘The Joker’. He is reportedly wearing a black trench coat. After his arrest, Holmes repeatedly asks his prison guards “Why am I here?”, claiming to have no recollection of the killings. At least one witness to this shooting describes a suspicious man with a goatee in the theatre just prior to the shooting who looked very similar to Wayne Michael Page – the man who will later be involved in a mass shooting in Oak Creek, Wisconsin, only months later. This suspected accomplice is seen receiving a cell call while sitting in the front row of the theatre, after which he gets up and props open a fire exit door. Moments later, someone dressed in full SWAT gear and gas mask enters through the same door and starts shooting at the theatre audience. There are no witnesses who actually see Holmes in the theatre, but several report multiple shooters. A second gas mask is found at the scene, indicating a second accomplice. All of this will be disregarded by the police and Holmes will be portrayed as a lone killer. During his arrest, Holmes informs the police that his apartment has been booby-trapped with explosives. When they investigate it, they find that it has been rigged up in a very sophisticated manner, taking them several days to disarm. Holmes reportedly had acquired a large variety of explosives and over 6,000 rounds of ammunition. How he had acquired the weapons, riot gear, and explosives cannot be accounted for. He was living off a $26,000 a year student grant that would barely cover tuition fees, textbooks, food, and rent. Holmes is said to be a highly intelligent 24-year-old neuroscience student who had already earned a BS degree in 2010. He was scheduled to present a paper on micro-RNA biomarkers for a class on psychiatric and neurological disorders. Holmes’ mother is a psychiatric nurse, and his father is a senior lead scientist at the San Diego office of Minneapolis-based FICO. Holmes had

been seeing a psychiatrist by the name of Dr. Lynne Fenton, who is a former Air Force psychiatrist. He had tried to call Fenton only minutes before the shooting, and had sent her a package sometime earlier, which authorities will refuse to reveal the contents of. Also, there will be reports that Holmes mailed a notebook filled with gruesome sketches and details of his plans for the attack to a professor at the University of Colorado where Holmes had recently dropped out. He will appear to be under heavy sedation during his first court appearance, indicating that he is purposely being kept under heavy control. For some reason, over 100 FBI agents, as well as members of the BATF and the Joint Terrorism Task Force (JTTF), will take part in the investigation. Ominously, the words ‘Aurora’ and ‘Sandy Hook’ (the site of another future shooting) are depicted in the Batman movie and movie trailers that are playing at the theatre that night. Also, the period from July 20 to July 27 is known to satanists as the Grand Climax. July 27 will be the opening ceremonies of the Olympic games in London. 2012 (August 5) – A mass shooting that leaves seven dead and an undisclosed number wounded takes place at a Sikh Temple in Oak Creek, Wisconsin. Although Wade Michael Page will be depicted as the lone shooter, witnesses will report seeing other accomplices. However, the mention of other shooters being involved will be quickly suppressed, and the investigation will be closed with determining a motive. Page either commits suicide or is killed by the police. In June, Page moved out on his girlfriend and stopped showing up for work, disappearing from sight. This had been only a few days before a previous massacre at a theatre in Aurora, Colorado involving James Holmes. Someone who looked like Page was seen acting suspiciously in the theatre just prior to that event. There is also a good possibility that Page was involved in the Columbine shootings in Littleton, Colorado. He was living in Littleton at this time, evidenced by a traffic ticket served to him in 1999 by local law enforcement. There is also a possibility that he was a member of the Trench Coat Mafia that Columbine shooters Eric Harris and Dylan Klebold belonged to. A photo of him held by the Littleton authorities from this time period is being suppressed, at the request of Wisconsin authorities. Why? Page was a neo-Nazi with ties to the military as part of a psyops unit. From 1992 to 1998, he was a US Army ‘psychological operations specialist’ with US military secret clearances out of Fort Bliss, Texas (Fort Bragg is a known outlet for white supremacists). Part of his duties as a psyops specialist was to ‘manage perceptions’. This includes “actions to convey and/or deny selected information and indicators to … audiences to influence their emotions, motives, and objective reasoning … ultimately resulting in … behaviors and official actions favorable to the originator’s objectives.”

2012 (September 27) – Five people are shot to death by 36-year-old Andrew Engeldinger at Accent Signage Systems in Minneapolis, Minnesota. Three people are wounded. Engeldinger goes on his rampage after losing his job for being continually late, ending it by killing himself. Engeldinger is described by his parents as highly intelligent but having a history of mental illness. 2012 (December 11) - 22-year-old Jacob Tyler Roberts, wearing a white hockey mask, bullet-proof vest, and dressed in camouflage, wounds one person and kills two others before turning a stolen rifle on himself in the Clackamas Town Center in Portland, Oregon. His motive is unknown. An estimated 100 law enforcement personnel quickly descend on the mall, including local police, state troopers, and four tactical weapons teams, supported by members of the FBI and BATF. Roberts will be described by friends as a relaxed, friendly, and outgoing man who had been looking forward to moving to Hawaii before missing his flight just prior to the shooting. He had dreamed of becoming a Marine before an injured foot stopped him from enlisting. Just prior to the shooting, Roberts had stopped off at his best friend’s house and told him “that he had to go and that he didn’t want to.” He also gave him a bracelet that he always wore, and hugged him. 2012 (December 14) – A school shooting at Sandy Hook Elementary School in Newtown, Connecticut, allegedly leaves 26 dead – 20 of them firstgrade children. The alleged killer, 20-year-old Adam Lanza, ends the rampage by shooting himself in the head. Earlier that morning, Lanza had reportedly shot his mother in the head four times, killing her while she lay sleeping in bed. His computer hard-drive had been removed and destroyed prior to the shooting. A teacher’s car in the school parking lot had been riddled with bullets. Lanza is described by a number of people who knew him as being highly intelligent but deeply disturbed, subject to outbursts, and “immune to physical pain”. He is also reported to have suffered from autism and/or Asperger’s syndrome. Interestingly, he had studied J. D. Sallinger’s The Catcher in the Rye in high school when he was 16 years old. He is described by those who knew him as a loner with no friends and into Goth music. Lanza’s mother was reportedly a gun collector and often took Adam and his brother Ryan out target shooting. Reports of the shooting describe Lanza as being a very accurate shot. There will be a strange lack of injured survivors, credible witnesses, or anyone at the school who even knew Adam Lanza, leaving no known motive for the murders. As police arrive at the school, they see a maroon-colored van leaving the scene. Two other unidentified people are picked up in the woods near the school soon after the shooting. One of them is seen carrying a gun and being chased by the police. He will later be identified as an off-duty tactical squad

police officer from another Connecticut district. At least one of these suspects will be wearing camouflage gear. A possible third suspect is apprehended at the front of the school. Early police reports will claim that there are up to seven suspects. No explanation will be given as to why these suspects were in the area, what they were doing, or what happened to them. Later reports will unexplainably claim that there Adam Lanza was the only suspect. Early reports state that a Bushmaster .223 semi-automatic rifle was found in Lanza’s car, but later reports state that this is the weapon that was used in the shootings. The question arises as to how this rifle ended up back in the car after the massacre/suicide, since Lanza’s body was found in the school. Little to no evidence that this crime took place will be forthcoming, particularly the victim’s bodies. There was a question as to whether any children had actually been killed. Parents of the victims are only allowed to identify their children through photographs, rather than identifying their bodies. Some of the victim’s parents will be seen on video footage laughing and joking moments before getting into character and then going on camera to grieve to the viewing public over his loss. Children shown in photographs being evacuated from the school do not look upset, and some are even smiling. Very little information will come out beyond the first reports, while all news reports will focus on the grieving friends and family, and gun control laws. Medical responders are denied entry to the school. Officers will be assigned to each of the 26 families of the victims, which will severely restrict the families from being able to speak to the media or anyone else about what they might know. The killer’s father, Peter Lanza, is vice-president of GE Energy Financial Services, a subsidiary of General Electric. General Electric is also a major contractor for the US military/intelligence organs, often involved in developing covert mind-control technologies. There is a possibility that Lanza’s mother was a CIA P2 analyst working for the Defense Research Projects Agency (DARPA) and also for the Department of Homeland Security (DHS). The FBI, BATF, DEA, US Attorney's Office, Department of Homeland Security (DHS), Marshals Service, and Postal Inspectors will all be involved in the investigation. On this same day, the DHS and FEMA are running a joint training exercise for emergency teams (FEMA L-366 Planning for the Needs of Children in Disasters) at the nearby Carmel Elementary School. Interestingly, the US government’s Social Security Death Index will list Adam Lanza’s death as occurring the day before the shooting. Helicopter footage taken about an hour after the shooting will show further evidence that this event was staged. There are only three children visible at any time, although hundreds have supposedly been evacuated from the school and taken to the fire station next door to wait for their parents to pick them up. The footage also shows that the only road leading to the school is

blocked by numerous police cars and SUVs, which would mean that no ambulances or other rescue vehicles could get in or out. The many people seen in the footage are at the fire station and are just milling around and chatting leisurely, showing no sense of urgency. There is very little activity at the school itself, nor ambulances that would be expected to be there to deal with any wounded. Eight ambulances are parked at the fire station and appear to be completely unattended, while several other ambulances can be seen slowly driving by on the main road. At least 20 emergency medical teams can be seen just standing around doing nothing. State police can also be seen putting on combat gear, even though there is no reason to other than perhaps for a photo op. 2013 (January 22) – Shooting at Texas College campus. 2013 (April 15) – The Boston Marathon bombing. Photographic evidence will reveal that the bombing was faked and the many reported victims who will claim to have lost limbs from the blasts – particularly the central figure, Jeff Bauman – are actors. This means that this is a psyop that involves many people, including medical teams, police, FBI, etc.